MastercamX GettingStartedGuide

Getting Started Guide
Mastercam X
Getting Started
Guide
July, 2005
ii • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
Mastercam® Getting Started Guide

Date: July 15, 2005
Copyright © 2005 CNC Software, Inc. — All rights reserved.
First Printing: July 15, 2005
Software: Mastercam X
ISBN: 1-883310-41-5
IMPORTANT NOTICE! PLEASE READ THIS STATEMENT AND THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
COMPLETELY BEFORE USING THIS SOFTWARE.
BY CONTINUING TO USE THIS SOFTWARE, YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR A
SINGLE ENTITY) INDICATE YOUR INTENTION TO BE BOUND BY AND ACCEPT
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE. IF YOU DO NOT
AGREE TO THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT ACCESS OR
OTHERWISE USE THIS SOFTWARE AND WILL IN FACT BE PROHIBITED FROM
DOING SO. THIS COMPUTER SOFTWARE MAY BE USED ONLY PURSUANT TO
THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET FORTH BELOW, AND SOLELY IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THE ACCOMPANYING SECURITY MECHANISM (UNLESS
OTHERWISE SPECIFIED IN THE "EXCEPTIONS TO SECURITY MECHANISM
REQUIREMENTS" SECTION OF SUCH TERMS AND CONDITIONS) WHICH
MUST BE PRESENT ON YOUR COMPUTER (OR NETWORK AS APPLICABLE) AT
ALL TIMES DURING SUCH USE.
Read This If You Have Received This Software From A Third Party: If you received
this Software from someone other than an authorized CNC Software, Inc. reseller,
you do NOT have a legal software license. (For example, if you acquired this
Software simply by buying a machine or Software from the former owner or from
an auction, you do not have a valid license.) You should contact CNC Software,
Inc. (860-875-5006) in order to obtain a new and valid license. Use of this Software
without a valid software license is unlawful, a violation of the Copyright Act and
may expose you to criminal liability under 17 United States Code Sec. 506,
including fines and damages.
Software License If you have paid a license fee, CNC Software, Inc. ("CNC") a Connecticut
corporation with its principal place of business at 671 Old Post Road, Tolland,
Connecticut, 06084 hereby grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(the "License") to use this software program (the "Software") and its
accompanying documentation (and, if applicable, to permit your authorized
employees to use them), solely in accordance with the terms and conditions of this
Software License Agreement . You may use the Software solely for your internal
business purposes and solely in conjunction with the accompanying hardware or
software device, method, scheme or other security measure provided by CNC
which allows a user to access the Software and prevents unauthorized access to the
Software (the "Security Mechanism"). The Software, any updates to the Software
(including any that you download through the Internet), and the Documentation
shall hereinafter collectively be referred to as the "Software" and are all governed
by this License.
Restrictions You may not use the Software without a Security Mechanism provided by CNC or
CNC’s suppliers. When CNC or CNC’s suppliers provide you with a single-user
Security Mechanism, the Software may only be used (in executable code form
only) on a single computer to which the Security Mechanism is physically
attached. In the event CNC or CNC’s suppliers provide you with a multiple-user
Security Mechanism for use over an internal network (a "Network Security
Mechanism"), the Software may be used: (a) in executable code form only; (b) only
on end-user computers that are connected to the internal network to which the
Network Security Mechanism is attached; and (c) only by the number of users and
iii
accessed by the number of end-user computers for which licenses were purchased
and as further allowed by the Network Security Mechanism. You may physically
transfer the Software from one computer equipped with a single-user Security
Mechanism to another only if the Security Mechanism is included in the transfer
and is installed with the new computer.
11
You shall not: (a) copy (except as provided below), adapt, modify the Software; (b)
publish, display, disclose or create a derivative work from the Software or any part
thereof; (c) de-compile or translate, disassemble, create or attempt to create, by
reverse engineering or otherwise, the source code form of the Software from the
executable code of the Software; (d) remove any proprietary notices, labels or
12
marks from the Software; (e) sell, rent, lease, distribute or otherwise transfer or
provide all or any part of the Software to any person or entity without the prior
written consent of CNC; (f) use the Software to provide outsourcing, service
bureau, time sharing or other services to any third party; or (g) sublicense, assign,
delegate or otherwise transfer your rights in the Software, under the Software
13
License Agreement or any of the related rights or obligations for any reason
without the prior written consent of CNC. You shall not circumvent, bypass,
14
modify, reverse engineer, disassemble, disable, alter, enhance or replicate the
function of the Security Mechanism in any manner whatsoever. Any attempt to do
so shall result in automatic termination of this License without prejudice to all
other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Copying Restrictions You may make one (1) copy of the Software for backup or archival purposes,
Non Transferable
provided that you reproduce all proprietary notices of CNC on any such copy.
You may not transfer or assign the Software or this Software License Agreement or
any rights or obligations hereunder. Any attempt to do so will automatically
15
terminate this License without the need for notice. This termination is without
prejudice to all other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
Intellectual Property Rights The Software is and includes intellectual property of CNC. All associated
intellectual property rights, including, without limitation, worldwide patent,
trademark, copyright and trade secret rights, are reserved. CNC retains all right,
16
title and interest in and copyrights to the Software, regardless of the form or media
in or on which the original or other copies may subsequently exist. This Software
License Agreement shall not constitute a sale of the Software and no title or
proprietary rights to the Software are transferred to you hereby. You acknowledge
that the Software is a unique, confidential and valuable asset of CNC, and CNC
17
shall have the right to seek all equitable and legal redress, which may be available
to it for the breach or threatened breach of this Software License Agreement
including, without limitation, injunctive relief. Unauthorized copying of the
Software or failure to comply with the above restrictions shall result in automatic
termination of this License and this Software License Agreement without prejudice
to all other legal rights and remedies of CNC.
18
Confidentiality You acknowledge that the Software contains proprietary trade secrets of CNC and
19
you hereby agree to maintain the confidentiality of the Software using at least as
great a degree of care as you use to maintain the confidentiality of your own most
confidential information. You agree to reasonably communicate the terms and
conditions of this Software License Agreement to those persons employed by you
who come into contact with the Software, and to use reasonable best efforts to
ensure their compliance with such terms and conditions, including, without
limitation, not knowingly permitting such persons to use any portion of the
Software for the purpose of deriving the source code of the Software or defeating
the Security Mechanism.
110
Enforcement Obligations In the event you become aware that any person or entity in your employ or under
your control in a manner not authorized by this Software License Agreement is
iv • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
using the Software, you shall immediately use reasonable best efforts to have such
unauthorized use of the Software immediately cease. You shall promptly notify
CNC in writing of any unauthorized use of the Software of which you become
aware.
Limited Warranties CNC WARRANTS THAT THE MEDIA ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS
DISTRIBUTED WILL BE FREE OF DEFECTS IN MATERIAL OR WORKMANSHIP
FOR A PERIOD OF THIRTY (30) DAYS AFTER PURCHASE. THE FOREGOING
LIMITED WARRANTY EXCLUDES DEFECTS ARISING OUT OF ACCIDENT,
NEGLECT, MISUSE, FAILURE OF ELECTRIC POWER AND CAUSES OTHER THAN
ORDINARY AND AUTHORIZED USE. EXCEPT FOR THE FOREGOING LIMITED
WARRANTY, THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS, WITH ALL FAULTS." YOUR
SOLE REMEDY AND CNC’S SOLE OBLIGATION HEREUNDER SHALL BE, AT
CNC’S SOLE OPTION, REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFECTIVE MEDIA OR REFUND
OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE BY YOU OF THE
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR OWN RISK. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE ONLY
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY CNC REGARDING THE SOFTWARE. TO THE
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, CNC DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. CNC IS NOT OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE
ANY UPDATES TO THE SOFTWARE. SHOULD THE SOFTWARE PROVE
DEFECTIVE FOLLOWING ITS PURCHASE, YOU (AND NOT CNC, ITS
DISTRIBUTOR, OR RETAILER) ASSUME THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY
SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION AND ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Note on Documentation: While CNC makes every effort to ensure that its
Documentation for the Software is accurate and up-to-date, it cannot guarantee
the Documentation at all times represents the latest operation and functionality of
the Software. The content of the "Getting Started Guide," "User Manual" and other
documentation for the Software is provided for informational purposes only. The
content of the Documentation may be changed without notice to you. CNC
expressly disclaims any warranty or representation that the Documentation is an
accurate and/or current reflection of the Software’s operation and performance.
Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL CNC, OR ITS EMPLOYEES, SHAREHOLDERS, DISTRIBUTORS
OR SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, SPECIAL,
PUNITIVE OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF BUSINESS INFORMATION)
ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT OR THE SUBJECT MATTER HEREOF EVEN IF CNC HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. CNC’S ENTIRE LIABILITY
WITH RESPECT TO ITS OBLIGATIONS UNDER THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE
AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF THE
LICENSE FEE PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIABILITY FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE
LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
Indemnification You shall indemnify and hold harmless CNC, its officers, directors, employees,
suppliers and agents from and against all losses, settlements, claims, actions, suits,
proceedings, judgments, awards, damages, liabilities, costs and expenses
including, without limitation, reasonable attorneys’ fees (collectively "Losses")
which arise out of or as a result of any breach of this Software License Agreement
by you or your employees, agents, resellers, dealers or sub-dealers and shall
v
reimburse CNC for any and all legal, accounting and other fees, costs and expenses
reasonably incurred by any of them in connection with investigating, mitigating or
Educational Pricing
defending any such Losses.
If this Software was obtained through or in accordance with a CNC "Educational
11
Pricing" plan, option, grant, schedule or program, it may not be used by anyone,
including you, to conduct any computer aided design, computer aided drafting,
computer aided machining, or training activities that, directly or indirectly,
generate or otherwise result in monetary revenues for the benefit of any individual
or any entity, other than the school that originally received this Software. 12
Termination This Software License Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate
this Software License Agreement at any time by returning to CNC all copies of the
Software under your control and by returning the Security Mechanism to CNC.
CNC may terminate this Software License Agreement if CNC determines, in its sole
discretion, that you have violated the terms of this Software License Agreement.
Upon termination of this Software License Agreement, you agree to immediately
13
return to CNC all copies of the Software, return the Security Mechanism to CNC,
and certify to CNC in writing that all known copies, including backup copies, have
been returned. All provisions relating to confidentiality, proprietary rights,
indemnification and non-disclosure shall survive the termination of this Software
License Agreement. You may not transfer this Software to the purchaser of any
14
equipment on which the Software may be resident. You may not transfer this
Software via liquidation, bankruptcy, auction, close of business, or any other
method that does not involve an authorized Mastercam reseller. This License is
for you alone. In the event you breach the provisions of this Section, CNC shall be
entitled to liquidated damages in the amount of Fifteen Thousand Dollars
15
($15,000), plus its reasonable attorney’s fees and court costs.
General This Software License Agreement shall be construed, interpreted and governed by
the laws of the state of Connecticut, without regard to conflicts of law provisions.
The sole jurisdiction and venue for any litigation arising from or related to this
Software License Agreement or the subject matter hereof shall be in an appropriate
16
state or federal court located in Hartford, Connecticut. You hereby submit to the
personal jurisdiction of the Federal District Court for the District of Connecticut
and to the Superior Court of the State of Connecticut. This Software License
Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between you and CNC with
respect to the subject matter hereof. Any waiver or modification of this Software
License Agreement shall be valid only if it is in writing and signed by both parties
17
hereto. If any part of this Agreement is found invalid or unenforceable by a court of
competent jurisdiction, the remainder of this Agreement shall be interpreted so as
U.S. Government Restricted

to reasonably effect the intention of the parties.
The Software provided hereunder is a "commercial item," as that term is defined in
48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of "commercial computer software" and "commercial
18
Rights
computer software documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212.
Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, the
Software made available to the United States of America, its agencies and/or
instrumentalities, is provided with only those rights set forth in this Agreement.
Use, duplication or disclosure of the Software by the government is subject to the
19
restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial
Computer Software-Restricted Rights clause at 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19, as amended, or
Export Restrictions
any successor regulations thereto.
You represent and warrant that you will not, without obtaining prior written
authorization from CNC and, if required, of the Bureau of Export Administration of
110
the United States Department of Commerce or other relevant agency of the United
States Government, export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the Software from
vi • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
the United States to (i) any country destination to which export is restricted by the
Export Administration Regulations of the United States Department of Commerce;
(ii) any country subject to sanctions administered by the Office of Foreign Assets
Control, United States Department of the Treasury; or (iii) such other countries to
which export is restricted by any other United States government agency. You
further agree that you are solely responsible for compliance with any import laws
and regulations of the country of destination of a permitted export or re-export,
and any other import requirement related to a permitted export or re-export.
Exceptions to Security CNC software programs Mastercam Design LT and Mastercam Demo do not
Mechanism Requirements require the use of Security Mechanisms, and the provisions in this Software
License Agreement relating to Security Mechanisms do not apply to your use of
such programs, provided, however, that such provisions shall apply to your use of
all other Software provided hereunder.
Survival All provisions of this Software License Agreement relating to confidentiality, non-
disclosure, CNC’s proprietary rights, disclaimers, and limits of liability, or
indemnification by Customer shall survive termination of this License for any
reason.
Reservation of Rights All rights not expressly granted are reserved by CNC.
Trademarks Mastercam™ is a registered trademark of CNC.

Windows, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, and Windows XP are registered
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Mastercam Verify is created in conjunction
with MachineWorks Ltd.
Printed in the United States of America.

Printed on recycled paper.
vii
Contents
1. Introduction to Mastercam X ..........................................1

X Starting Mastercam ..............................................................2
Learning about HASP and NetHASP ......................................3
X Getting Help ...........................................................................4
Using Online Help ..................................................................4
Mastercam X Documentation ................................................6
Mastercam Support and Services ...........................................8
X The Mastercam Workspace ...............................................10
Mastercam Terms and Concepts..........................................11
Graphics window ............................................................ 12
Status bar ......................................................................... 12
Toolpath and Solids Manager tabs ................................ 13
Toolbars ........................................................................... 14
Interactive prompts ........................................................ 15
Tool tips ........................................................................... 15
Dialog boxes .................................................................... 16
Ribbon bars ...................................................................... 17
Learning Mode ................................................................ 20
AutoCursor and Visual Cues ........................................... 20
General Selection ribbon bar ......................................... 20
Sketcher ............................................................................ 21
Live, fixed and phantom entities ................................... 22
Chaining ........................................................................... 23
Right–click menus ........................................................... 23
Shortcut keys ................................................................... 25
Machine Definition / Control Definition Managers .... 25
Toolpaths ......................................................................... 26
Libraries (operations, tools, materials) ......................... 27
viii • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
X Mastercam Menus ..............................................................28

File Menu ..............................................................................29
Edit Menu..............................................................................30
View Menu ............................................................................31
Analyze Menu .......................................................................32
Create Menu..........................................................................33
Solids Menu ..........................................................................34
Xform Menu ..........................................................................35
Machine Type Menu .............................................................35
Toolpaths Menu....................................................................36
Screen Menu .........................................................................37
Settings Menu .......................................................................38
Help Menu ............................................................................39
X Customizing Your Workspace ............................................40
Customizing Toolbar Settings ..............................................41
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar files.......................45
Customizing Toolbar Functions ...........................................45
Drag and Drop Visual Cues .............................................47
Adding Functions and Toolbars .....................................48
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu ................49
Adding Separators to Toolbars / Menus...............................50
Creating and Saving Toolbar States......................................51
Hiding / Showing Toolbars .............................................52
Using the Toolbar Right–Click Menu .............................55
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts ..........................56
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping files .......57
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments ..................58
Removing Shortcut Assignments ....................................59
X Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) ............60
Configuring Mastercam X .....................................................60
Managing Configuration Files ..............................................61
Setting Default Values ......................................................62
Tolerances ........................................................................63
Files ...................................................................................64
Converters ........................................................................64
Screen ................................................................................65
Colors ................................................................................66
Chaining ............................................................................67
Shading .............................................................................68
• ix
Solids ................................................................................ 69
Printing ............................................................................ 70
CAD Settings .................................................................... 70
Drafting Dimension Properties ...................................... 71
Start / Exit ........................................................................ 76
Toolpaths ......................................................................... 77
Post Processing ................................................................ 78
Backplot ........................................................................... 79
Verify ................................................................................ 80
Merging Configuration Files.................................................81
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch) .................. 82
X The Role of Machine and Control Definitions ...................83
Control Definitions and Toolpath Defaults..........................85
Working with Post Processors ..............................................85
X Opening and Translating Files ............................................86
Saving Files ...........................................................................87
Opening Files with Other Applications ................................89
2. Design .......................................................................................91
X Drawing and Design Basics ...............................................92
Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar ........................................92
Visual Cues ....................................................................... 93 26
Entering Position Coordinates ....................................... 94
Using FastPoint Mode to Enter Coordinates ................ 94
Customizing AutoCursor behavior ................................ 95
Selecting Entities ..................................................................97
Using the General Selection ribbon bar ........................ 97
Chaining..............................................................................102
Chaining Wireframe Geometry .................................... 103
Chaining Solids .............................................................. 105
Setting Attributes ................................................................106
Setting Attributes for New Entities .............................. 106
Changing Entity Attributes ........................................... 110
Setting Z Depth ...................................................................114
Working in 2D and 3D Mode ..............................................114
Changing the Graphics Window Display ...........................115
Zooming ......................................................................... 116
Setting Viewports .......................................................... 117
Setting Planes / Views / WCS..............................................118
x • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems .......................119

Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths ..............126
Lathe Coordinate Systems .............................................128
Editing Your Work...............................................................132
Undo / Redo ...................................................................132
Delete / Undelete ...........................................................133
X Creating Geometry ............................................................134
Using the Sketcher Toolbar ................................................134
Editing “Live” Entities.........................................................135
Creating Points....................................................................136
Creating Lines .....................................................................137
Creating Arcs and Circles....................................................137
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes ..........................................138
Creating Fillets and Chamfers ............................................140
Creating Splines ..................................................................141
Using the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar ...............142
Creating Primitives .............................................................142
Guidelines for Working with Primitives .......................143
X Modifying Geometry..........................................................144
Editing Entities....................................................................144
Trim / Break submenu ..................................................144
Transforming Entities .........................................................146
Assigning New Attributes to Transformed Entities .....148
Analyzing Entities ...............................................................148
Working with Levels............................................................150
Setting the Main Level ...................................................150
Using the Level Manager Right–click Menu ................152
3. Machining .............................................................................153
X Machining Process Overview ..........................................154
X Choosing a Machine and Control Definition ...................155
Selecting a Machine Definition ..........................................157
Editing Machine Definitions...............................................159
Working with Control Files and Control Definitions .........161
Accessing the Control Definition Manager ..................163
Building the Post Processor List ....................................164
Validating the Control File / Post Processor ................166
Working with Control Properties ..................................167
Tolerances ......................................................................168
• xi
Communications ........................................................... 169

Files ................................................................................ 170
NC Dialog ....................................................................... 171
NC Output ...................................................................... 172
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values ............................ 173
Work System .................................................................. 175
Tool ................................................................................. 176
Linear ............................................................................. 177
Arc ................................................................................... 178
Rotary ............................................................................. 179
Feed ................................................................................ 180
Cutter Compensation ................................................... 181
Machine Cycles ............................................................. 182
Subprograms ................................................................. 186
Operation Defaults ........................................................ 187
Text ................................................................................. 188
X Setting Machine Group Properties ..................................192
Working with the Toolpath Manager .................................192
Using the Insert Arrow........................................................194
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups...............195
Setting Machine Group Properties .....................................197
Files tab .......................................................................... 198
Tool settings tab ............................................................ 199
26
Stock setup tab .............................................................. 200
Safety zone tab .............................................................. 201
X Creating Toolpaths ............................................................202
Mill Toolpath Types ............................................................203
Contour Toolpaths ........................................................ 204
Circle Toolpaths ............................................................ 206
Drill Toolpaths ............................................................... 207
Feature-based Drilling .................................................. 212
Pocket Toolpaths ........................................................... 212
Wireframe Toolpaths .................................................... 213
Specialized Toolpaths ................................................... 214
Surface Toolpath Types ......................................................215
Multi-axis Toolpath Types..................................................217
Selecting Geometry for 5-axis Toolpaths .................... 219
Lathe Toolpath Types .........................................................220
General Turning Toolpaths .......................................... 221
Mill / Turn Toolpaths .................................................... 222
xii • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
Miscellaneous Operations .............................................224

Router Toolpath Types .......................................................224
Block Drilling Toolpaths ................................................225
Nesting Toolpaths...............................................................226
Engraving Toolpaths ...........................................................228
Toolpath Chaining Techniques ..........................................229
Working with Open and Closed Chains .......................230
Chaining Direction ........................................................230
Chaining Contour Toolpaths ........................................231
Synchronizing Chains ....................................................231
Selecting Tools ....................................................................232
Selecting a tool ...............................................................233
Managing Toolpath Operations .........................................236
Using Toolpath Manager icons .....................................237
Displaying Toolpaths .....................................................240
Guidelines for Working with Operations .....................241
Editing Operations ..............................................................242
Editing Common Parameters .......................................243
Changing the NC File Name ..........................................245
Renumbering Tools .......................................................246
Renumbering Work Offsets ...........................................247
Reversing Toolpaths ......................................................248
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds ........................................248
X Backplot and Verify ...........................................................249
Backplotting Operations.....................................................249
Verifying Operations ...........................................................252
Running the Verification ...............................................253
X Post Processing .................................................................255
Post Processors, and Control / Machine Definitions ..256
About NCI files ...............................................................256
Post Processing Toolpath Operations ..........................257
4. Examples ...............................................................................259
X Example 1: 2D Geometry and Toolpaths ........................261
Drawing 2D Wireframe Geometry ......................................262
Getting started................................................................ 262
Creating construction guides........................................ 264
Drawing arcs................................................................... 268
Drawing the arms........................................................... 270
• xiii
Finishing the drawing .................................................... 274

Creating a Toolpath ............................................................277
Setting up a machining job ........................................... 277
Creating the toolpath..................................................... 282
Previewing the toolpath................................................. 288
Posting the toolpath....................................................... 290
X Example 2: Working in Different Planes ........................293
Drawing the Door in 3D......................................................294
Drawing the outline of the door.................................... 294
Drawing the striker plate and doorknob openings ..... 300
Drawing the hinge pockets............................................ 306
Machining the Door............................................................312
Setting up the job ........................................................... 314
Creating the pocket toolpaths....................................... 317
Drilling the screw holes ................................................. 324
Milling the holes............................................................. 327
X Example 3: Lathe and Mill/Turn Applications ................333
2D Turning Toolpaths.........................................................334
Setting up the job ........................................................... 334
Roughing the Outer Diameter....................................... 339
Cleaning out the remaining stock................................. 346
Finishing the OD ............................................................ 351
C-Axis and Mill/Turn Toolpaths.........................................358
Machining the hexagon ................................................. 359
Drilling the bolt holes .................................................... 367
Milling the flat holes ...................................................... 373
26
Index........................................................................................385
xiv • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
chapter 1
Introduction to
Mastercam X
This chapter covers the following topics:
Starting Mastercam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 2
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .page 4
The Mastercam Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 10
Mastercam Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 28
Customizing Your Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 40
Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) . . . page 60
The Role of Machine and Control Definitions . . . . . . . page 83
Welcome to Mastercam X! Mastercam X is a powerful CAD/CAM appli-
cation you use to design parts and create complete machining opera-
tions. Whether you are new to Mastercam or a long time user, the
Mastercam X Getting Started Guide is designed to get you up and
running—quickly, effectively, and efficiently. To help you make the most
of Mastercam X, use this guide to:
Get a basic orientation to the interface and functions.
Customize and configure Mastercam for optimum efficiency.
Understand the fundamentals of using Mastercam to design
and cut parts.
Reinforce your skills through practice exercises.
2 • MASTERCAM X / Getting Started Guide
Starting Mastercam
This document assumes that you have successfully installed
Mastercam X, have completed the necessary post-installation proce-
dures, and are ready to begin using Mastercam to design and machine
parts.
Note: For information on installing Mastercam, see the

Mastercam X Installation Guide included with your software, or
contact your local Reseller.
In this section, you will learn about:

Starting up Mastercam
Troubleshooting HASP and NetHASP issues (page 3)
Although you access Mastercam from a single executable, it is actually
a customized suite of modular products, each of which is optimized
for a specific type of machining. The Mastercam family of products
includes Mastercam Design®, Mastercam Router®, Mastercam
Mill®, Mastercam Lathe®, and Mastercam Wire®. Separate add-on
modules are available for Mastercam Solids®, Mastercam Nesting®,
and Mastercam Engraving®.
Note: Mastercam Wire will be available with a future release.
X To start Mastercam:
1 Double–click the Mastercam icon on your Windows®
Desktop:
Or select Mastercam from the Windows Program menu. By

default, Mastercam starts up in the Design application.
2 To open a machine-specific Mastercam product (for
example, Mill, Router or Lathe), select a machine definition
from the Machine Type menu.
Note: You can also switch between Mastercam products by

choosing certain functions from the drop-down menus or tool-
bars, or by selecting an operation from the Toolpath Manager.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Starting Mastercam • 3
Learning about HASP and NetHASP

Mastercam uses two types of licensing: single-user licensing and
1
network licensing. A single-user license requires a special piece of
hardware called a HASP (sometimes called a dongle or SIM) attached
to the parallel or USB port on your computer. If you receive the
following message when starting Mastercam, this component is
either missing or not configured properly:
Refer to the Mastercam X Installation Guide or contact your local

Reseller for assistance.
Network licensing requires a NetHASP to be installed on a computer
on your network. If any of the following messages display when
starting Mastercam, contact your network administrator for assis-
tance:
Error checking out a [Mastercam product name] license. No
licenses have been purchased for this product.
Active NetHASP server not found.
All available licenses are in use.
Getting Help
Topics in this section include:
Using Online Help (page 4)
Mastercam X Documentation (page 6)
Mastercam Support and Services (page 8)
Using Online Help

The How do I get here link expands into text that provides naviga-
tional information.
Tabbed dialogs deliver help on dialog boxes. Click the Field defini-
tions tab to view field definitions.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Getting Help • 5
The Field definitions tab provides pop-up topics of dialog box

controls.
1
Every topic provides an e-mail link you can use to contact CNC Soft-
ware Technical Documentation for feedback.
Mastercam X Documentation
Your Mastercam installation includes a suite of documentation tools
you can use to make the most of your Mastercam experience. These
documents are designed to get you up and running quickly, and to
provide ongoing education and support as you work with basic and
advanced features.
In addition to the Mastercam X Getting Started Guide you are
currently reading, your Mastercam X documentation includes:
Mastercam X Installation Guide (printed document):
Provides detailed instructions for installing HASP and
NetHASP devices, and Mastercam X. It also includes informa-
tion on installing upgrades and update codes, and trouble-
shooting.
Mastercam X Quick Reference card (printed document and
PDF): Provides a graphical summary of Mastercam X key
features and functions.
Mastercam Transition Guide (printed document and PDF):
Assists Mastercam Version 9 users with the process of
migrating their settings, libraries, and parts to Mastercam X.
Includes PDF checklists to use as migration worksheets.
Mastercam Version 9 to X Function Map (PDF): Maps all
functions available in Mastercam Version 9 to a Mastercam X
equivalent.
Comprehensive context-sensitive Help: Embedded,
compiled HTML Help system, located in the Mastercam
\HELP directory.
To open Help to its default topic, choose Help, Contents
from the Mastercam menu, or press ALT+H.
To open context-sensitive help, click the help
button in any dialog box or ribbon bar to open a
related help topic.
Mastercam X Reference Guide (PDF): Supplements the
Help and other Mastercam product documentation. Includes
comprehensive conceptual information, detailed overviews,
examples, definition of terms and workflow-related informa-
tion on using Mastercam X and its functions. To open, choose
Help, Mastercam X Reference Guide.
Mastercam X Post Parameters Guide (PDF): Describes
changes to the MP parameter model for Mastercam X. It
introduces the new parameters for machine definition,
control definition, and machine group properties, and
presents examples on how to access them. It includes a
complete list of all the post parameters available in

Mastercam X plus a transition map of changes to Version 9
parameters. 1
Notes:
• You must install Adobe® Reader® (version 3.0 or higher)
before you can view or print PDF documentation.
• All PDF documents are available from the Mastercam X
\Documentation directory.
X To view a PDF document:

1 From the Mastercam menu, choose Help, Mastercam X
Reference Guide. This automatically opens the Adobe
Acrobat Reader to display the document.
TIP: To display the PDF document in its own window, rather

than in a Web browser window, deselect the option to Display
PDF in browser in the Reader’s Internet preferences page. For
more information on setting this and other preferences, refer to
the Reader Help.
2 To navigate through the document, use the bookmark list in

the left-most pane of the Reader window, or use the Search
functions.
3 To view information, scroll through the pages using the
mouse wheel or the scroll bar on the right side of the Reader
window.
You can view PDF documents in three different page layouts. This
affects how some Reader functions work, and also affects links in the
PDF document. To change the layout, choose View, Page Layout and
one of the following options:
Single Page—Selects all the text on a page of the PDF document
(with the exception of graphics or text that is part of a graphic).
To select all text on the current page, choose Edit, Select All.
Select a link to display the page the link is on.
Continuous—Arranges the pages in a continuous vertical column.
To select all the text in the PDF document (with the exception
of graphics or text that is part of a graphic), choose Edit,
Select All.
Select a link to “jump to” the link destination, which displays

at the top of the window.
Continuous-Facing—Arranges the pages side by side, with the first
page displayed on the right.
PDF Guidelines
Embedded links within the document—red text, or a hand
icon that displays when the cursor is moved over text—take
you to information on the selected topic.
You can expand and collapse the Bookmark list. To expand a
bookmark (show subtopics), click on its plus symbol (+). To
collapse it (hide subtopics), click the minus symbol (–).
If the Reader toolbar does not appear, press the F8 key to
display it.
To search for a word or phrase, click the binocular icon to
begin a search.
Note: For more information on working with PDFs, refer to the

Reader Help.
Mastercam Support and Services

Use the following Web sites to find information on Mastercam:
www.emastercam.com Mastercam global user forum
www.mastercam.com CNC Software, Inc. corporate Web

site
www.mastercamedu.com CNC Software, Inc. Educational Divi-

sion Web site
For assistance with installing Mastercam, its SIM or NetHASP, or to

obtain more information on using Mastercam, contact your local
Mastercam Reseller. If your Reseller is unavailable, you can call CNC
Technical Support Services Monday through Friday, 8:00 a.m.–5:30
p.m., USA Eastern Standard Time.
When calling CNC Software for technical support, please follow these
guidelines:
Be sure you have already tried to contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
Provide the serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP.
Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

happened, particularly if you cannot call immediately after
the problem occurs.
Be in front of your computer when you call.
1
If possible, try to duplicate the problem before calling. Our
Support Services technician may require you to duplicate the
problem while you are on the phone.
When you call, have ready a complete description of your
hardware, including your operating system (OS), central
processing unit (CPU), graphics card and settings, and
memory.
You can also leave a message for CNC Support Services twenty-four
hours a day, seven days a week via our e-mail or Web site addresses.
When sending e-mail, please include:
The serial number of your SIM HASP or NetHASP
Telephone number and contact information where you can
be reached
Files required to reproduce an issue, such as .MCX and post
files
TIP: Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part

data into a compressed .Z2G file. This utility makes it easy to
provide your Reseller or CNC Support Services with a file
attachment that contains the information they need. Zip2Go
scans the machine groups in your current part file and captures
information such as your Mastercam configuration, machine
definition, and post files. For more information on using
Zip2Go, please refer to the Mastercam Help.
Important Contact Information

Address CNC Software, Inc.
671 Old Post Road
Tolland, Connecticut, 06084-9970
USA
Phone (860) 875-5006
Fax (860) 872-1565
FTP Address ftp://ftp.mastercam.com
Internet Address http://www.mastercam.com
E-mail support@mastercam.com
The Mastercam Workspace

Use this section to learn about:
Mastercam Interface Elements
Mastercam Terms and Concepts (page 11)
Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview
AutoCursor General Selection Function Interactive

Title bar Menu bar ribbon bar ribbon bar ribbon bar prompt Graphics window Toolbar
Prompt area Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager Status bar Vertically docked tool bar and most
(Operations Manager pane) recently used (MRU) function bar
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Mastercam Workspace • 11
Mastercam Terms and Concepts

In this section, you will learn more about the terms identified in
1
Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview on page 10, and
fundamental Mastercam concepts and features, including:
Graphics window General Selection ribbon bar

(page 12) (page 20)
Status bar Sketcher

(page 12) (page 21)
Toolpath and Solids Live, fixed and phantom entities

Manager tabs (page 13) (page 22)
Toolbars Chaining
(page 14) (page 23)
Interactive prompts Right–click menus

(page 15) (page 23)
Tool tips Shortcut keys

(page 15) (page 25)
Dialog boxes Machine Definition / Control

(page 16) Definition Managers (page 25)
Ribbon bars Toolpaths

(page 17) (page 26)
Learning Mode Libraries (operations, tools,

(page 20) materials) (page 27)
AutoCursor and Visual

Cues (page 20)
Graphics window
This is the main workspace in Mastercam where you view, create, and
modify geometry, drafting entities, and toolpaths.
Figure 1-2: Mastercam graphics window
Note: Mastercam is configured to display numeric data using a

default Metric or Inch base unit of measure. Mastercam makes it
easy to switch between these measurement systems whenever the
part data requires the change. For more information, see Setting
Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on page 60 and
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch) on page 82.
Status bar
The Status bar appears along the bottom of the Mastercam window.
You use its functions to edit the current settings for entity colors,
attributes, levels, and groups, and to define the view and orientation
of entities in the graphics window.
Figure 1-3: Mastercam Status bar
Note: You can also access Status bar functions from various
Mastercam menus and toolbars.
To customize the Status bar by changing the order in which the fields
appear or removing options, click the Status bar configure option (!).
This opens the Customize Status bar dialog box where you can
change the Status bar layout or reset it to the default setting.
1
TIP: Unless you select entities prior to making changes,
changing attributes, views, and planes applies only to the enti-
ties and toolpaths you create; existing entities and toolpaths
retain the attributes that were effective when they were
created.
You can use the Status bar and Analyze functions to change
attributes associated with existing entities. For more informa-
tion, see Changing Entity Attributes on page 110.
Toolpath and Solids Manager tabs

The Toolpath Manager and Solids Manager tabs appear in the Opera-
tions Manager pane, a central location where you can manage all the
elements of the current job.
Figure 1-4: Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager pane
You can show or hide the Operations Manager pane by choosing the
View, Toggle Operations Manager function. Hiding the Operations
Manager expands the graphics window view to fit the full width of the
Mastercam window.
TIP: Use standard Windows methods to resize the Operations

Manager pane, the graphics window, or the entire Mastercam
window, as necessary.
The Toolpath Manager tab is where you define setup param-

eters, such as file defaults, tool settings, stock setup and
safety zones. You also use this tab to view, organize and edit
machine groups, toolpath groups, and operations. A toolpath
operation consolidates all the information needed to create a
particular toolpath.
If Mastercam Solids is installed, when you work with a solid
model, the Solids Manager tab lists each solid in the current
file. You can expand the tree structure of a solid to view its
history (a list of the operations that were performed to
construct the solid), and its toolpaths.
Toolbars
Toolbars are collections of functions represented by icons. Arrows in
the toolbar represent a submenu of functions you can view and select
in a drop-down list.
Figure 1-5: Example: toolbar
Choose a function in the toolbar by clicking it. Mastercam provides a

set of default toolbars to help you get started, but you can customize
them to meet your unique needs. In the Settings, Customize func-
tion, you can choose to show, hide, or redefine toolbars, create
completely new ones, and define a personalized right-mouse button
menu that contains the functions you use most often. For more infor-
mation, see Customizing Your Workspace on page 40.
Interactive prompts
Some functions use interactive prompts. Prompts appear as small text
1
boxes in the graphics window after you select a function. They guide
you through performing the necessary actions required to complete
the function. For example, the following prompt appears when you
choose the Create line endpoint function from the Create, Line
menu:
After you select an endpoint in the graphics window, the first prompt
is replaced with another instruction:
In this example, as you create additional lines, the prompts continue

to appear in succession until you choose to exit the function.
TIPS:
• You can drag a prompt to any position in the Mastercam
window. Subsequent prompts appear in the new position.
• You can change the size of the interactive prompt by scaling
it up or down. To do this, position the cursor in the prompt,
right–click, and choose Small, Medium, or Large.
Tool tips
Tool tips display when you hover the mouse over a function icon or a
button in a dialog box or ribbon bar. They help you to identify the
function or option.
Figure 1-6: Example: Tool tips
Button Ribbon bar icon

Dialog boxes
Dialog boxes appear when you must enter information to complete a
selected function. Many dialog boxes allow you to interact with the
graphics window. For example, you can enter values in the dialog box
fields by temporarily returning to the graphics window and selecting a
position, entity, or toolpath.
You can expand some dialog boxes to show additional fields. By
default, they appear in a contracted format.
Figure 1-7: Example: dialog box, contract and expand
To expand or contract the dialog box,

click the double arrow buttons, located
in the upper left corner.
To return to the graphics window and
select a position or point, choose the
Position button.
Ribbon bars
Ribbon bars function like dialog boxes but look similar to toolbars.
1
Ribbon bars open when you activate many Mastercam functions. You
use them to create, position, and modify the geometry.
Figure 1-8: Example: ribbon bar
TIP: When you create geometry with ribbon bars and dialog
boxes, you can edit an entity as long as it remains live. You will
learn more about entity states later in Live, fixed and phantom
entities on page 22.
In the Mastercam workspace, a blank Ribbon Bar displays just above

the graphics window to indicate the default ribbon bar position.
When you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar, the function
ribbon bar replaces the blank Ribbon Bar placeholder. You can
change the default position, and dock or undock the ribbon bar. If you
undock the blank Ribbon Bar, it is removed from the Mastercam
window until you choose a function that uses a ribbon bar. Then the
ribbon bar displays in the last undocked Ribbon Bar position.
Navigating ribbon bars

There are three ways to move between buttons and fields in ribbon
bars. You can:
Use the mouse to click buttons and place the cursor in a
particular field.
Use the Tab key to move the cursor between fields.
Press a shortcut key to activate the button or field associated
with that key. For example, type T to activate the Tangent
button.
TIP: Use tool tips to identify shortcut keys.
Note: Some ribbon bar buttons and fields may be unavailable

(appear disabled) depending on the options you choose.
Locking and unlocking fields

The data in ribbon bar fields can be frozen (locked) to prevent the
value from changing when you reposition the cursor in the graphics
window. Each field has three states:
Unlocked—The normal and default state of a

ribbon bar or dialog box field is unlocked. This
state allows the field to change to the position of
the cursor in the graphics window.
Soft-locked —When soft-locked, the data is only

frozen for the next entity you create. After an
entity is created, the field returns to the
unlocked (default) state. To soft-lock a field,
type a value into the field and press Enter.
Notice that the button next to the field appears
pressed in, signifying a soft-locked state.
Hard-locked—When hard-locked, the data is

frozen until you manually unlock the field. You
hard-lock a field to use a specific value repeat-
edly, for example, when creating multiple dupli-
cate entities. To hard-lock a field, enter the value
and either click the button next to the field or
use Shift+click. The button remains selected
and the field is colored, indicating that the value
is locked. To unlock a field, click the button next
to the field.
TIP: You can also hold down the Shift key and press the field's
shortcut key to hard-lock the field.
Entering values in fields

In addition to typing values in ribbon bar and dialog box fields, or
using the cursor to dynamically update fields, you can use one of the
following methods to enter field values.
Click the drop-down arrow in the field to choose from a list of
values previously entered into the ribbon bar. These values
are saved in the registry and remain available, even after you
end the current Mastercam session.
In many numeric fields, you can right–click in the field to
access a menu of data entry shortcuts.
Figure 1-9: Data entry shortcuts right–click menu
To choose a shortcut option, select it from the list or type the

corresponding letter. Then select an entity in the graphics window
to automatically enter its specified value in the field.
Docking and undocking ribbon bars

You can undock a ribbon bar by double–clicking in any gray space
area in the ribbon bar or single–clicking and dragging it to the
graphics window. Once the ribbon bar is undocked, you can easily
drag and drop it anywhere in the Mastercam window. You can dock it
again by dragging and dropping it in the toolbar section or by
double–clicking the ribbon bar title bar.
Notes:
• You can dock ribbon bars only in a horizontal position. This
differs from toolbars, which can be docked horizontally or
vertically.
• If you undock and then close a ribbon bar (by clicking the x in
the upper right corner) it is removed from the Mastercam
window. This does not cause a problem; it will display the next
time it is required by the function.
Learning Mode
Learning mode is similar to a tool tip, but applies only to ribbon bars.
It provides information on the ribbon bar and its functions, including
the default shortcut keys. When Learning mode is active, it appears
when you place the cursor in any ribbon bar button or field.
Figure 1-10: Example: Learning mode
To turn Learning mode on or off, choose Settings, Configuration. In

the Configuration dialog box, choose the Screen properties page and
select/deselect the option to Use Learning Mode prompts.
AutoCursor and Visual Cues

You use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to:
Track cursor position
Manually enter X, Y, and Z coordinates
Detect and snap to points as you move the cursor over geom-
etry on the screen
AutoCursor is active whenever Mastercam prompts you to select a
position in the graphics window. The AutoCursor ribbon bar works in
conjunction with the cursor to eliminate steps and make it easier to
select and enter points in complicated and congested geometry.
Figure 1-11: AutoCursor ribbon bar
When a position is detected, AutoCursor displays a visual cue to the

right of the cursor to identify the type of position. Endpoints and
midpoints of curves, lines, arc center points, and point entities are all
detected and highlighted by AutoCursor. In addition, AutoCursor can
snap to angle, nearest, tangent, perpendicular, horizontal, and
vertical conditions. For more information, see Using the AutoCursor
Ribbon Bar on page 92.
General Selection ribbon bar

For most Mastercam functions, you use the General Selection ribbon
bar—in addition to or in combination with standard Window’s selec-
tion methods—to select entities in the graphics window. The General
Selection ribbon bar is also active any time you can select entities
prior to choosing a function.
The General Selection ribbon bar has a Standard Selection mode and
1
a Solids Selection mode. The default mode is Standard Selection. If
you initiate a Mastercam function that might apply to wireframe or
solid entities, you can use options to switch between selection modes.
Figure 1-12: General Selection ribbon bar
For more information on using general selection methods, see

Selecting Entities on page 97.
Sketcher
Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam X functions you use to create basic
geometry dynamically by moving the mouse and clicking in the
graphics window. Basic geometry includes points, lines, arcs, splines,
fillets, chamfers, and primitives. It does not include drafting, trans-
form, modify, surfaces, or solids.
Figure 1-13: Sketcher toolbar
To sketch an entity, choose an entity type from the Sketcher toolbar

drop-down list or from the Create menu, set its ribbon bar or dialog
box options, and sketch the entity in the graphics window. For many
types of geometry, you also use the AutoCursor to create and edit
entity properties.
Live, fixed and phantom entities

Entities in Mastercam have three states: live, fixed, and phantom.
Live entities are those in the process of being created. You can
edit their properties using options in the selected function
ribbon bar or dialog box, remove them from the graphics
window, or “fix” them.
Entities become fixed entities when they have been accepted,
for example, when you press Enter or click OK or Apply to
complete a function.
When you create entities dynamically using the mouse, they
are drawn with a dashed white line. This is called the
phantom state. When you choose the final position to create
the entity, the entity becomes live.
Figure 1-14: Example: Phantom entity
Note: Lines always appear as solid.
After you create an entity using one of the Sketcher functions, it

remains live until you exit the function, start a new function, or create
another entity. Live entities are designated by a live entity color. When
you accept an entity, it changes to the normal entity color.
After entities become fixed, you can edit them using the Edit,
Analyze, and Xform menu functions.
TIP: To define Mastercam color defaults, choose Settings,

Configuration, and select the Colors properties page.
Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so
1
that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. When
you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves (lines, arcs,
and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining differs from
other selection methods because it associates order and direction to
the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect the way
Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
Mastercam provides several chaining methods in the Chaining dialog
box, which opens whenever a function requires you to chain entities.
As you chain geometry, the entities appear highlighted in the same
color as selected entities.
The Chain Manager lists all the chains for the operation and provides
the utilities you need to rechain geometry. Since chaining determines
the cut order, tool rapid moves, and the direction of tool movement,
you may find that you need to modify the chaining after generating a
toolpath. For more information, see Chaining on page 102 and Tool-
path Chaining Techniques on page 229.
Right–click menus
Mastercam provides a number of right–click menus. For example, in
the Toolpath Manager tab, right–click to access an extensive list of
functions and submenus for working with machine groups, toolpath
groups, toolpaths, operations, setup sheets and more. In the Toolpath
parameters dialog box and tab, right–click to choose from a number
of functions related to tools, tool libraries, and toolpath parameters
for the selected toolpath operation.
Figure 1-15: Examples: Right–click menus
Toolpath Manager Toolpath Parameters tab
Here are just a few of the places where you can use right–click menus:
Levels Manager View Manager
Toolpath Manager tab Solids Manager tab
Tool parameters tab Machine Definition Manager
Tool Manager Materials List
Drill Point Manager Toolpath parameters tab

(Mill/Router) (Lathe)
Post Text page Tool parameters tab

(Control Definition) (Mill/Router)
Chain Manager
TIP: Right–click menus are common to many Mastercam

functions; when in doubt, right–click to see if one is available.
Two special types of right–click menus include the customized right-

mouse button menu (you configure this menu for quick access to your
favorite functions when working in the graphics window), and the
data entry shortcut menu, available in many numeric ribbon bar and
1
dialog box fields.
Shortcut keys
Mastercam provides special keyboard assignments you use, instead of
clicking icons, to access ribbon bar and dialog box options. These are
referred to as shortcut keys. For example, you can use the following
shortcut keys when working with the Point endpoints ribbon bar
function:
S - Save
D - Keep duplicates
E - Exit (fixes live entity and exits function)
You can view shortcut keys using tool tips and by activating Learning
mode. Mastercam help topics also list all available shortcut keys for a
specific function, ribbon bar, and dialog box.
Another type of shortcut key is associated with every Mastercam
function that appears in a menu or toolbar. You use this type of
shortcut to choose a function, instead of using the mouse to select it
from the menu or toolbar. Typically, function shortcuts are associated
with function keys (F1-F12), or a combination of Shift, Ctrl, Alt keys
and other alphanumeric characters.
IMPORTANT: The default keyboard shortcuts provided with

Mastercam X are consistent with those available in prior
versions of Mastercam. For information on mapping
Mastercam functions to your own, custom keyboard shortcuts,
see Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts on page 56.
Machine Definition / Control Definition Managers

Your Mastercam installation includes many default machine defini-
tions, control definitions, and post processors. Use the Machine Defi-
nition Manager and the Control Definition Manager functions in the
Machine Type menu to customize or create your own machine and
control definitions, and to associate them with selected post
processor files.
A machine definition describes:

The components of the machine tool and their interrelation-
ship.
A control definition that provides the post processor with the
information it needs to process toolpaths that meet the
control's requirements.
The post processor appropriate for the specific machine and
control combination.
Note: For more information on selecting, and editing machine

and control definitions, see Choosing a Machine and Control
Definition on page 155.
Toolpaths
In Mastercam, a toolpath represents the tool data and movements
used to remove material from stock. The toolpath contains a set of
rules that define the types of chains and parameters allowed, as well
as how they are applied to an operation. Each operation conforms to
the rules of a specific toolpath. An operation typically contains one or
more chains. Each toolpath you create displays as an operation in a
machine group that you can view and edit from the Toolpath
Manager tab.
To create a toolpath, you select a machine type, choose a function
from the Toolpaths menu or toolbar, and chain one or more pieces of
the part’s geometry or select points, surfaces, or solids. You then select
the tool and enter other toolpath parameters. When you accept the
parameters, Mastercam generates the toolpath operation, which
appears in the Toolpath Manager tab under the active machine group.
TIP: You can also create different toolpath groups to organize

and manage operations.
Toolpaths and Associativity

Associativity in Mastercam refers to the relationship between geom-
etry and the drafting entities, toolpaths or wirepaths that are created
from it. When you create a drafting entity, toolpath or wirepath,
Mastercam links it to the geometry. This association can be broken
only by deleting the drafting entity or the toolpath operation.
Mastercam warns you if you try to delete geometry used in a toolpath
or associated with a drafting entity.
Associativity lets you regenerate toolpaths or drafting dimensions

when the geometry changes—without requiring you to redefine
them. When you change an operations's geometry or toolpath
parameters, use the Toolpath Manager to regenerate the operation.
1
When you change geometry associated with a drafting entity, use
functions in the Create, Drafting, Regen submenu to update the
drafting dimension, as necessary.
Libraries (operations, tools, materials)

Mastercam libraries are collections of files that define operations,
tools, or materials. Mastercam provides default tool and material
libraries to get you started, but you can customize the files and create
your own. Once you save a file to a library, it can be used and reused
in a Mastercam part file.
Operation Libraries
Operation libraries are collections of toolpath operations that have an
.OPERATIONS extension. To save an operation to a library, use the
Export function from the Toolpath Manager right–click menu. You
can use the Import function in this menu to import a saved operation,
with or without its geometry, into the current part file, provided it can
be supported by the selected machine definition.
Tool Libraries
Tool libraries store tool definitions that have a .TOOLS extension. Tool
libraries are useful for storing common tools or for storing tools for
specific jobs. You can create a separate library for each machine tool
in your shop or for sets of machines that use similar tools. You can use
one of several tool libraries that come with Mastercam, or you can
create your own tool libraries. Use the Tool Manager to view and
manage libraries and tool definitions.
Note: Although you use different tool managers to define mill/

router and lathe tools, they are stored in a single tool library.
Material Libraries
Material definitions are stored in libraries, just like tool definitions.
When you select a material, Mastercam copies the definition to your
part file. Material definition files have a .MATERIALS extension and
consist of base feed rates and tables of adjustments for different oper-
ation types and tool types. When you select a material and a tool for
an operation, Mastercam can use the information in the material
definition to help calculate proper default feed rates and spindle
speeds for the selected operation and tool.
Mastercam Menus
In addition to using customizable toolbars and right–click menus,
you can access most Mastercam functions through a series of stan-
dard, drop-down menus and submenus located across the top of the
Mastercam window. Primary menus include:
File (page 29) Xform (page 35)
Edit (page 30) Machine Type (page 35)
View (page 31) Toolpaths (page 36)
Analyze (page 32) Screen (page 37)
Create (page 33) Settings (page 38)
Solids (page 34) Help (page 39)
This section provides a summary of each menu and its functions.

INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Mastercam Menus • 29
File Menu
Use File menu functions to open, edit, print, and save files.
1
Mastercam provides seamless integration with most popular

CAD/CAM file formats. Converting files from and to non-Mastercam
formats occurs automatically when you open and save files in
Mastercam. When saving files, you can save all or only some of the
entities to a specified format, and include descriptive text and a
thumbnail image of the geometry with the file data.
You can also import and export files to and from specified directories,
and merge data into the current file from a pattern file (for example, a
nut or bolt you use repeatedly in Mastercam files).
Edit Menu
This menu provides access to functions you use to edit geometry,
such as the Join entities, Modify NURBS, Convert NURBS, and
Simplify functions, and the Trim / Break submenu functions. Other
Edit menu functions allow you to cut, copy, paste, delete, or select all
entities in the graphics window.
Use the Undo and Redo functions to reverse or repeat one or more
sequential events that occur as you work with a file. (An event is a
single function-based operation such as create line or transform enti-
ties.)
You can also use the Set Normal and Change Normal functions to set
the direction of multiple surface normals relative to the current
construction plane.
View Menu
The View menu helps you manage the appearance and orientation of
1
the Mastercam graphics window.
The Viewports submenu lets you choose a particular arrangement of

one or more (up to four) viewports. Viewports are partitioned areas of
the graphics window where you can assign different views.
Use other View menu functions to show or hide the Operations
Manager pane, and otherwise modify the graphics window appear-
ance by fitting, repainting, panning, or zooming.
From the Orient submenu, you can change views, dynamically rotate
the current view, or flip coordinates to reorient the graphics window
view.
Analyze Menu
Use Analyze menu functions to view and edit entity properties.
Some analyze functions provide a report function that lets you save
the information to a file. You can also use analyze functions to modify
the color, line style and width, or point style attributes of a single
entity, or apply the same attributes to all the selected entities.
Create Menu
This extensive menu includes all Sketcher (Create Geometry), Curve,
1
Surfaces, and Drafting functions.
Use these functions to create points, lines, arcs, splines, curves, fillets,
chamfers, surfaces, drafting entities and basic geometry including
rectangles, rectangular shapes, polygons, ellipses, spirals, and helixes.
From the Primitives submenu, you can create a cylinder, cone, block,
sphere or tourus surface. If your installation includes Mastercam
Solids, you can also create solid primitive shapes.
Additional functions allow you to create letters, define a bounding
box, and convert a solid to a 2D profile.
Solids Menu
Functions in this menu are available only if your Mastercam installa-
tion includes Mastercam Solids.
Use these functions to define a solid by extruding, revolving,

sweeping, or lofting chains of curves.
Once you create the base operation, you use other Solids menu func-
tions to remove or add material, smooth or bevel edges, shell, and cut
entry holes. You can also perform Boolean functions (add solids
together, remove solids from one another, and find common solid
volumes), draft solid faces, and trim solids to a plane or surface.
Note: To define a solid using primitive (pre-defined) shapes, such

as a cylinder, cone, block, sphere, or torus, use the Create, Primi-
tives functions.
Xform Menu
Use Xform (transform) functions to move or copy selected entities by
1
mirroring, rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, and
rolling them.
With some functions, you can join the copied entities to the originals.
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a tempo-
rary group from the original entities and a result from the trans-
formed entities.
Machine Type Menu

Use this menu to select a machine type by choosing a machine defini-
tion. Your access to the different types of machine definitions in the
menu is based on the Mastercam products you have installed. For
example, you must have a Mastercam Mill license to choose a Mill
machine definition from this menu.
You can also use the Machine Definition Manager and the Control
Definition functions in this menu to set up or modify machine and
control definitions.
The machine type you choose modifies the Mastercam interface so
that only the toolpath options and limits supported by the machine,
control, and post processor are available. This prevents Mastercam
from creating tool motion that cannot be executed by the machine. In
a Mastercam part file, the machine definition is part of the machine
group properties you view and modify in the Toolpath Manager. As
soon as you select a machine type, only the toolpaths available for the
selected machine type are enabled in the Toolpaths menu.
Toolpaths Menu
Functions in this menu allow you to create and edit the toolpaths
required to cut the part using the specified machine definition. Tool-
path functions appear in this menu only after you select a machine
definition from the Machine Type menu, or choose a machine group
from the Toolpath Manager. These functions vary based on the
machine type associated with the active machine group (Mill, Lathe,
Router). Here is an example of the Mill toolpaths menu:
When you create a toolpath, an operation is automatically created

and appears in the Toolpath Manager under the active machine
group. 1
Note: The machine group you are working with appears high-
lighted in the Toolpath Manager, indicating that it is active.
Screen Menu
This menu is where you specify default settings and manage the
display of geometry in the graphics window. The Clear colors option
lets you remove the group and result colors that result from
performing a transform function (Xform). Mastercam creates a
temporary group from the originals (red) and a result (purple) from
the transformed entities. You can set system attributes, and activate,
deactivate, or customize the appearance of the selection grid, which
is a matrix of reference points that the cursor snaps to when you
sketch a point.
You use other Screen menu functions to temporarily remove and

restore selected entities, repaint, regenerate, or copy images in the
graphics window, and combine all parallel views into a single view.
Settings Menu
Use the Settings menu functions to set up Mastercam to your specifi-
cations.
You can define, save, or load the default values and preferences
(Configuration) you want to work with. Other functions allow you to
create customized toolbar configurations and states, drop-down
menus, function key mappings, and a customized right-mouse
button menu. The configuration and customization parameters you
define can be saved to named files that you load when you need
them, even on other Mastercam installations.
You can also run third-party applications, VB scripts, and create, edit,
or run Mastercam macros. Other tools let you optimize your PC’s
RAM management when running Mastercam.
Notes:
• Although you can create multiple configuration .CONFIG files,
toolbars and states (.MTB), and key map (.KMP) files, each
containing different values, you can load only one of each file
type at a time.
• Changes made to configuration settings apply only to the
current session unless you save them to a configuration file.
• For more information on customization tools, see Customizing
Your Workspace on page 40, and Setting Defaults and Prefer-
ences (Configuration) on page 60.
Help Menu
This menu provides access to a variety of information about
1
Mastercam, including:
Mastercam Help
Mastercam X Reference Guide PDF (requires Adobe Acrobat
Reader)
Mastercam product information (licensing, version, installed
products, serial number)
Online updates
Mastercam’s corporate website
(www.mastercam.com)
Note: For more information on getting help with Mastercam, see

Mastercam Support and Services on page 8.
Customizing Your Workspace

Use the Settings, Customize function to set up toolbars so that the
functions that are most important to you are easily available, and
those that you do not work with, or use infrequently, do not display.
You can also create or modify the drop-down menus that appear in
toolbars, create your own toolbars, and set up a customized right-
mouse button menu for quick access to the functions you use most
often.
Additional customization options allow you to remap default
Mastercam keyboard shortcuts to your own, custom key sequences.
This essential customization tool lets you ramp up quickly and main-
tain high productivity because you use the keyboard shortcuts you
already know and rely on.
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading from a prior version of

Mastercam, the same keyboard shortcuts have been retained,
where possible to help you transition to Mastercam X.
TIP: Use the Settings, Macro Manager function to reduce the

number of keystrokes you type and ensure consistency when
performing repeated tasks. A macro is a series of Mastercam
functions, commands, keystrokes, and other actions that you
can record, save, and play back at any time. Macros can make
detail work flow more quickly and easily.

Customizing Toolbar Settings (page 41)
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar files (page 45)
Customizing Toolbar Functions (page 45)
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu (page 49)
Creating and Saving Toolbar States (page 51)
Hiding / Showing Toolbars (page 52)
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts (page 56)
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Customizing Your Workspace • 41
Customizing Toolbar Settings

Customized toolbar settings are stored as toolbar files (.MTB) in the
1
\CONFIG directory of the Mastercam installation location. Toolbar
files are completely portable and allow you to transform any
Mastercam installation in your shop into your own personal worksta-
tion.
Each Mastercam toolbar file you create contains the following infor-
mation:
For each toolbar you define, a list of its functions, including
drop-down menus and submenus.
Functions in the right-mouse button menu.
All toolbar states that were created and saved to the .MTB file.
A toolbar state records the show / hide display status, phys-
ical orientation, size, and location, and docked / undocked
state of each toolbar at a specific point in time and is used to
reload this configuration.
Mastercam uses only one toolbar file at a time. However, when
running Mastercam, you can change the current toolbar file as often
as necessary.
This also applies to toolbar states. Although you can create and save
many named toolbar states in a single toolbar file, you load and work
with only one toolbar state at any given time. Creating separate
toolbar states for different job phases simplifies the interface and
helps you quickly locate the functions you need. For example, in your
toolbar file, you could create different toolbar states to facilitate
working with Design, 2D Mill, 3D Mill, Lathe, or Solids functions.
When you load a toolbar state, the workspace immediately changes to
the toolbar state configuration. You can also assign a toolbar state to a
machine definition in order to change the toolbar configuration each
time the associated machine definition is active in the Toolpath
Manager.
The following examples illustrate two toolbar states, Design and
Lathe.
Figure 1-16: Example: Design Toolbar State
CAM-related
toolbars hidden
Vertically docked
Sketcher toolbar
Figure 1-17: Example: Lathe Toolbar State
CAD-related
toolbars hidden
Vertically docked
Lathe Toolpaths toolbar
Mastercam provides a number of standard toolbar files. They are

located in the Mastercam \CONFIG directory.
TIP: To open and load a toolbar file, use the Settings,

Customize, Open file icon. 1
Note: When you start Mastercam, it opens the default toolbar file
specified in the configuration file. You set the toolbar and other
startup parameters in the Settings, Configuration function,
Start / Exit page. You will learn more about configuring
Mastercam defaults in Setting Defaults and Preferences (Config-
uration) on page 60.
To access the Customize dialog box, choose Settings, Customize

from the Mastercam menu. Fields and options in the Customize
dialog box are organized and displayed in two tabs: Toolbars (default)
and Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu.
Figure 1-18: Toolbars tab (Customize dialog box)
In the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, you can:

Remove or add functions in toolbars
Create new toolbars
Rename toolbars
Delete toolbars
Note: Use the Toolbar States button to access the Toolbar States
dialog box. You can also access this dialog box directly from the
Mastercam Settings menu. For more information on working
with toolbar states, see Creating and Saving Toolbar States on
page 51.
To create or modify drop-down menus, including the right-mouse

button menu, click the Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu
tab.
Figure 1-19: Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab
(Customize dialog box)
In the Drop-downs / Right-mouse button menu tab, you can:

Create new drop-down menus
Remove or add functions in drop-down menus
Rename drop-down menus
Delete drop-down menus
TIP: As you work with options in the Settings, Customize

dialog box, toolbars in the Mastercam window are updated so
you immediately see the results of changing the current
toolbar file. All Customize dialog box options interact with the
Mastercam window in this manner.
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Toolbar

files 1
Options in the lower left corner of the Customize dialog box allow you
to:
Open an existing Mastercam toolbar file. Use the Open file
dialog box options to locate and open the .MTB file you want
to load.
Use options in the Save as dialog box to save the current
toolbar settings to a specified location and .MTB file name.
Reset toolbars to the standard Mastercam defaults. These
settings are the “factory defaults” and are stored in propri-
etary Mastercam files. After loading the defaults, you can
customize them and use the Save as option to save them to
an external toolbar file.
Figure 1-20: Customize Toolbars: Open, Save, Reset
Open Save as Reset Current Toolbar file
Customizing Toolbar Functions

In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, all functions are
grouped by category. To view functions, select a category from the
drop-down list:
Figure 1-21: Customize dialog box: Category list
IMPORTANT: Categories do not represent standard toolbars.

Standard toolbars typically correspond to fixed Mastercam
menus and submenus. Toolbar categories are more general
groupings of related functions.
When you choose a category from the list, a group of function icons
for the selected category displays in the Commands section of the
tab:
Figure 1-22: Example: Edit category functions (Customize
dialog box)
Selected
category
Selected
function
Function
description
(tooltip)
TIP: When you click the function icon, a brief description (tool
tip) of the function displays below the function list. You can
also display tool tips in the Mastercam window by moving the
1
cursor over toolbar icons, or buttons and fields in ribbon bars
or dialog boxes.
Use “drag and drop” methods to quickly add, delete, or rearrange the
functions in a toolbar.
Drag and Drop Visual Cues

When you drag a function from an existing toolbar or from the
Customize dialog box, Mastercam adds a visual cue to the cursor
pointer. Visual cues indicate what will happen if you drop the func-
tion in the current position. They include:
Drag / Drop
Description
Visual Cues
No drop zone: The dragged icon is in a location

where it cannot be dropped. If you drop it there,
no change occurs. The icon remains in the toolbar
from which it was dragged or, if dragged from the
Customize dialog box, it is not added to a new or
existing toolbar.
Add function: If you drop the dragged icon to this

location, the function is added either to a selected
toolbar or to a new toolbar. If you do not drop the
icon on an existing toolbar, Mastercam automati-
cally creates the new toolbar.
Remove function: If you drop the dragged icon to

this location, it is removed from the selected
toolbar. This does not delete the function from
Mastercam; it is removed only from its position in
the toolbar.
Adding Functions and Toolbars

You can drag function icons from the Customize dialog box Tool-
bars tab and drop them in an existing toolbar. You can also create a
new toolbar by dropping the function anywhere in the Mastercam
window except on an existing toolbar.
For each new toolbar you create, Mastercam assigns a default
toolbar name using a unique numeric identifier, as necessary (for
example New Toolbar, New Toolbar1, New Toolbar2).
X To add functions from the Toolbars tab to a new or existing

toolbar:
1 Choose one of the following methods to access the
Customize dialog box:
Choose Settings, Customize from the Mastercam menu.
Right–click in the toolbar area or when the cursor is in a
toolbar and select Customize from the Toolbar Display
menu.
2 In the Customize dialog box Toolbars tab, click the Category
drop-down arrow and choose a category to display its func-
tions.
3 Choose a function by selecting it with the left mouse button.
Then hold down the button as you drag the function from the
Toolbars tab to a new location.
4 If you are adding the function to a new toolbar, skip to Step 5.
Otherwise, to place the function in a toolbar, drag and drop it
in a toolbar position.
TIP: If you drop a function in the wrong position, select it

again, then drag and drop it in a new position.
5 To create a new toolbar for the function, drag and drop the
function anywhere in the Mastercam window that is not
occupied by a toolbar. Mastercam automatically creates a
toolbar named New Toolbar and adds the function to it.
6 To add additional functions to the new toolbar, repeat Step 2–
Step 4, as necessary.
Customizing the Right-Mouse Button Menu

Mastercam includes a special type of drop-down menu that you
1
access with the right-mouse button any time the cursor is in the
graphics window. To create a convenient list of shortcuts, you can
add, remove, or rearrange functions and submenus in the
right-mouse button menu using the same procedures as with other
drop-down menus. For an alternate method of access, you can even
add the right-mouse button drop-down menu to a toolbar, or as a
submenu to another drop-down menu.
Figure 1-23: Example: Right-click mouse button menu
Note: You cannot delete or rename the right-mouse button menu

from Mastercam. To disable it, remove all of its functions.
Adding Separators to Toolbars / Menus

You can add vertical and horizontal separators to toolbars and drop-
down menus to create a visual break, for example, to isolate a single
function, or group similar functions.
Figure 1-24: Example: Vertical and horizontal separators
Horizontal and
vertical separators
In the Customize dialog box, the Separator button

displays in the upper right section of each tab.
X To add vertical separators to toolbars:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Toolbars
tab, choose the Separator button with the left mouse button.
2 Hold down the mouse button and drag the separator to any
toolbar position in the Mastercam window.
3 Release the mouse button to drop the vertical separator in
the selected position.
X To add horizontal separators to drop-down menus:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-down /
Right-mouse button menu tab, expand the drop-down
menu in the Menus list.
2 Choose the Separator button with the left mouse button,
then drag it to a position in the expanded drop-down menu.
3 Release the mouse button to drop a SEPARATOR label in the
selected position. When viewing the drop-down menu in the
Mastercam window, a horizontal separator displays in the

SEPARATOR label position.
1
TIP: To reposition a separator, drag and drop it to a new posi-
tion in the toolbar or drop-down menu.
X To remove separators from toolbars:

1 In the Mastercam window, select the toolbar separator to
remove.
2 Drag and drop it anywhere in the Mastercam window that is
not occupied by a toolbar.
X To remove separators from drop-down menus:

1 In the Settings, Customize dialog box Drop-down /
Right-mouse button tab, expand the drop-down menu in
the Menus list.
2 Select the SEPARATOR label to remove and press the
keyboard Delete key.
Creating and Saving Toolbar States

A toolbar state is a “snapshot” of the display status (show/hide), phys-
ical orientation, size, location, and state (docked / undocked) of all
toolbars in the Mastercam window at a specific point in time.
When you load a toolbar state, you restore a customized toolbar
layout to the Mastercam window in order to work with toolbars in a
certain configuration. For example, you might create and save
different toolbar states for working with 2D toolpaths and 3D tool-
paths, or with Lathe, Mill, and Router machine definitions.
TIP: In the Machine Type, Machine Definition Manager dialog

box, you can assign a toolbar state to a machine definition.
When you open the machine in a machine group (for example,
to create toolpaths for it), the assigned toolbar state automati-
cally loads in the Mastercam window.
Use the Settings, Toolbar States function to access the Toolbar States
dialog box where you can view, create, save, load or delete toolbar
states that are stored in the current toolbar file.
Note: You can also access this dialog box by choosing Settings,
Customize and clicking the Toolbar States button in the Toolbar
tab.
Figure 1-25: Toolbar States dialog box
TIP: To set a default toolbar state that loads whenever you

open the toolbar file or start up Mastercam, select a toolbar
state from the list. Then select the Default check box. An
asterisk displays next to the toolbar state name, indicating that
it is the default.
Although you use a separate function to work with them, toolbar

states are stored in binary format within a section of the current
toolbar file (.MTB). To open and load a toolbar file, use the Settings,
Customize function, and then click the Open file button , located in
the lower left corner.
Hiding / Showing Toolbars

Mastercam provides standard toolbars you can modify, rename, or
delete. You can also create an unlimited number of your own toolbars.
Use the Show these toolbars portion of the Toolbar States dialog
box to view all standard and custom toolbars that have been config-
ured for your Mastercam installation, and to modify display status
settings. Only toolbars with a display status of “show” appear in the
Mastercam interface.
Figure 1-26: Toolbar States dialog box,

Show these toolbars list
1
Show
Hide
When creating or modifying a toolbar state, use the following

methods to set each toolbar’s display status (show/hide):
To show a toolbar in the Mastercam window, select the check
box next to the toolbar name (selected toolbars are indicated
with a check mark).
To hide a toolbar from display, clear the check mark next to
the toolbar name by deselecting it.
As you select / deselect toolbars, they display in, or are removed from,
the Mastercam window.
X To create a toolbar state:

1 Use one of the following methods to access the Toolbar
States dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Toolbar
States.
In the Settings, Customize function and dialog box, click
the Toolbar States button.
2 Set the toolbar display status for all toolbars you want to hide
or show in the toolbar state.
3 In the Mastercam window, “drag and drop” toolbars to repo-
sition, resize, and dock or undock them.
4 To save the layout as a toolbar state, in the Toolbar States
dialog box, type the name of the new toolbar state in the
name field and choose Save. The new toolbar state is added
to the toolbar file and displays in the Toolbar States list.
X To load a toolbar state:

1 To view all toolbar states in the current toolbar file, use one of
the following methods to access the Toolbar States dialog
box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Settings, Toolbar
States.
In the Settings, Customize function and dialog box, click
the Toolbar States button.
2 In the Toolbar States list, select the name of the toolbar state
to load and click the Load button. The Mastercam window is
updated with the selected toolbar state.
3 To close the dialog box, click OK.
X To delete a toolbar state:

1 In the Toolbar States dialog box, choose one of the following
options:
To delete a single toolbar state, select the name of the
toolbar state to delete and click the Delete button. The
selected toolbar state is removed from the list.
To delete all toolbar states, click the Delete All button.
TIP: To restore deleted toolbar states, click Reset before

exiting this dialog box.
2 To close the dialog box, click OK.

Using the Toolbar Right–Click Menu

From any position in the Mastercam window toolbar area, or when
1
the cursor is positioned in a toolbar, you can right–click to access the
Toolbar Display menu and view a list of all toolbars and their display
status.
Figure 1-27: Toolbar Display right–click menu
To change the current display status of a single toolbar and close the
menu, select it from the list. The selected toolbar changes to show or
hide in the Mastercam window, based on its initial setting.
Use other menu options to access the Customize and Toolbar States
dialog boxes, or to quickly select and load a toolbar state from the
current .MTB file.
Mapping Customized Keyboard Shortcuts

Use the Settings, Key mapping function and dialog box to map
Mastercam commands to your own keyboard shortcuts.
Figure 1-28: Key mapping dialog box
You can map any Mastercam function to a key sequence you define.
Rather than selecting a function from a menu or toolbar with the
mouse, use your custom keyboard shortcut to open the function.
Key map files have a .KMP file extension and reside in the \CONFIG
directory of the Mastercam installation location. You can load a new
key mapping file at any time during the Mastercam session. Key
mapping files are also portable. You can copy and use them on other
Mastercam workstations, provided you save them in the correct direc-
tory (\CONFIG).
The combinations of key sequences you can use to create keyboard
shortcuts are listed below (where Key is the alphanumeric character
or keyboard function keys F1-F12).
Alt+Key Ctrl+Key
Ctrl+Alt+ Key Shift+Alt+Key
Shift+Ctrl+Key Shift+Ctrl+Alt+Key
F1-F12
Note: When mapping shortcut keys, you cannot use a single

alphanumeric key or one in combination with a Shift key. These
shortcuts are reserved and used by Mastercam for data entry
1
shortcuts, and ribbon bar and dialog box options.

Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping files on page 57
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments on page 58
Removing Shortcut Assignments on page 59
Opening, Saving, and Resetting Key Mapping files

Options in the lower left corner of the Key mapping dialog box allow
you to:
Open and load an existing Mastercam key mapping file. Use
the Open file dialog box options to locate and open the .KMP
file you want to load.
Use options in the Save as dialog box to save the current key
map settings to a specified location and .KMP file.
Reset All key mappings to the standard Mastercam “factory
defaults”. After loading the defaults, you can customize them
and use the Save as option to save them to a new key
mapping file.
Figure 1-29: Key mapping: Open, Save, Reset
Current Key
Reset map filename
Open Save as
Adding or Modifying Shortcut Assignments
X To add or modify a shortcut assignment:

1 Choose Settings, Key mapping from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-

down arrow and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
3 In the Commands section, select the icon of the function to
map. If a keyboard shortcut is already assigned, it displays in
the Current keys text field.
4 To assign a new shortcut, position the cursor in the Press
new shortcut key field and use the keyboard to type the key
sequence.
If Mastercam can assign the shortcut, the entered
sequence displays in the Press new shortcut key field, for
example, Alt+Shift+D.
If the shortcut you entered is already assigned to another
function, a message displays, similar to the example
below:
a To reassign the key sequence to the selected function,

choose Yes and continue with Step 5.
b To keep its original assignment and reenter a different key
sequence for the selected command, choose No and
repeat Step 4.
5 To accept the new shortcut, choose Assign.
Note: If a shortcut is already assigned to the function, Mastercam

does not replace it. The new shortcut is added, allowing you to use
multiple shortcuts to access the function. All active shortcuts
display in the Current keys text field.
Removing Shortcut Assignments
X To remove a shortcut assignment:

1
1 Choose Settings, Key mapping from the Mastercam menu.
2 In the Key mapping dialog box, click the Category drop-

down arrow and choose a category from the list to display its
functions.
3 Select the Command associated with the shortcut to delete.
4 In the Current keys text field, select the shortcut and click
Remove. The shortcut is removed from its assignment to the
selected command and can now be assigned to another
command.
Setting Defaults and Preferences

(Configuration)
This section describes how to use the Configuration function in the
Settings menu to configure your Mastercam defaults and prefer-
ences, and how to save this information to a specified configuration
file (.CONFIG).
In this function, you configure Mastercam’s base unit of measure-
ment (metric or inch), choose a graphics support platform such as
OpenGL, set default chaining options, activate Learning Mode for
additional ribbon bar support, define the number of functions you
want to view in most-recently used (MRU) toolbars and lists, and
much more.
This section includes information on:
Configuring Mastercam X (page 60)
Managing Configuration Files (page 61)
Merging Configuration Files (page 81)
Configuring Mastercam X
Mastercam default settings are stored as files with a .CONFIG exten-
sion in the Mastercam \CONFIG directory. Mastercam uses settings
from the configuration file as default values when you restart or
initialize operations, for example, when creating a new part, or
opening and importing existing parts.
Mastercam provides a number of standard configuration files with
your initial installation, in both inch and metric units. You can
customize them, create your own, and even merge configuration files.
If multiple users share a single Mastercam installation, each unique
user can automatically load a customized default configuration file
when logging in to the workstation and running Mastercam.
Mastercam uses only one configuration file at a time. However, when
running Mastercam, you can change the configuration file as often as
necessary.
Use the Settings, Configuration function and System Configuration
dialog box to review and set Mastercam default values, and to manage
the configuration files that store these values.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) • 61
Managing Configuration Files

The changes you make to configuration settings can be temporary,
1
affecting only the current session, or you can save them to a configu-
ration file for reuse. In the System Configuration dialog box, you can
modify and save changes to the current configuration file, create a
new configuration file, or open another configuration file and merge
selected settings into the current file.
Figure 1-30: System Configuration Save options
Save As Merge Current configuration file

Save As: Opens the Configuration name dialog box, which
lets you save the current configuration file using the same or
a different file name. You can also use the drop-down list to
select an existing configuration file to overwrite.
Note: The .CONFIG file type and a fixed “save as” location
(Mastercam \CONFIG directory) are required and cannot be
changed.
Merge: Opens the Configuration File Merge dialog box that

lets you merge configuration files and select which defaults
you want to retain in the resulting file.
Current: Displays the name of the configuration file currently
in effect and to which the defaults defined on all System
Configuration pages will be saved. To select a different
configuration file as the current file, click the arrow and
choose a file from the list. All .CONFIG files stored in the
Mastercam \CONFIG directory display in the list for selec-
tion.
Setting Default Values

The System Configuration dialog box consists of various properties
pages that group related default values and settings. To access a prop-
erties page, click its name in the list of configuration topics in the left
pane.
Figure 1-31: System Configuration dialog box
When you change a setting on a page, the question mark preceding its
name in the topic list becomes a check mark so that you can track
where you have made changes during an editing session. To save
these changes, you must save the configuration file. Otherwise, the
changes are applied to the current session and persist only until you
close and restart Mastercam.
In this section, you will learn to configure Mastercam by setting
parameters in the following properties pages:
Tolerances (page 63) Files (page 64)
Converters (page 64) Screen (page 65)
Colors (page 66) Chaining (page 67)
Shading (page 68) Solids (page 69)
Printing (page 70) CAD Settings (page 70)

Dimension Attributes Dimension Text (page 72)

(page 72) 1
Note Text (page 73) Leaders / Witness (page
74)
Dimension Settings Start / Exit (page 76)

(page 75)
Toolpaths (page 77) Post Processing (page 78)
Backplot (page 79) Verify (page 80)
Tolerances
The options you define in the Tolerance properties page control the
precision with which Mastercam performs certain operations, for
example, how close entities must be to be considered coincident or
chained, and how smooth curves and surfaces will be. Smaller toler-
ances produce more precise parts, but also generally create larger
files.
Figure 1-32: Tolerances properties page
(System Configuration)
Files
Use the Files properties page to select the files you want Mastercam to
use as defaults, define the default data paths for saving different file
types, configure Most Recently Used (MRU) drop-down menu
settings, and set options for opening and saving files.
Figure 1-33: Files properties page (System Configuration)
You also use this page to activate Mastercam’s AutoSave functions.

AutoSave lets you save the current geometry and operations automat-
ically at specific time intervals—for example, every 10 minutes and to
define other AutoSave behaviors. Use this option to reduce data loss
in the event of a hardware or power failure.
Converters
When you open part files that are not in the current .MCX Mastercam
format or when you save them to an external file format, Mastercam
automatically runs a conversion program, based on the selected file
type (for example, IGES, VDA, STEP, SAT, Parasolid, DWG, or DXF.)
In the Converters properties page, you set defaults for file conver-
sions, including:
How solids are imported and exported
The level used for untrimmable surfaces
How units are converted
The method used to convert solids
Figure 1-34: Converters properties page

1
TIP: When converting files, use the File, Open function and
choose Options to override or set additional conversion
parameters.
Screen
Use the Screen properties page to set the graphics parameters that
control how Mastercam looks and operates, and to define your
personal display and selection preferences.
Figure 1-35: Screen properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• To set default colors for Mastercam screen and entity display,
use the Colors properties page.
• To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry, use
the Shading properties page.
Colors
You can set default colors for many different aspects of the
Mastercam interface, such as the graphics background (including
gradients), geometry, construction origin, grid, groups, and various
Mill, Lathe, Solids, and Surfaces components.
Figure 1-36: Colors properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• To preserve changes to default color settings for subsequent
Mastercam sessions, you must save the configuration file.
• To temporarily change default colors for selected entities or
new entities you create during the current Mastercam session,
use the Color function from the Status Bar.
Chaining
Use this page to define the way Mastercam chains entities, including:
1
Chaining mask options
Methods for sorting multiple, nested chains
Default chaining mode and direction
The values you set in this page are used as defaults in the Chaining
dialog box. This dialog box displays whenever you are required to
chain geometry.
Figure 1-37: Chaining properties page (System Configuration)
TIP: You can override the defaults you set in the

Settings, Configuration, Chaining properties page by
selecting the Chaining options button in the Chaining
dialog box.
Shading
Shading values determine how surfaces and solids appear when
shaded. Use this page to set default shading parameters such as color,
ambient lighting, spot lighting, hidden edges, and other properties.
Figure 1-38: Shading properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• To temporarily override default shading parameters during the
current Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from the
Screen menu or Shading toolbar to open the Shading Settings
dialog box.
• To make permanent changes to shading parameter defaults,
use the Settings, Configuration function and Shading proper-
ties page. Then save the changes to the .CONFIG file.
Solids
Options in this page allow you to pre-define how Mastercam creates
1
and displays solids, including:
Where to add new solids operations in the Solids Manager:
ahead of toolpath operations or in the order in which they are
performed.
Enable/disable the Auto-Highlight for Solids Manager.
Specify a radial display curve angle for circular faces.
Set defaults for stitching surfaces into solids.
Figure 1-39: Solids properties page (System Configuration)
Notes:
• You can also enable or disable Auto-Highlight from the Solids
Manager right-click menu.
• To change default shading parameters for solids display during
the current Mastercam session, choose Shade Settings from
the Screen menu or Shading toolbar to open the Shading
Settings dialog box.
• To set default shading parameters for Mastercam geometry,
including solids, use the Shading properties page.
Printing
Use this page to set initial, default parameters for printing part draw-
ings, including line width, color printing, header name and date, and
solid shading.
Figure 1-40: Printing properties page (System Configuration)
CAD Settings
The CAD Settings properties page is where you set design and drafting
preferences, including defaults for:
Automating and formatting arc center lines
Center line attributes (line style, line width, point style)
Spline and surface creation type
Surface drawing density and back highlighting
Whether to update Cplane and Tplane when changing
Gviews
Xform preview settings
Managing duplicate entities created by Xform functions
Arc center point display
Entity Attribute Manager settings
Figure 1-41: CAD Settings properties page

1
Note: You can override many of these defaults using Status bar
options and when using functions to create, edit, and analyze
geometric and drafting entities.
Drafting Dimension Properties

Use the following properties pages to set parameters and defaults for
different types of drafting dimension entities:
Dimension Attributes on page 72
Dimension Text on page 72
Note Text on page 73
Leaders / Witness on page 74
Dimension Settings on page 75
TIPS:
• As you modify options in the drafting dimension properties
pages, you immediately see their effect in the preview
diagram area of each page. Use the preview to verify your
selections.
• To temporarily change drafting default parameters for the
current Mastercam session, choose Drafting Options from
the Create, Drafting submenu.
Dimension Attributes
You define the following defaults in the Dimension Attributes proper-
ties page:
Display format and scale
Text centering
Symbols or units used to display radius, diameter, and
angular dimensions
Tolerance settings for linear and angular dimensions
Figure 1-42: Dimension Attributes properties page
Dimension Text
The default text properties you can set for drafting dimensions in this
page include:
Text height, width, and Line and borders

spacing
Text path or direction Font
Point dimension text Text alignment/

display orientation
Ordinate dimension: Slant and rotation

display negative sign
Figure 1-43: Dimension Text properties page

1
Note Text
Drafting notes and labels are blocks of text (one or more lines) that
you insert into a drawing. Notes are standalone blocks of text,
whereas labels have one or more leader lines used as pointers. When
you create note and label drafting entities, Mastercam uses the
settings in the Note text properties page to format the text.
Figure 1-44: Note Text properties page (System Configuration)
Leaders / Witness
In Mastercam, leader lines (drafting lines with single arrowheads that
function as pointers) most often point from a dimension’s text to its
witness lines. Witness lines are lines that project from a dimensioned
object to indicate the extent of the leader lines. Use this page to set
the default properties for:
Leader lines: Style, visibility, and arrow direction
Witness lines: Visibility, gap, and extension
Arrows: style, Height, and width
Figure 1-45: Leaders / Witness properties page
Dimension Settings
The Dimension Settings properties page lets you associate dimen-
sions, labels, leaders and witness lines with entities as the entities are
1
created. You can set the method Mastercam uses to regenerate associ-
ated drafting entities. You can limit the views in which entities can be
displayed, and define increments used for baseline dimensions.
Figure 1-46: Dimension Settings properties page
Use the Save/Get functions on this tab to save drafting parameters to

a .CAD file, get drafting parameters from a selected entity, load
parameters previously saved in a .CAD file, or get original, system-
defined default parameters.
Start / Exit
This page is where you set the default values to use during Mastercam
startup, and to automate certain functions when you exit Mastercam.
You can select the editor that launches when you edit NC files after
post processing, and specify the add-on programs that run when you
start or exit Mastercam.
Figure 1-47: Start / Exit properties page
Toolpaths
Use this page to configure how toolpaths are created, maintained,
1
and displayed, and to define the setup sheet program to use.
Figure 1-48: Toolpaths properties page
IMPORTANT: Tool display parameters affect how Mastercam

displays toolpaths as it generates them. It does not affect Back-
plot.
Notes:
• To change tool display parameters for a selected operation,
click Parameters in the Toolpath Manager and choose Tool
Display in the Tool Parameters tab.
• Although tool display defaults are in effect when Mastercam
starts, if you change them, subsequent toolpaths of the same
type that you create or import (for example, contour) use the
modified parameters for the duration of the Mastercam
session.
Post Processing
The default post processing properties you define in this page control
what happens when you run the post processor. These settings
include, for example, whether to save the NC file or to edit the existing
file. If you save the file, you can choose what to use for the NC file
extension, and whether to overwrite the existing file automatically or
request that Mastercam prompts you to verify the overwrite on each
save. You can also send the NC program to the machine automati-
cally.
You can configure Mastercam to create an ASCII NCI file (called an
Operation file).
Figure 1-49: Post Processing properties page
Backplot
Use this property page to set parameters that affect how a tool moves
1
and appears on the screen during a backplot operation.
Figure 1-50: Backplot properties page (System Configuration)
The parameters you choose are for display purposes only and do not
affect the part when it is machined.
Verify
You set up default properties in this page for toolpath verification
operations initiated from the Toolpath Manager.
Figure 1-51: Verify properties page (System Configuration)
To change Verify configuration parameters during the current

Mastercam session, initiate a Verify operation, and then in the Verify
controls dialog box, choose the Options button to open the Verify
options dialog box.
Figure 1-52: Verify Configure button
Note: For more information on verifying operations, see Verifying

Operations on page 252.
Merging Configuration Files

The Merge button in the System Configuration dialog box lets
1
you combine system configuration settings from other files
with the current configuration file.
You can merge:
An entire startup or other configuration file
Standard inch or metric defaults
Specified sections of system configuration settings
Figure 1-53: Merge files dialog box (System Configuration)
Use this dialog box to select the configuration settings you want to
merge with the current configuration file and to specify which
sections to merge.
Changing Units of Measure (Metric / Inch)

When you open a part file that uses different units (metric or inch)
from those currently in use, Mastercam automatically displays the
System Configuration dialog box, which informs you that Mastercam
is switching units and loading an alternate default configuration file.
Figure 1-54: System Configuration
English (inch) / Metric dialog box
To complete the operation, you must select one of the following

options:
Units: Uses only the units from the new configuration file.
(default)
All settings: Loads all settings from the new configuration
file.
Note: You can also use the Current field near the bottom of the
System Configuration dialog box to switch current units by
selecting an alternate configuration file.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Role of Machine and Control Definitions • 83
The Role of Machine and Control 1

Definitions
Machine Definitions (what they are and why you use them)
Control Definitions and Toolpath Defaults (page 85)
Working with Post Processors (page 85)
Mastercam machine definitions are virtual descriptions of the actual
machine tools you will use to cut a part. They determine the functions
and tool parameters you can choose when creating toolpath opera-
tions. With machine definitions, you generate more accurate NC
output because you define each machine tool and its unique charac-
teristics.
Each Mastercam machine definition consists of:
Machine component groups and components
A control definition file
Control definitions that link a specific control type with a
post processor assignment
These three elements of the machine definition represent a single
machine tool.
Machine Components—The component groups and components you
assemble define the machine tool architecture and how it moves. The
machine type (mill, lathe, or router) determines which component
groups are available for you to assemble.
Control Definition—The control definition provides the post
processor with the information it needs to process toolpath data so
that it meets the control's requirements. The control definition also
influences the operations you create using the control.
Post Processor—The post processor is tied to the control definition. A
control definition file can hold many control definitions, each linking
a specific control type (mill, router, lathe, mill / turn, wire) with a post
processor.
When creating machine definitions, you select the control definition
file and control definition/post combinations to use with the
machine. You are not limited to a single machine tool type.
Mastercam allows you to define virtually any functional machine
design.
The Machine Definition sets the control type in the control

definition.
The Control Definition provides valid post processors to the
Machine Definition for the machine product type.
Figure 1-55: Example: Machine Definition Manager
New Edit general machine parameters
Open Edit the control definition

Save Edit axis combinations
Save as
Control definition
Post processor
Machine
groups and
components
Graphical machine
configuration
Default toolbar
state (optional)
When you use the Machine Definition Manager to create and save
machine definitions, Mastercam assigns one of the following file
extensions, based in the selected machine type:
.MMD (Mill)
.LMD (Lathe)
.RMD (Router)
TIP: Use one of the following methods to access the Machine

Definition Manager:
• From the Mastercam menu, choose Machine Type, Machine
Definition Manager.
• From the Toolpath Manager, choose Files, and then click
Edit in the Machine - Toolpath copy section.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / The Role of Machine and Control Definitions • 85
Note: By centralizing parameters and settings that were distrib-

uted throughout prior versions of Mastercam, machine and
control definitions make it easier for you to maintain this infor-
1
mation. A centralized source also makes it easier to provide
machine layout and control information when requesting post
creation or customization.
Control Definitions and Toolpath Defaults

The control definition component of the selected machine definition
determines some of the default values for each toolpath. The toolpath
operation contains information on the approach to the part and
return to the machine reference. These conditions are different based
on the tool direction or spindle selection. Mastercam stores the tool-
path defaults in separate files (.DEFAULTS files). Each control defini-
tion points to a selected .DEFAULTS file that provides some of the
default values for new operations created with that control.
Although the default file for each operation initially comes from the
control definition, when you create toolpath operations, the toolpath
defaults file becomes a property of the machine group. From that
point, you can use the Files tab from the Machine Group Properties
dialog box to select a different .DEFAULTS file at the machine group
level. You can also use this tab to create and edit new .DEFAULTS files.
Working with Post Processors

The Mastercam machine and control definition architecture gives you
a great deal of flexibility for organizing your post processors.
Each control definition record you define and save in a control defini-
tion file links a single control type (mill, lathe, router, mill / turn, and
wire) with a single post processor file. This file structure makes it easy
for you centralize all of the control and post processing information
required by a single manufacturer.
Note: You can change the control definition file used by the
selected machine type by choosing Files in the Toolpath Manager.
For more information, see Choosing a Machine and Control Defi-
nition on page 155.
Opening and Translating Files

Mastercam seamlessly translates files, importing from and exporting
to a variety of popular, proprietary CAD/CAM formats and common
file exchange formats.
Although options provide control of the conversion process, conver-
sion occurs automatically when you use File menu functions to open
and save files—no pre- or post-formatting is required. This flexibility
makes it easy to work with non-Mastercam files, and with files saved
in a prior version of Mastercam.
Mastercam X supports the following file formats:
Mastercam Parasolid®
(V9, V8 and V7)
Pro/Engineering® SAT
(Save As Text)
VDA Rhinocerous® 3D NURBS

(Verband der Automo-
bilindustrie)
SolidWorks® Solid Edge®
AutoDesk Inventor® ASCII

(American Standard Code
for Information Inter-
change, comma delimited)
Catia™ V4 / V5 HPGL Plotter

(Hewlett-Packard Graphics
Language)
CADKey® CDL AutoCAD®
STEP IGES
(Standard for the (Initial Graphics Exchange
Exchange of Product Standard)
data)
Notes:
• If you do not have Mastercam Solids installed, you can still
machine an imported solid. However, Mastercam Solids must
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Opening and Translating Files • 87
be installed to modify a solid, or create additional solids (with

the exception of primitives).
• For more information on the conversion options available for
1
your Mastercam configuration, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
Saving Files
When you save a Mastercam file to a native .MCX format, you auto-
matically save all geometry, attributes, levels, views, planes, machine
definitions, control definitions, stock setup, machine groups, tool-
path groups, and operations data.
You can optionally save a bitmap thumbnail image of the geometry,
add descriptive text, such as instructions for working with the file or
contact information, and set a default directory where the file will be
saved.
To define the options to use for saving files, choose Options
from the Save as dialog box. Use the following drop-down list
to select the options, and then click outside of the list to close
it.
You can also reduce the amount of navigation required to save files to
new filenames by presetting their directory paths. This is especially
helpful when working with large groups of related files. Choose one of
the following options:
Use Last Directory: Use the path that was set when any file of
any type was last opened or saved.
Use Default Directories: Use the file directory settings from
the Mastercam configuration file as the default directories for
each file type.
Use Project Directory: Resets the path to a specified loca-
tion. Choose this option, and then click the Browse button
(...) to navigate to the destination path.
Note: You can also set the directory default and other options
using Options in the File, Open dialog box. The directory default
setting is applied globally to file open and save as functions.
TIPS:
• To help you quickly identify the file you want to work with,
view the thumbnail image in the Open File dialog box. After
opening the file, use the File menu Properties function to
view its text description.
• Another helpful function you can use to save only selected
entities is the File, Save Some function. When you choose
this function, use general selection methods—including
masking—to select only the entities to save from the current
file, and then save the entities to a new file.
• Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part
data into a compressed .Z2G file. Zip2Go scans the machine
groups in your current part file and captures information
such as your Mastercam configuration, machine definition,
and post files. For more information on using Zip2Go, please
refer to the Mastercam Help.
INTRODUCTION TO MASTERCAM X / Opening and Translating Files • 89
Opening Files with Other Applications

Use the File menu, Edit/Open External function to open a file with a
1
selected, external application in its own window.
Figure 1-56: Edit / Open External dialog box
In the Open as drop-down list, you can choose:

Text: Displays file content as plain text in the currently
selected editor.
Auto: Displays file content in the application associated with
the selected file type, provided the application is installed on
your computer. For example, a file with a .doc extension
opens in Microsoft Word.
Text files open using the default editor specified in the Settings,
Configuration, Start/Exit properties page. However, you can choose
to open any file in any editor.
X To select an editor:
1 In the Open dialog box, choose Editor.
2 In the Choose File Editor dialog box, use one of the following
methods to select the editor:
Choose an editor from the list and click OK.
Note: All of the editors provided with Mastercam display in the

list, along with the most recently used “Other” editors you have
selected.
Or, choose Other from the list and click OK. Complete the
following steps:
a Use options in the Select an Editor dialog box to navigate
to the location of the editor program, such as Microsoft®
Excel® or Word®.
b Select the program .EXE file and click Open. This closes
the Select an Editor dialog box and returns you to the
Open dialog box.
3 In the Open dialog box, select the file to edit and click OK.
The editor you chose in Step 2 opens in its own window and
loads the selected file for editing.
chapter 2
Design
This chapter introduces the concepts, functions, and techniques that
you use to create and modify geometry.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Drawing and Design Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 92
Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 134
Modifying Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 144
Drawing and Design Basics

Drawing in Mastercam can be as free and dynamic as a pencil sketch
or as mathematically precise as you need it to be. The cursor and
mouse are your drawing tools, and the Create menu functions are
your primary drawing aids. Mastercam Design® also provides many
other CAD functions to make your job easier.
With Mastercam Design, you can create wireframe, surface, and prim-
itive and surface geometry. If your installation includes Mastercam
Solids®, you also have extensive tools for creating solid models.
This section takes you through the basic Mastercam drawing func-
tions, including
Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar (page 92)
Selecting Entities (page 97)
Chaining (page 102)
Setting Attributes (page 106)
Setting Z Depth (page 114)
Working in 2D and 3D Mode (page 114)
Setting Planes / Views / WCS (page 118)
Editing Your Work (page 132)
Using the AutoCursor Ribbon Bar

The AutoCursor ribbon bar becomes active whenever Mastercam
prompts you to enter position data. It shows the current cursor posi-
tion (XYZ coordinates) and also allows you to override the position
manually. Use it to
Track cursor position.
Enter X, Y, and Z coordinates manually.
Detect and snap to specific types of positions as you move
the cursor over geometry on the screen.
DESIGN / Drawing and Design Basics • 93
The AutoCursor ribbon bar is dockable. You can leave it docked in the
toolbar area or drag it to another position. When docked, it remains
visible even when inactive. When undocked from the toolbar area and
positioned elsewhere in the Mastercam window, it automatically
closes when it is not needed (inactive). When activated by your selec-
tions, it reappears where you last placed it.
When you move the cursor over geometry on the screen, you can
configure AutoCursor to display a visual cue when it detects a specific
2
position type (for example, origin, arc center, endpoint, or midpoint).
Visual Cues
Visual cues are graphic symbols that appear to the right of the cursor
when AutoCursor detects a specific position type. They identify the
type of position AutoCursor has highlighted to ensure that you select
the correct entity and position.
Mastercam visual cues include
Origin Midpoint
Arc Center Point
Endpoint Quadrant
Intersection Nearest
Horizontal /
Vertical Tangent
Perpendicular
You can limit the types of positions AutoCursor detects. For more
information, see Customizing AutoCursor behavior on page 95.
TIP: When AutoCursor is active, you can temporarily deacti-

vate its snap-to settings by holding down the Ctrl key as you
click to select a position.
Entering Position Coordinates

Use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to enter coordinates when Mastercam
prompts you to enter position data.
Current cursor coordinates FastPoint mode
AutoCursor settings
AutoCursor override
You can enter coordinates in several ways

Enter values into the X, Y, and Z fields by placing your cursor
in each field and typing a value. Press Enter or Tab to apply
the value and move to the next field (from left to right).
Press X, Y, or Z to open a field, and then type a value. You can
enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375) and
formulas, including addition (+), subtraction (-), multiplica-
tion (*), division (/), and parentheses.
Click the drop-down arrow to choose from a list of previously
entered values.
Right-click inside the field to access a menu of data entry
shortcut options you can use to define the coordinate value.
For more information on using data entry shortcuts, see
Entering values in fields on page 18.
Use FastPoint Mode.
Click in the graphics window to select a position.
Press Shift+click to create a new position relative to an
existing entity. For more information, see Using the Relative
ribbon bar on page 96.
Using FastPoint Mode to Enter Coordinates

Use the AutoCursor FastPoint Mode to replace the separate X, Y, Z
fields with a single, consolidated field. In this field, you can specify a
position by typing the XYZ coordinates separated by commas, or use
the data entry shortcuts or mathematical formulas.
To use AutoCursor FastPoint Mode whenever the AutoCursor ribbon
bar is active, do one of the following
Press the space bar on your keyboard.

Click the FastPoint button located on the AutoCursor ribbon
bar.
Figure 2-3: AutoCursor FastPoint Mode
2
FastPoint entry field FastPoint button
To enter coordinates
Type the values separated by commas, for example, 2,2,5.
Press Enter to apply the value or Esc to cancel.
You can enter fractions or decimal values (example, 3/8 or .375). The
FastPoint field also accepts formulas, including addition (+), subtrac-
tion (-), multiplication (*), division (/), and parentheses.
TIP: Use algebraic notation when entering formulas. For

example, for a position of X6, Y3, Z0.5, enter
X(2*3)Y(5-2)Z(1/2), or 6,3,.5. The Fastpoint entry method is
consistent with prior versions of Mastercam.
Note: FastPoint mode is modal; when you activate it, you cannot
move outside of the field into any part of the application,
including other AutoCursor buttons, until you press Enter or Esc.
Customizing AutoCursor behavior

You can customize AutoCursor to detect only specific types of posi-
tions, or to snap to a specific angle, and to the nearest, tangent,
perpendicular, horizontal, and vertical positions. You have the
following options for customizing the way AutoCursor behaves when
you use it to select entities in the graphics window.
To configure settings that apply to all selections and remain
in effect until you reconfigure them, use AutoCursor
Settings.
AutoCursor settings
To change behavior for a single position selection, use

AutoCursor Override.
Using AutoCursor Override
You can temporarily modify AutoCursor settings for a single position
selection. To do this, when AutoCursor is active, click the AutoCursor
Override drop-down button in the AutoCursor ribbon bar.
Figure 2-4: AutoCursor Override button
AutoCursor Override
From the list, select the position type you want AutoCursor to snap to
(applies only to the current selection). This feature is particularly
useful when the geometry is crowded or confusing and you need help
identifying a specific entity and position type.
Figure 2-5: AutoCursor Override drop-down list
Using the Relative ribbon bar

When creating a new entity with a Sketcher function, you
can position any new point relative to an existing entity. To
do this, press Shift+click when choosing a position, or
choose Relative from the AutoCursor override list. The
current function ribbon bar or dialog box is suspended and the Rela-
tive ribbon bar displays.
De
lta Figure 2-6: AutoCursor Override Relative ribbon bar
Distance and Angle Length on a selected entity
Note: When you press Enter to apply the specified values, the
2
Relative Position ribbon bar closes. Use the current function’s
ribbon bar or dialog box to select additional positions or modify
the live entity.
Selecting Entities
When creating geometry, you can use several selection methods to
select positions and other entities in the graphics window, including
Clicking with the left mouse button, usually at the prompting
of a function to choose one or more entities
Choosing General Selection ribbon bar options
Chaining (page 102)
Using the General Selection ribbon bar

Use the General Selection ribbon bar to select entities in the graphics
window. This ribbon bar operates in two different modes Standard
Selection and Solid Selection. The availability of either mode is based
on the types of entities that are in the current file and the functions
you choose from Mastercam menus and toolbars.
If you choose a Mastercam function specific to a solid entity, the
General Selection ribbon bar automatically switches to the Solid
Selection mode.
Figure 2-7: General Selection Solid Selection mode
Solid Selection options
If there are no solids in your file, the Solid Selection mode is not avail-
able; you can use only Standard Selection options.
Figure 2-8: General Selection Standard Selection mode
Verify selection toggle

Masking Entity selection
Cancel current selection
Selection method list
Accept current selection
If the General Selection ribbon bar is available for use when no other
function is active, you can select entities prior to choosing a function
by using the cursor or combinations of the cursor and keystrokes,
such as Shift+click. Then choose a function to apply to the selected
entities.
Some functions work in conjunction with the General Selection
ribbon bar. In these functions, the General Selection ribbon bar
becomes active when you are prompted to select entities for the func-
tion.
General Selection methods

From the General Selection ribbon bar, choose one of the following
Selection methods to lock the method in place and disable the others.
Chain Selects/chains entities that are connected to other

entities. For example, clicking one side of a rectangle
selects all four sides and clicking one line that is
connected to another selects both lines.
*Window Select entities by drawing a window around

them.
*Polygon Select entities by drawing a polygon around the

entities. Double–click to complete the polygon.
Single Select individual entities by clicking them with the

mouse.
Area Select multiple nested shapes with a single mouse

click.
Vector Select multiple entities by drawing a vector line

through them. All entities the vector intersects are
selected.
*The Window and Polygon selection methods are controlled by the

choices you make in the Entity selection settings drop-down list.
You will learn more about this in Entity selection settings on page
99.
Window and Single selection are Mastercam’s standard selection
methods; both are active at the same time. When these options are in
effect, you can use the mouse and either a single click or Shift+click to
select one or more entities, or drag a window and select all entities
2
that are completely inside the window.
TIP: You can switch from any selection method to Window by

holding down the Ctrl key and selecting the first window posi-
tion in the graphics window.
When you choose a selection method from the drop-down list, it

remains set until you perform one of the following actions
Click the Standard Selection button in the General
Selection ribbon bar to reset it to the Window
method.
Choose another method from the list.
Hold down the Shift or Alt keys to override the default (see
Tips below for override details.)
TIPS:
• In Standard selection mode, you can switch from the
Window method to Vector selection by holding down the Alt
key.
• To override any selection method and toggle between the
Chain and Area selection methods, hold down the Shift key
when selecting an entity or a position. If you place the
cursor on an entity while holding down the Shift key, the
Chain method is active; otherwise, the Area method is
active.
Entity selection settings

The Entity selection field in the General Selection ribbon bar deter-
mines how the Polygon and Window selection methods choose to
include entities. Before selecting entities with these methods, use this
field to choose one of the following
In / Out Select only entities that lie completely inside or

outside the window.
In + / Out+ Select entities that lie completely inside or

outside and entities that intersect the window.
Intersect Select only entities that intersect the window.
Masking
A selection mask is a defined set of criteria you use to quickly select
entities in the graphics window. Using a selection mask with a
complex part file ensures that you select only and all of the specific
entities you want.
When working with selection masks, you can
Define a selection mask to use once and discard (default).
Make the selection mask active until you turn it off or exit the
Mastercam session.
Save the selection mask criteria to a file (.MASK) that you can
later open and reuse.
Open an existing selection mask file and apply it.
To use a mask for selection, click the All or Only buttons in the
General Selection ribbon bar.
Choosing All opens the Select All dialog box. Use this dialog
box to define and apply a mask that automatically selects all
entities in the current file that match the mask criteria. You
can choose to apply the criteria and select all entities, or only
entities in a specified group, including groups created by
Xform functions.
Choosing Only opens the Select Only dialog box. Use this
dialog box to set restrictions on the entities that are available
for selection in the graphics window. When you apply the
Only mask, you use other General Selection methods to
select only those entities that match the mask criteria you
define. Until you clear the mask, you are restricted from
selecting entities that are excluded from the mask.
Figure 2-9: Masking Select All / Select Only dialog boxes
In the Select All or Select Only (Masking) dialog box, you can open an
existing mask file to apply or choose the mask criteria, including any
combination of entity types, colors, levels, line styles, line widths,
point styles, arc diameter, or line lengths that match a specified value
and filter.
Chaining
Chaining is the process of selecting and linking pieces of geometry so
that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. This
fundamental Mastercam concept has important applications in both
design and machining functions.
When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves
(lines, arcs, and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Chaining
differs from other selection methods because it associates order and
direction to the selected curves. Chaining order and direction affect
the way Mastercam generates surfaces, solids, and toolpaths.
When chaining is required for a selected function, Mastercam
displays the Chaining dialog box. If the current part file contains wire-
frame and solid entities, you can use the buttons at the top of the
dialog box to choose the type of entities you want to chain. Otherwise,
the entity type is pre-selected.
Figure 2-10: Chaining dialog box, selection type buttons
Select wireframe entities

Select solid entities
Figure 2-11: Chaining dialog boxes
Wireframe Solid
Chaining Wireframe Geometry

Chaining wireframe entities is similar to using the standard mode in
General Selection. The entities you select when chaining appear in
the selection color. Use options in the Chaining dialog box to choose:
Geometry plane: You can chain entities only in 3D or the

current construction plane (Cplane). Chaining in 3D allows
the chain to span planes. Cplane chaining is
two-dimensional; all entities must lie in a single plane.
Selection method: Like General Selection, chain selection
methods include chained entities, single entity, window,
polygon, and vector selection. You can also chain a series of
non-adjacent points (useful in spline and surface creation)
and create partial or open chains consisting of all adjacent
entities between a start point and an end point. The Window
and Polygon methods allow you to control whether entities
are selected inside or outside of the selection area.
Use the following functions in the Chaining dialog box to change or
correct chains as you create them.
Last: Reselect the last chain of entities you

created. For example, choose this option when
correcting chains for a surface that did not
generate properly. Mastercam rechains the enti-
ties so that you can edit the chains and correct
chaining direction or order without having to
manually rechain all the entities.
Unselect: Unselect all selected entities.
End Chain: End a chain but remain in the

chaining function.
Reverse: Reverse the chain direction.
Start / End of chain: Use these buttons in the

Start and End fields to move the start or end of
the chain from one entity endpoint to another.
Note You can move the chain Start position only
on open chains. The option to move the chain
End position is available only for open and
partial chains.
Dynamic move start/end of chain: Change the

start or end points dynamically by using the
cursor to move them.
Chaining Solids
In Solids mode, the Chaining dialog box provides options to chain
solid entities. The chain solids buttons act as toggles, allowing you to
include or exclude certain types of solid elements from chain selec-
tion, including
Edge: Select solid edges on a model or exclude them

from selection.
2
Face: Select solid faces on a model or exclude them
from selection.
Loop: (available only when chaining solids for tool-

path creation) Create a closed chain (with no branch
points)—in which you select an edge, a reference
face, a resulting loop, and a start point.
Partial Loop: (available only when chaining solids for

toolpath creation) Create an open chain—in which
you select a starting edge, a reference face, and an
ending edge.
From back: Select solid edges or faces only on the

back of a model. When deactivated, you can select
solid edges or faces only on the front of a model.
Use other options in this dialog box to unselect and re-select solid
chains, reverse chaining direction, and move the start of a chain.
Wireframe Chaining Tips

To quickly select a chain of entities, hold down the Shift key
and click a boundary.
Use Partial chaining to create open chains. Click the first
entity for a chain. Then, click the last entity in the chain.
Intersecting entities cannot be chained unless there is a
break at the intersection, which creates a branch point for the
chain.
If the chain stops unexpectedly, choose Analyze Chain from
the Analyze menu to check for overlapping entities. You can
then use trim functions in the Edit menu to trim adjacent
entities together in order to chain them.
Setting Attributes
All Mastercam entities have basic attributes (physical characteristics).
Based on the entity type, attributes can include:
Color
Point style
Line style and width
Level
Note: You set default attributes in the CAD Settings page of the
System Configuration dialog box and save these settings to a
Mastercam configuration file (from the Mastercam menu, choose
Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings). When you run
Mastercam, attribute settings are loaded, along with other config-
uration parameters, and appear as default values in the Status
bar fields.
Changing physical attributes when you are working with complex

parts is a very powerful technique you will use often to organize your
work. Use the Status bar fields to quickly and easily select new entity
attributes.
Figure 2-12: Status bar
Set attributes Set main level Configure Status bar fields

Status bar help

Setting Attributes for New Entities
Changing Entity Attributes (page 110)
Setting Attributes for New Entities

The attributes you set using the following methods are automatically
applied in the current Mastercam session to the new entities you
create. You can set new entity attributes in several ways.
X To use an existing entity to set color, line, point, and level

attributes:
Press Alt+X on the keyboard and select an entity in the
graphics window. The Status bar color, point style, line style,
and line width fields are changed to the selected entity’s

attributes.
X To set a specific attribute:

1 Choose one or more attribute fields and specify the value.
a Color: Choose Select from the System color

drop-down list and select an entity in the
graphics window. Or, click the current color
2
field to select a color from the Colors dialog box. (For
more information, see Setting/changing color on page
112.)
b Point Style, Line Style and Line
Width: Select new values from
the drop-down lists.
c Level: To set the main level:
Type the level number in the
field.
Click the arrow and choose a
level from the most recently used list.
Click Level to open the Level Manager dialog box and
select an existing level, or create a new level.
(For more information, see Setting the main level on page
113.)
d Attributes: Click to open the Attributes
dialog box where you can specify color,
level, point and line styles, and line width.
Click OK to accept the new attributes and close the dialog
box.
Figure 2-13: Attributes dialog box
TIP: You can also access the Entity Attributes Manager from
the Attributes dialog box to specify attributes by entity type.
X To set attributes for specific entity types (such as points, lines,

arcs, solids, surface, and drafting dimensions):
1 Click the Attributes button in the Status Bar.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity
Attributes Manager) check box, and then click the EA Mgr
button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity
types and set the attributes you want to use in the current
Mastercam session.
Figure 2-14: Entity Attributes Manager dialog box
To open the Color palette dialog box and choose a color,

double–click the color sample.
Note: You can also use the EA Mgr to apply attributes to files you
convert from other programs. Select the option to Include entities
created during File-Open.
4 When all entity attributes are set, click OK to accept them

and return to the Attributes dialog box.
IMPORTANT: If you deselect the EA Mgr check box in the

Attributes dialog box, the Entity Attribute Manager dialog box
settings are not used.
Changing Entity Attributes

Use the following methods to change the attributes of existing enti-
ties.
Note: These methods do not change the values that appear in the
Status bar attributes fields; they apply only to the entities you
select.
X To change attributes using the right–mouse button:

1 (optional) Use general selection methods to select the enti-
ties to change.
2 Right–click the attribute Status bar field you want to change.
TIP: To change multiple attributes, right–click the Status bar

Attributes button.
3 If you selected entities in Step 1, skip to step Step 4. Other-

wise, when prompted to select the entities to change, use
general selection methods to select the entities. Then press
Enter or choose End selection in the General selection
ribbon bar.
4 Based on the attribute you chose in Step 2, use one of the
following dialog boxes to make the necessary changes:
Figure 2-15: Attributes Figure 2-16: Line Style

dialog box dialog box
Figure 2-17: Line Width

dialog box
Figure 2-18: Point Style Figure 2-19: Change

dialog box Level dialog box
5 Click OK to apply the change to the selected entities and

close the attribute dialog box.
X To change the attributes of all of a specific type of entity (such

as all points, or splines):
1 In the Status Bar, click the Attributes button.
2 In the Attributes dialog box, select the EA Mgr (Entity

Attributes Manager) check box, and then click the EA Mgr
button.
3 In the Entity Attributes Manager dialog box, select the entity
types and attributes to use when creating new entities in the
current Mastercam session.
4 To update all of the selected types of entities that exist in the
current file and close the dialog box, click Apply to existing
entities.
Note: To continue to use these attributes for new entities, leave the
EA Mgr check box selected in the Attributes dialog box. To use
different attributes, deselect the check box.
TIP: You can also use Analyze functions to modify entity

attributes and other properties. For more information, see
Analyzing Entities on page 148.
Setting/changing color
Mastercam supports a palette of 256 colors, which you can customize.
You can reduce the palette to 16 colors by choosing the 16 Colors
button in the Colors dialog box, or by deselecting the Show 256
colors check box when setting up system configuration parameters in
Settings, Configuration, Colors.
Use one of the following methods to access the Colors dialog box:
From the Mastercam menu, choose Screen, Geometry
Attributes and select the colors palette button.
Click the System Colors field in the Status bar.
Figure 2-20: Colors dialog box
To select a color:
Type its ID number in the Current color field.
Click the color in the color palette.
Choose the Select button and click an entity in the graphics
window with the color you want to use.
Choose the Customize tab and use the fields to create a
custom color.
Setting the main level
Levels are a primary organizational tool in Mastercam. For example, a
Mastercam file can contain separate levels for wireframe, surfaces,
drafting entities, and toolpaths.
You are always drawing on the main level. The main level is not a fixed
level, it is only the level you choose to work with at any given time. To
help you keep track of the current main level, it appears in the Status
bar Level field which is always visible in the Mastercam window.
Use the Status bar Level fields to set the main level to work with in the
graphics window.
To set the main level:
Type the level number in the Level field.
Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most
recently used list.
Click the Levels button to open the Level Manager dialog box
where you can select an existing level, or create a new level.
Note: For more information on levels, see Working with Levels on

page 150.
Setting Z Depth
Use the Z field in the Status bar to set the Z depth value for the geom-
etry and toolpaths you create. Set the Z depth using one of the
following methods:
Type a value in the field.
Click the drop-down arrow and choose one from the most
recently used list.
Click the Z label and select a position in the graphics window
to use its Z depth value.
Working in 2D and 3D Mode

When creating geometry, use the 2D / 3D Status bar toggle button to
set the drawing mode. The default setting is 3D. Click this button to
switch between drawing modes.
In 2D mode, all geometry is created parallel to the current
Cplane and, unless specified, at the current Z-depth setting.
You can override the Z-depth setting by typing coordinate
values that include a Z-depth value different from the current
Z-depth setting.
In 3D mode, the X, Y, and Z coordinates are all read from
AutoCursor when sketching dynamically. The Z-depth setting
in the Status Bar is not used. When working in a 3D environ-
ment, you can create entities whose points lie in different
planes, or create entities (such as arcs or 2D splines) in
planes other than the predefined planes.
In both modes, use AutoCursor or the selected function ribbon bar or
dialog box fields to enter coordinate values. There are some excep-
tions to this that apply to specific entity types.
IMPORTANT: The 2D / 3D setting has no effect on analyze

and toolpath functions.
The following functions always provide 3D solutions, regardless of the

Status bar 2D / 3D setting:
Fillets and chamfers Surfaces and solids
Convert to NURBS Close Arc
Control Points NURBS
Xform: Translate, Translate 3D,

Simplify
2
Mirror, Rotate, Rectangular Array, Scale
Notes:
• In 3D mode, if you choose to bisect two lines that are not in the
same plane or are not parallel to the current Cplane, a message
informs you that a 3D solution does not exist and asks you to
specify the Z-depth to use for the 2D solution.
• When editing entities using the Trim or Break functions, all
solutions are calculated based on the current Cplane setting. If
the entities cannot intersect in the current Cplane through a
2D projection, they cannot be modified using these functions.
TIP: Overlooking the current Cplane and Z depth is a common

source of error, which can cause you to create the geometry in
unintended orientations. To avoid this mistake, set the graphics
view (Gview) to the same setting as the Cplane or to Isometric.
Changing the Graphics Window Display

The View menu and toolbar provide several functions and methods
you can use to change the appearance of the geometry and toolpaths
in the graphics window. In addition to the functions listed below, this
section includes information on using zoom and unzoom techniques,
and setting up multiple viewports in the graphics window.
Fit geometry to screen: Maximizes your view of visible

geometry in the graphics window. This function positions
and sizes the displayed geometry to fill as much of the
graphics window as possible.
Pan: Imagine the graphics window as a camera lens

through which you view geometry. Using the keyboard
arrow keys, move the “lens” left or right, or up and down
over the geometry. Or, if you have set the Middle Button /
Wheel use field to Pan in the Settings, Configuration,
Screen properties page, press and hold the mouse wheel
to drag the image in any direction.
Set screen center: Repositions the center of the graphics

window, based on the new center point you specify.
Repaint screen: Refreshes the graphics window to restore

images that appear incomplete or distorted. This may
occur as the result of frequent changes to entities, particu-
larly where they overlap. The quality and stability of
images in the graphics window is influenced by the
graphic capabilities of your PC, and the amount of avail-
able memory.
Note: If Repaint does not completely restore the

graphics window, use the Screen, Regenerate
Display List function to rebuild the display list.
Regenerate screen: Rebuilds the display list at the current

screen scale. Regenerating the display list may also
improve display speed and performance.
Zooming
Mastercam also offers a number of zoom functions, including:
Zoom window: Magnifies a portion of the graphics

window. Click an area of the graphics window that is not
directly on an entity to anchor the first window point.
Then draw a rectangular window by moving the mouse
around the entities you want to zoom. Click to set the final
position and fill the graphics window with the contents of
the selection window.
Note: To improve your view of the selection area when

using this method, after selecting the first window
point, use the Pan, Zoom target, or Fit to screen
function before selecting the second point.
Zoom target: Expands a specific area defined by two

selected points. The first position you select indicates the
center of the target area. As you move the cursor to select
the second position, you draw and drag a rectangular area
that defines the target boundary. When you select the
second position, everything in the target area expands to
fill the graphics window, centered around the first point
you specified.
2
Unzoom: Reduces the size of the displayed geometry to
50% of its original size. You can reduce the display size of
geometry a maximum number of eight times using this
function.
Zoom in/out: Dynamically zooms in or out from a selected

point. First, select a focal point in the graphics window.
Then use one of the following techniques to zoom:
Slide the mouse forwards and backwards
Spin the mouse wheel in either direction
Consecutively press the Page Up and Page Down
keys
Zoom selected: Works only with pre-selected entities.

Automatically scales the entities you select to fit the
graphics window.
TIP: You can use the mouse wheel or middle button any time—
without selecting a function—to dynamically spin or pan the
contents of the graphics window. You set the spin or pan
behavior using the Settings, Configuration, Screen properties
page and Middle Button/Wheel use field.
Setting Viewports
A viewport is an area within the graphics window that displays a
particular graphics view of the geometry you are working with. A
viewport configuration is an arrangement of one or more (up to four)
viewports. By default, Mastercam displays geometry from the top
view in a single viewport that occupies the entire graphics window.
To divide the graphics window into multiple viewports, or panes, each
capable of displaying a different graphics view, choose an option from
the View, Viewports menu.
Mastercam offers four viewport configurations. The following graphic

shows the default views assigned to each viewport configuration.
VP1 VP1 VP2

VP1 VP1 VP2
VP2 VP3 VP4
VP1 = Top view VP2 = Isometric view
VP3 = Front view VP4 = Right side view
X To change the view that appears in a viewport:

1 Use the cursor to select the pane, then use one of the
following methods to choose a different view:
Choose View, Standard Views. Then select a standard
graphics view from the drop-down list.
Choose View, Orient, Named Views. In the Views Selec-
tion dialog box, select a named view from the list of stan-
dard and custom defined views.
From the Status Bar, click Gview and select the view from
the list.
2 In the active pane of a multi-viewport configuration, move
the mouse over the axes coordinate display until the cursor
changes to an arrow. Click the axes marker to enlarge the
viewport and make it the only visible viewport.
TIP: To change the size of the viewport panes, grab and drag
the vertical or horizontal inside edge.
Setting Planes / Views / WCS

The Work Coordinate System (WCS) is the active coordinate system in
use by Mastercam at any given time. It contains the orientation of the
X-Y-Z axes plus the location of the zero point (the origin). Manipu-
lating the WCS, and setting planes and views to simplify the creation
of geometry, solids, and toolpaths are essential Mastercam skills you
will use often. In this section, you will learn about:
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths (page 126)
Lathe Coordinate Systems (page 128)
TIP: Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and
WCS selections for each machine group, and restores them
whenever you activate the machine group. For example, if one
machine group has toolpaths on the front of the part, and
another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the part,
whenever you activate either machine group, Mastercam will
automatically activate whichever views and planes you were
using the last time the group was active.
2
Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems
Mastercam uses a 3D Cartesian coordinate system to locate your work
in three-dimensional space. The positions of geometry and toolpaths
are expressed in terms of three coordinate axes: X, Y, and Z. Each axis
is signed to indicate a positive (+) and a negative (-) direction.
+Z
+Y
-X +X
-Y -Z
Machining jobs often require you to work with coordinate locations in

sophisticated ways. Mastercam includes several useful tools you can
use to transform, overlay, slice, and otherwise manipulate the coordi-
nate system so that you can draw and machine a part any way you
choose.
To apply coordinate systems in Mastercam, you use functions to set
specific views. A view consists of two main parts:
A plane, or slice through the coordinate system
An origin, or zero point
You can use views as graphics views (Gviews) to view the part, as
construction planes (Cplanes) to orient geometry, and as tool planes
(Tplanes) to orient toolpaths.
Gviews define the perspective from which you view the part
in the graphics window.
Cplanes represent the planes in which you create new geom-
etry.
Tplanes are the cutting planes for the toolpaths you define.
Standard and custom views have assigned names, are saved with the
part information (making them portable), and can be selected as you
work with the part to change its orientation in 3D space.
TIPS: Use the following mouse and keyboard methods to

quickly change the Gview:
• To zoom in and out, spin the mouse wheel forward and
backwards.
• To dynamically rotate the image, hold down the Alt key and
press down on the mouse wheel to grab it. Continue to
press down while moving the mouse to spin it.
• To move the image around, use the up, down, left, and right
keyboard arrow keys.
• To spin the image, hold down the Alt key and use the up,
down, left, and right arrow keys.
Standard Views
Every Mastercam part includes standard views that correspond to the
six faces of a cube (Top, Front, Back, Right, Left, Bottom) plus an
Isometric view. Standard views are available in all Mastercam files.
Their names and coordinates cannot be modified.
Figure 2-21: Standard Views
The Status bar Gview, Planes, and WCS menus provide options you
use to select standard views, create custom views, and set the Gview,
Tplane / Cplane, and WCS.
Use options in the Gview menu to orient the graphics view
and control the perspective from which you view the part.
You can also use options in the Mastercam View menu to
modify the graphics window display.
To draw geometry or create toolpaths on a specific plane, use

options in the Planes menu options to change the construc-
tion plane and tool plane. The options in this menu set both
the construction plane and the tool plane at the same time.
Each function in this menu lets you set both the planar orien-
tation and the origin.
TIP: To set the Cplane and Tplane independently, you must

use the Status bar setup option (!) to add a Cplane and Tplane
2
pane to the Status bar. In the Customize status bar dialog box,
use the right–click menu to insert the Tplane and Cplane fields.
After saving the changes, use the Tplane and Cplane Status bar
menus to set each plane to a specific orientation.
The WCS menu options allow you to align the work coordi-
nate system with a specific view. You can select a standard
view, access the list of saved views, or create a new view
based on part geometry or by manipulating the current view.
Because Mastercam breaks views and planes into separate functions,
you can maintain the plane selections for each function indepen-
dently. For example, you can be looking at the part in an isometric
view (Gview = Isometric) while drawing geometry on the front of the
part (Cplane = Front).
Note: For simple 2D geometry, the Top Tplane / Cplane (default)

corresponds to the standard XY plane .
Using the Gview / Planes / WCS Status bar Menu Options

Many of the same options are available from the Status bar Gview,
Planes and WCS menu. Use these options in a similar manner to set
the specified plane.
Figure 2-22: Gview / Planes / WCS Status bar menus
Gview Planes WCS

If you configure the Status bar to include separate Cplane and Tplane
panes, these menus also share many common fields.
Figure 2-23: Cplane and Tplane Status bar menus
Cplane Tplane
To help you become familiar with using view, planes, and WCS Status
bar menu options, descriptions and tips for each option are provided
below.
Standard views: Select Top, Front, Back, Right, Left,
Bottom, or Isometric to quickly set a standard plane. When
selecting a standard view from the Gview or Planes menus,
the plane you set is relative to the current WCS (this is why
(WCS) is part of the standard view name in these menus).
Standard planes line up with a cube which has been shifted
so that it is parallel to the WCS axes.
TIP: To reset the Gview or Cplane / Tplane to the default Top

system view, regardless of the WCS setting, select Named then
choose Top from the View Selection dialog box.
Named: Orients the selected plane with a view you select

from the View Selection dialog box. This dialog box displays
all the views that have been saved with the part, including
standard and custom views.
Geometry: Aligns the selected plane with geometry that you

select from the graphics window. For example, if you select a
face of the part, the plane is oriented as if you are looking
straight down on a line normal to the part face. When you
choose this option, you must select an arc, two lines, or three
points to define the plane.
Solid face: Similar to the Geometry option, but aligns the
plane to a selected solid face.
Rotate: Creates a new view by rotating the current view
about any or all of the axes by a specified number of degrees.
Dynamic: (Gview only) Creates a new view by rotating the
view perspective as you drag the mouse.
Last: Sets the plane equal to whatever it was oriented to
before the current selection.
Normal: Creates a new view using a selected line that is
normal to the desired plane. You must also select the orienta-
tion of the coordinate system relative to the normal line.
= Gview: Sets the selected plane with the same view as the
current Gview.
=Tplane, =Cplane: Aligns the selected plane with the same
view as the current Tplane or Cplane.
= WCS: (Planes only) Sets the Tplane and Cplane equal to
the same view as the current WCS.
Always = WCS: (Planes only) Links the Tplane and Cplane
to the WCS so that if you change the WCS, it will also update
the Tplane and Cplane. Selecting this option disables the
other options in the menu.
Origin: Displays the origin of the selected view / plane and, if
enabled, allows you to click and change it. Using this method
to change the origin automatically creates a new view that
you can name and save to the view catalog. You can also use
the View Manager to change the origin of an existing view
and update the origin of all planes that are linked to the view,
including the WCS.
Saved as: Indicates whether the new view has been saved
and displays its name.
Save: (Gview only) If the current view has not been saved, use
this option to open the New View dialog box where you can
set parameters and save the custom view. (If the current view
has not been saved, Mastercam displays Gview: Not Saved in
the graphics window.)
Setting the Tplane Different from the Cplane

You can set the tool plane and construction plane to the same view at
the same time using the Planes function on the Status bar. However,
some applications may require you to set these planes independently.
Use one of the following methods to accomplish this:
From the Status bar, choose WCS, View Manager. Use the
View Manager dialog box to select different views for each
plane. Use other dialog box options to customize the origin
2
and assign work offsets.
Figure 2-24: View Manager dialog box
When creating a toolpath, choose the Planes button in the

Toolpath parameters tab. Then use the Toolpath Coordinate
System dialog box to select the different views.
Figure 2-25: Toolpath Coordinate System dialog box
Note: Using this method affects only the current toolpath.
Choose the Status bar configure option (!) and use the right–
click menu to insert separate Cplane and Tplane panes into
the Status bar. Then use the Status bar Cplane and Tplane
menu functions to set the planes independently.
Using WCS and Tplanes to Set Up Toolpaths

In this section, you will review common machining situations and
examples of how you might use WCS and Tplanes to set up specific
jobs. While the details of your specific machining problems are
unique, reviewing this information can help you determine when to
create a new WCS and when to use Tplanes.
General Guidelines
Program moves that the machine can accomplish in one
setup with one WCS. If you have to manually change the part
orientation in the machine, use a different WCS.
For most common milling applications on a 3-axis knee mill

or VMC, leave the WCS aligned to the Top view and use the
Top tool plane for your work.
If you have a rotary axis, do the following:
If the fixture rotates continuously while cutting the part,
leave the WCS and Tplane alone, and use the Rotary
options from the Toolpath parameters tab.
If the fixture must rotate to a fixed position before the
2
toolpath starts to machine a regular 2D or 3D toolpath, set
the Tplane to the desired plane before creating the tool-
path.
For 5-axis machines and multi-axis toolpaths, use tool
planes to work on the various faces.
Horizontal Machining Center / Tombstoning
If you are machining a block on the B axis of an HMC, as you work
your way around the block for each toolpath, set the Tplane equal to
the Front, Right, Back and Left views accordingly, with respect to the
WCS. You do not need to change the WCS when using a horizontal
rather than vertical machine; the axis orientations in the machine
definition describe this for Mastercam.
Moving the Coordinate System to the Part (Machining Flat)

In this example, a part must be machined lying flat on the table, but
the drawing in the Mastercam file is oriented in a non-standard plane.
For some reason, you cannot rotate, transform, or move the geometry
in the file.
To address this situation, create a new view aligned with the part
geometry. Choose WCS from the Status bar menu, select Geometry,
and select either two lines from the contour or one of the arcs. Use the
New View dialog box to assign a name, locate the origin at a suitable
point, and, optionally, assign a work offset for the view. Click OK to
save the new view.
Select the new view for the WCS, and then align the Tplane and
Cplane to it. Choose Planes from the Status bar, then Top (WCS).
Create a 2D toolpath as usual. When you post the part, 2D tool motion
commands are dimensioned from the part origin, as if the part is lying
flat.
Machining Two Parts on Different Fixtures

In this example, you must create operations to machine two different
parts. Each part is mounted on a different fixture on the table.
In this situation, assign a different work offset to each fixture. Then,

when you create the toolpaths for each part, include the offset
number in each toolpath. By basing each toolpath on an offset
number instead of a coordinate position, you can run the job without
worrying about how the fixtures are positioned on the table. Before
running the job, the operator needs only to touch off the parts prop-
erly to set each offset position in the control.
To accomplish this in Mastercam, choose View Manager from the
WCS Status bar menu and use the View Manager dialog box to create
a new view for each fixture. To create each view, click on the Top view,
and choose Copy. Then type a name for the new view and enter the
offset for the fixture. To define an origin for the view, in the Origin
section, choose Select and pick a point on the fixture as shown in the
above picture.
Before creating operations for each part, choose Named from the
Planes Status bar menu, and select the view you created for the
fixture. When you post the operations, Mastercam automatically
outputs the correct offset codes and creates tool positions relative to
the origin specified for each fixture.
Lathe Coordinate Systems

Traditional lathe applications use a very different coordinate system
from milling applications. Instead of a 3D, XYZ space, a typical lathe
coordinate system is 2D with the tool axis perpendicular to the

spindle (Z axis) instead of parallel to it.
Lathe 2D, XY Mill 3D, XYZ
+Z
+X
2
+Y
-Z +Z
-X +X
-X
-Y -Z
Mastercam includes a number of functions you use to create lathe

parts and toolpaths for different types of lathes. These tools include
machine definitions, Cplanes, and the WCS. In the following sections
you will learn techniques for working with lathe coordinates.
Lathe Tool and Machine Definitions

Tool and machine definitions provide important information that
allows Mastercam to interpret the lathe coordinates.
The machine definition describes where the spindle and tool
turrets are mounted, and the direction and orientation of
each of the machine axes, including the angle of a slant-bed
lathe. For sophisticated multi-turret and multi-spindle
lathes, where individual axes can exist on several compo-
nents, you can set up axis combinations that link the axes of
specific components together.
The tool definition specifies the turret/spindle where the tool
is mounted, its orientation, and mounting direction. When
you select a tool (and axis combination, if applicable) for an
operation, the turret, spindle, and tool orientation are read
from the tool definition.
For the most part, axis orientation information from the machine
definition is not used by the Mastercam interface; it is read by the post
processor. You use standard views and planes to work with part
geometry. When you post operations to create the NC code, the post
processor reads machine-specific axes information from the machine
definition.
Rotating Lathe Tool Axes

Mastercam supports “B-axis” lathes where the tool is mounted on a
rotary axis (typically B) similar to a mill. The rotary axis can be swiv-
eled to change the angle at which the tool is used. The tool can also be
rotated about its long axis to a specific orientation; this allows you to
use the same tool on both the main and sub-spindles.
To generate the proper rotational output, rather than change the

Tplane as you might with a mill, for a lathe toolpath, enter the tool
angle by clicking the Tool Angle button in the Toolpath parameters
tab.
Note: This option is available only if the appropriate rotary axes

have been defined in the active machine definition.
Use the Tool Angle dialog box to enter the angle of the tool. You can
enter the angle directly in the field, or select a line parallel to the Feed
Direction or Plunge Direction by clicking the appropriate button.
Then, enter the rotation angle of the tool about its axis. You can select
0 or 180, or choose Other and type the desired angle in the field.
TIP: You can also store a tool angle in the tool definition. Typi-
cally, this is done to support lathes without a B-axis, to create
tools that are at an angle to the primary axes. For lathes with
true B-axis capability, you enter a tool angle of 0 in the tool
definition so that the tool is parallel to the axis for compatibility
with a tool changer. Then use the Tool Angle dialog box to set
the desired tool angle for each operation.
IMPORTANT: The angle entered in the Tool Angle dialog box

is measured relative to any tool angle stored in the tool defini-
tion; it does not simply replace or overwrite it.
Lathe Cplanes
Mastercam provides special lathe construction planes that allow you
work in familiar lathe coordinates. For conventional 2D turning appli-
cations, use the Status bar Planes menu to select the coordinate
system. Select Lathe Radius or Lathe Diameter coordinates, then
specify the desired X and Z directions.
This sets the Cplane and Tplane; there is no need to change the WCS.
For conventional 2D turning applications, you can leave the WCS as
the system Top view.
Vertical Turret Lathes

Mastercam includes a special system-defined view which transforms
the lathe coordinate system for a vertical turret lathe. From the Status
bar, choose WCS, View Manager. Then select LATHE Z = WORLD Z.
Click the WCS icon to align the work coordinate system with this view
2
and choose OK. This maps the lathe Z axis so that it is vertical. You
can now choose a diameter or radius coordinate system from the
Planes menu. When you work with the part in the graphics window, it
is oriented vertically, as it will be on the machine.
Note: In prior versions of Mastercam Lathe, when you generated a

lathe turning toolpath, Mastercam automatically wrote the coor-
dinates to the NCI file in terms of a typical lathe coordinate
system. Instead of using the standard X-Y-Z axes like Mastercam
Mill, the coordinates in the NCI file were written using standard
lathe axes.
This is no longer true. In Mastercam Lathe, you can still work in

familiar lathe coordinate systems (either radius or diameter) by
selecting them from the Planes menu on the status bar:
However, if you are a post writer and familiar with creating posts
for earlier versions of Mastercam Lathe, your post processors may
now need to perform this initial coordinate transformation rather
than just reading it from the NCI file.
For more information on MP post processors or detailed informa-

tion about the NCI file, see the MP Post Processor Reference
Guide, available on CD from your Mastercam reseller.
Editing Your Work

Functions in the Edit menu allow you to undo / redo and delete /
undelete actions you perform when working with CAD functions. You
will use these functions often, particularly when you are learning to
use Mastercam.
Undo / Redo
You can undo and redo one or more sequential
events that occur while working with the current file
and design functions.
An event is defined as a function-based operation. There is no differ-
ence between creating a single line or using an Xform function that
creates 100 lines. Each is a single event.
Notes:
• Each time you open a part file or create a new file, the list of
undo / redo events is cleared from memory. However, saving or
merging the current file does not clear this list.
• Due to the complex and associative nature of creating and
modifying toolpaths and solids, you cannot undo or redo tool-
path- and solid-related functions.
The events you can undo and redo are limited to Mastercam CAD
functions, including those you use to create or edit geometry, drafting
entities, file annotations, and entity attributes.
The following CAD functions are not saved as events:
Editing live entities. However, fixing the entity by exiting the
function is saved as an event. If you undo this type of event,
you delete the entity.
Delete / undelete
Blank / unblank
Hide / unhide
Setting system attributes (color, level, point and lines styles)
Status bar functions (Gview, Cplane, Tplane, WCS, Z depth,
Levels, Groups, 2D / 3D construction)
Zooming or panning images in the graphics window
Delete / Undelete
The delete and undelete functions in the Edit , Delete submenu allow
you to permanently remove or restore one or more selected entities
from the graphics window and from the part file. You can also use the
Delete Duplicates (simple) and Delete Duplicates - Advanced func-
tions to find and automatically delete duplicate entities in the current
file. 2
Undeleting Entities
Use the Undelete functions to restore one or more deleted entities to
the current file. You can undelete only the entities you deleted while
working with the current file. For example, if you delete entities from
File 1, you can “undelete” them only until you open File 2.
TIP: To recover the entities you delete in error, you can also
use the Undo function.
Creating Geometry
This section introduces the functions you use to create a broad range
of geometric entities. You will learn to create geometry and work with
essential Mastercam CAD functions, including:
Using the Sketcher Toolbar on page 134
Editing “Live” Entities on page 135
Creating Points on page 136
Creating Lines on page 137
Creating Arcs and Circles on page 137
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes on page 138
Creating Fillets and Chamfers on page 140
Creating Splines on page 141
Creating Primitives on page 142
Using the Sketcher Toolbar

Sketcher is the suite of Mastercam functions you use to dynamically
create basic geometry by moving the mouse and clicking in the
graphics window. Basic geometry includes points, lines, arcs, miscel-
laneous shapes (such as ellipse, polygon, helix, letters), fillets, cham-
fers, splines, and primitive surfaces and solids.
The Sketcher toolbar groups the Sketcher functions in drop-down
lists, organized by each entity type.
Figure 2-26: Sketcher toolbar
es
s
ap
er
sh
mf
ric
ha
es
et
s /c
i ti v
es
ts
om
es
lin
l et
cs
m
in
Lin
Ge
Sp
Pri
Po
Ar
Fil
TIP: Other toolbars, such as the Solids and Surfaces toolbars,

offer additional functions for geometry creation. You can
access all of these functions and more from the Create menu.
DESIGN / Creating Geometry • 135
Sketching basic geometry in either 2D or 3D mode is free-form, fast,

and easy. Simply select a Sketcher function from the drop-down list,
and then use the mouse to click in the graphics window and create
the entity. For many Sketcher functions, you also use the function
ribbon bar or dialog box options to define or edit the live entity. If you
prefer keyboarding, you can use shortcut keys to access most ribbon
bar options.
2
Notes:
• For many types of geometry creation, you use the AutoCursor in
conjunction with the selected Sketcher function to create and
edit entities. For more information, see Using the AutoCursor
Ribbon Bar on page 92.
• You can customize the Sketcher toolbar by adding or removing
functions. For more information, see Customizing Toolbar
Functions on page 45.
• Sketcher functions do not include drafting, transform, modify,
surfaces, or solids (with the exception of primitives).
Editing “Live” Entities

Mastercam provides flexible options for editing basic entities. When
you first create an entity, it is considered live and can be edited within
the ribbon bar or dialog box function you used to create it. The live
color is light blue by default, although you can customize it. Once the
entity becomes fixed, you must use other functions to edit it.
Note: For more information, see Editing Entities on page 144.

Creating Points
You access the point functions from the Sketcher toolbar point drop-
down list, or from the Create, Point submenu.
Figure 2-27: Sketcher Points drop-down list
Create point position: Sketch individual points by using

the mouse to click and create point positions in the
graphics window.
Create point dynamic: Create one or more points

anywhere along an existing entity.
Create point node pts: Create points at the node points of

existing splines.
Create point segment: Create multiple, uniform points

along an existing entity.
Create point endpoints: Automatically create point enti-

ties at the endpoints of all visible lines, arcs, and splines.
Create point small arcs: Create points at the exact center

of arcs and/or circles.
TIP: To exit a function:

• Click OK
• Press the Enter key
• Press the Esc key
• Choose another function
Creating Lines
Mastercam offers a variety of flexible functions you use to quickly
create lines.
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Line
drop-down list, or from the Create, Line submenu.
Figure 2-28: Sketcher Line drop-down list 2
Create line endpoint: Create a variety of different line types

with two endpoints, including angular, polar, horizontal,
vertical, multiple lines connected at their endpoints, and
lines tangent to arcs and splines.
Create line closest: Create a line between two entities at

the position at which they are closest.
Create line bisect: Create a line between two line entities

(bisecting for intersecting lines, midline for parallel lines).
Create line perpendicular: Create a line perpendicular to

selected entities.
Create line parallel: Create a line parallel to an existing line

by selecting a line and clicking a point in the graphics
window.
Creating Arcs and Circles

When creating arcs and circles, you can choose from a variety of time-
saving functions.
IMPORTANT: Mastercam calculates circles in a counterclock-

wise direction.
Choose a function from the Sketcher toolbar Arc drop-down list, or

from the Create, Arc submenu.
Figure 2-29: Sketcher Arcs drop-down list
Figure 2-30:
Create circle center point: Create full circles from a center

point.
Create arc polar: Create polar arcs by clicking in the

graphics window to set a center point. Then click to set two
edge points that define the radius, start point, and end
angle.
Create circle edge point: Create circles with two or three

edge points.
Create arc endpoints: Create arcs with defined endpoints

and one edge point.
Create arc 3 points: Create three point arcs by clicking in

the graphics window to set each of the three edge points.
Create arc polar endpoints: Create polar arcs from either

a defined start or end point.
Create arc tangent: Create arcs with tangent conditions,

including tangent to another entity, tangent through a
point, tangent with a centerline, or dynamically tangent
(dynamically draws the arc with your cursor movement).
Creating Miscellaneous Shapes

The Create menu offers a number of functions you use to create
complete geometric shapes. Mastercam generates all the entities in
the shape collectively; you do not have to draw the individual entities.
To choose a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Miscella-

neous Geometry drop-down list, or from the Create menu.
Figure 2-31: Sketcher Miscellaneous Geometry drop-down list
Create rectangle: Create a rectangle by defining two

points.
Create rectangular shapes: Create a rectangular shape

(rectangle, obround, single D, or double D) by choosing
one from the Shape section in the expanded dialog box.
Create polygon: Create a polygon as wireframe geometry

and, optionally, a surface.
Create ellipse: Create an ellipse as wireframe geometry

and, optionally, a surface.
Bounding box: Check the overall dimensions of a part by

creating a rectangular or cylindrical boundary around
selected entities. You can create the boundary as wire-
frame geometry, a solid model, or a stock model.
Letters: Add alphanumeric characters consisting of lines,

arcs, and NURBS splines to your file.
Create spiral: Create spiral geometry as a series of NURBS

splines.
Create helix: Create a tapered spiral as a continuous

NURBS spline.
Solid to 2D Profile: Available only with Mastercam Solids.

Extract 2D geometry from a 3D solid in order to create the
necessary toolpaths.
Create Relief Groove: Create DIN standard thread or plain

shaft relief grooves.
Creating Fillets and Chamfers

Creating fillets and chamfers in entities or chains is fast and efficient
in Mastercam.
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Fillets and
Chamfers drop-down list, or from the Create, Fillet and Create,
Chamfer submenus.
Note: AutoCursor is unavailable during the use of fillet and

chamfer functions.
Figure 2-32: Sketcher Fillets and Chamfers drop-down list
Fillet entities: Apply fillets to selected entities using a

specified fillet style (normal, inverse, circle, clearance) and
radius.
Fillet chains: Fillet entities that have sharp corners and

can be recognized as a single chained entity (for example,
rectangles and polygons).
Chamfer entities: Apply chamfers to selected entities

using a specified chamfer method, distance, and angle.
Chamfer chains: Chain entities and create chamfers at

sharp corners.
IMPORTANT: For each fillet / chamfer function, you define

whether to trim the filleted / chamfered entities by selecting the
Trim or No Trim options in the function ribbon bar.
Creating Splines
Mastercam provides a number of functions that define the method
2
used to create a spline. Their corresponding ribbon bars allow you to
further define the resulting geometry.
Choose the function from the Sketcher toolbar Splines drop-down
menu, or from the Create, Spline submenu.
Figure 2-33: Sketcher Splines drop-down list
Manual spline: Manually create a spline by clicking in the

graphics window to define each of the spline control
points.
Automatic spline: Create a spline from a string of points

(three or more) that lie in a defined pattern.
Curves spline: Create one or more splines based on the

geometry of existing curves. After chaining the curves you
want to work with, a separate spline is created for each
selected chain.
Blend spline: Create a spline tangent to two curves.

TIP: When a spline is live, use the ribbon bar fields to edit it.
Notes:
• To set the default spline type (Parametric, NURBS, curve-
generated) choose Settings, Configuration, CAD Settings,
and select a Spline / Surface creation type.
• You use the AutoCursor to specify point positions only with the
Manual spline function.
Using the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar

Use this ribbon bar to set endpoint tangencies when creating splines
with the Manual Spline or Automatic Spline functions.
IMPORTANT: To use the Spline End Conditions ribbon bar to

set the spline endpoint tangencies, before creating a spline,
choose the Edit End Condition button in the function ribbon
bar.
The Spline End Conditions ribbon bar appears after you

finish defining the spline only if you choose the Edit End
Condition option in the function ribbon bar before you
create the spline.
Figure 2-34: Spline end conditions ribbon bar
r
r
to
cto
d
d
ho
ec
le
ho
e
le
et
yv
yv
ng
et
ng
tm
ta
nc
nc
tm
ta
in
in
ge
ge
oin
oin
po
po
an
an
dp
dp
art
art
pt
pt
En
En
St
St
F li
Fli
Use the Start Point and End Point fields to define the tangent vector
of the spline’s endpoints.
Creating Primitives
Mastercam makes it easy to create primitive surfaces by sketching in
3D, by entering values, or by using a combination of these techniques.
If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, you can optionally
create solid primitives.
To access a function, select it from the Sketcher toolbar Primitives

drop-down list, or from the Create, Primitives submenu.
Figure 2-35: Sketcher Primitives drop-down list
After creating the selected primitive shape as a surface or solid model,

use the dialog box fields to set or modify its dimensions, extensions,
base point, primary axis, radius, or sweep.
Guidelines for Working with Primitives

To create multiple copies of a primitive, lock the ribbon bar
fields. To lock a field, click the button next to it. The field
turns red when locked, and the value remains constant until
you change it. Mastercam stores the most recently used
values entered in locked fields. Click the drop-down arrow to
select previously used values.
To view all available options for creating the primi-
tive, choose the dialog box Expand button. By
default, the dialog box appears in a contracted
format.
Setting the start angle to 0 and the end angle to 360 creates a
fully revolved primitive. Varying the start and end angles
creates one or more quadrants of the primitive. For example,
entering a start angle of 90 and an end angle of 180 creates
one quarter of the cylinder.
You can use the mouse to set the height of three-dimensional
primitives provided that the Mastercam window is set to an
Isometric Gview or a similar view.
After creating a solid primitive, use the Solids Manager to
change its name.
Modifying Geometry
Mastercam offers a variety of functions and techniques you use to
modify geometry. In this section, you will learn about:
Editing Entities
Transforming Entities on page 146
Analyzing Entities on page 148
Editing Entities
You access basic editing functions from the Edit menu or Trim / Break
toolbar in order to:
Modify or join lines, arcs, splines, and drafting entities.
Convert certain types of entities to NURBS splines and
NURBS surfaces.
Simplify splines by breaking them into arcs and lines.
This topic introduces these functions and includes examples of how
to use them.
TIP: To trim a surface, choose one of the Trim Surface func-

tions from the Create, Surface submenu.
Trim / Break submenu

From the Edit menu, the Trim / Break submenu provides various
functions you use to trim entities. These functions trim entities by
cutting them back or extending them at their intersections.
Note: Splines are not extended beyond their original endpoints.
IMPORTANT: If the 2D / 3D Status Bar toggle is set to 2D, the

entities you choose to trim or break must lie in the same
Cplane. If the intersection between two entities offers variable
solutions, be sure to select each entity on the part you want to
keep. When trimming or breaking entities in 3D, the curves
must have an actual intersection, otherwise a message informs
you that the entities do not intersect and cannot be modified.
DESIGN / Modifying Geometry • 145
Trim / Break / Extend:

Trim 1, 2 or 3 selected entities.
Trim to a selected point or position.
Trim, break, or extend an entity to a specified length.
Divide entities, based on the nearest intersection. 2
Break and automatically extend selected entities
Trim Many: Trim (or break) multiple lines, arcs, or splines
to a selected entity without modifying the trimming
curve.
Break at Intersection: Select one or more intersecting

line, arc, or spline entities and break them at each inter-
section.
Break Many Pieces: Break selected lines, arcs, and splines

into uniform segments based on the specified number of
segments or the distance between them (segment length).
Break Drafting into Lines: Break selected drafting entities

into geometric entities in a manner similar to the Break
Many Pieces function.
Break Circles: Break circles into any number of equal

length segments you specify.
In addition to the trim / break /extend functions, the Edit menu also
includes the following functions you use to join and modify entities.
Join entities: Join collinear lines, or arcs that have the

same center and radius, or splines that were originally
created as the same entity.
Close arc: Select and convert all arcs that are less than 360
degrees to complete circles by extending their ends to
close the arc.
Convert NURBS: Convert lines, arcs, and parametric

splines to NURBS splines, and convert curve-generated
and parametric surfaces to NURBS surfaces.
Modify NURBS: Change the shape of the NURBS entity by

modifying control point positions on a NURBS spline or
surface.
Simplify: Create arcs based on the geometry of circular-

shaped splines by converting them to arcs.
Transforming Entities
Transforming entities is similar to editing, but offers more advanced
functions for manipulating fixed entities. In a single operation, you
can move selected entities and optionally create copies of them by
mirroring, rotating, scaling, offsetting, translating, stretching, rolling,
and dragging. With some transform functions, you can also join the
copied entities to the originals to quickly and easily create more
complex geometry.
When transforming entities, you can preview and modify the results
before accepting them. Previewing lets you view a detailed live image
of the move, copy, or join results set in the graphics window, placed in
the position you choose in the function dialog box or ribbon bar. To
conserve resources when transforming, scaling, mirroring, or rotating
larger models (for example, those containing multiple solids and
surfaces or a large number of entities), instead of detailed entities, the
preview image is a 3D cube or a 2D rectangle sized in proportion to
the results set area.
You access transform functions from the Xform menu or toolbar.
Xform Translate: Move, copy or join entities within the

same view (plane) without altering their orientation, size,
or shape.
Xform Translate 3D: Move or create copies of selected

entities between views (from one plane to another)
without altering their orientation, size, or shape.
Xform Mirror: Create symmetrical mirror images of

geometric and drafting entities on a selected axis.
Xform Rotate: Move, copy, or join selected geometric and

drafting entities around a center point by translating or
rotating them by a specified angle. Translating rotates the
transformed entities without changing the axis orienta-
tion. Rotating transformed entities changes the axis orien-
tation.
Xform Scale: Increase or decrease the size of entities by a

factor or percentage relative to a defined point, using
either a uniform or XYZ scale method.
Xform Offset: Offset one entity at a time. You can move or

copy a single entity parallel to the original; displacing it by
a defined distance and direction.
Xform Offset Contour: Move or copy one or more chained

entities; displacing them by a defined distance and direc-
tion, and, optionally, a depth.
Xform Project: Project entities to the Z-depth you choose

2
in the current construction plane, in various positions in
3D space (squashing them into a flat, 2D plane), or project
curves onto surfaces and solids.
Xform Rectangular Array: Create an array (grid) of entities

by copying selected entities simultaneously in one or two
directions, relative to the construction plane.
Xform Roll: Wrap lines, arcs, and splines about an axis as

though around a cylinder, or unwrap rolled entities to
make them lie flat.
Xform Drag: Move or copy selected entities to a new posi-

tion by dragging and translating or rotating them.
Xform STL: Mirror, rotate, scale, offset, and translate

StereoLithography (STL) files.
When you perform a transform function, Mastercam creates a tempo-

rary group from the original entities and a result from the trans-
formed entities. The system-generated group and result are indicated
by a color change that stays in effect only until you use the Screen,
Clear Colors option or perform another transform function. The
default colors are red for the original group and purple for the result.
Assigning New Attributes to Transformed Entities

The Use New Attributes checkbox is available in each Xform dialog
box. When you select this option, the Level and Color fields that
display allow you to assign a unique level and color to the trans-
formed entities.
Creating the transformed entities on a different level and in a different

color from the original entities can make them easier to identify. To
create transformed entities using the attributes of the original enti-
ties, deselect this option.
Analyzing Entities
Use the Analyze menu functions to retrieve analytical data for most
elements that appear in the graphics window. This includes informa-
tion on entity properties, positions, distances, 2D and surface areas,
solid properties, chains, contours, angles, and entity database proper-
ties. For most functions, you can modify some or all of the informa-
tion in analyze dialog box fields.
Analyze Entity Properties: View entity properties

and edit some or all of the data, based on the entity
type.
Analyze Position: View the XYZ coordinates of a

selected position or point entity.
Analyze Distance: Analyze the distance between two

selected entities or positions by creating one or more
theoretical lines.
Area / Volume submenu

Analyze 2D Area: Analyze a defined area based on
selected curve boundaries relative to a specified
chord height tolerance.
Analyze Surface Area: Generate information on

the total surface area of selected surfaces and solid
faces, relative to a specified chord height tolerance.
Analyze Solid Properties: Available only with

Mastercam Solids. Analyze data on the solid
volume and mass relative to a defined density, the
center of gravity, and the moment of inertia relative
to a selected axis line.
2
Analyze Chain: Analyze selected chains to identify
one or more subtle problems that might be otherwise
overlooked.
Analyze Contour: Generate a text report containing

the properties of all the entities in one or more
chained curves.
Analyze Angle: Analyze the angles between two lines

or three points that you select in the graphics
window.
Analyze Dynamic: View information on any position

you choose along an entity.
Database / Number submenu

Analyze Number: Identify and view the properties
of an entity using only the entity number (a data-
base property assigned to all entities).
Analyze Database: View database-related infor-

mation about a selected entity, including the
entity number, creation date and time, and
number of references for associations to the entity.
Test Surfaces and Solids submenu

Analyze Test Surfaces: Perform one or more types
of analyses on a surface model, including check
model, small surfaces, normals, and base surfaces.
Analyze Check Solid: Available only with

Mastercam Solids. Identify error conditions that
may pose problems in solid modeling operations.
Working with Levels

A Mastercam file can contain separate levels for wireframe, surfaces,
drafting entities, and toolpaths. By organizing your files into levels,
you control the areas of the drawing you want to be visible at any time
and the entities you can select. This control makes it easier to work
with the file, and helps prevent you from affecting areas of the
drawing you do not want to change.
Setting the Main Level
Using the Level Manager Right–click Menu (page 152)
Setting the Main Level

In Mastercam, you can create and name up to 2 billion levels and set
any one to be the main level. For each level you create, you assign a
unique number and, optionally, a name. The main level is the current
working level. Any geometry that you create is always placed on the
main level. There can be only one main level at a time but you can
change the main level as often as necessary to work with the part. The
current main level appears in the Level field in the Status bar to help
you keep track of the level you are working in.
To set the main level using the Status bar
Level field:
Type the level number in the field.
Click the drop-down arrow in the Level field and choose a
level from the MRU list.
Click the Levels button to open the Level Manager dialog box.
Figure 2-36: Level Manager dialog box
Column sorting arrow

Visible level indicator
Hidden level
Main level
2
Set main level by typing the number Set main level by selecting an entity
in the graphics window
In the Level Manager dialog box, the main level is highlighted

in yellow. Take any one of the following actions to set the
main level:
Click once on the level number in the Number column.
Choose a level to select it, then right–click and choose
Make Main.
Type a number in the Main Level Number text box.
Choose the Select button. The Levels Manager dialog box
minimizes so that you can return to the graphics window
and select an entity on the level that you want to use.
When you select the entity, the Level Manager dialog box
expands and shows the main level set to the level of the
selected entity.
Using the Level Manager Right–click Menu

The Level Manager offers an extensive right–click menu you can
choose from, including:
Make Main: Use this option to set the selected level as the
main level.
All Selected On: This option acts as a filter and makes all enti-
ties in the levels you select in the Level Manager dialog box
visible in the graphics window.
All Selected Off: Similar to the previous option, choose this
option to suppress all entities in the selected levels from view
in the graphics window.
Get Named Levels: Use this option to load a previously saved
.CSV (comma separated value) file containing a level and
level set naming scheme into the current file.
Save Named Levels: Allows you to save all levels and level set
names in the current file as a .CSV file for reuse in other
Mastercam files.
Report: This option creates a text-based report of all level
details defined in the Levels Manager dialog box. You can
edit, print, and save this report to a file.
The following options are available only when you right-click in the
Level Set column.
All Level Set On: This option lets you view a set of levels
based on their Level Set name.
All Level Set Off: Use this option to hide a set of levels based
on their Level Set name.
chapter 3
Machining
This chapter describes the creation of NC code using Mastercam X,
beginning with an overview of the Mastercam machining process. You
will learn about selecting machine and control definitions, which deter-
mine the functions and toolpaths available in the interface. You will also
review the different toolpath operations you can create, their applica-
tion, verification, and the Mastercam X post processing process.
This chapter covers the following topics:
Machining Process Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 154
Choosing a Machine and Control Definition . . . . . . . page 155
Setting Machine Group Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 192
Creating Toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 202
Backplot and Verify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 249
Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . page 255
154 • MASTERCAM X/ Getting Started Guide
Machining Process Overview

This outline represents an overview of the Mastercam CAM workflow.
It identifies each major step in the process.
1 Choose a machine type and machine definition that will be
used to cut the part.
2 Open or import a part file.
3 Set the machine group properties, including file, tool, stock,

and safety zone settings.
4 Create toolpaths and apply them to geometry.
5 Verify and edit the toolpaths using the Toolpath Manager,

Backplot and Verify functions.
6 Post process selected machine group operations.
Note: For an overview of Machine Definitions, Control Defini-

tions and Post Processors, and their relationship, see The Role of
Machine and Control Definitions on page 83.
MACHINING / Choosing a Machine and Control Definition • 155
Choosing a Machine and Control Definition

3
Mastercam machine definitions allow you to run multiple Mastercam
product types, such as Mill, Lathe, and Router, from a single
Mastercam window. You can work with one or more of these products
within the same part file simply by choosing a different machine defi-
32
nition from the Machine Type menu.
Figure 3-1: Example: Machine Type Menu
3
34
The machine definition files you create for each product have unique
file extensions that represent the selected machine type:
.MMD (Mill) 35
.LMD (Lathe)
.RMD (Router)
In a Mastercam part file, the machine definition is part of the
machine group properties in the Toolpath Manager. When you select
36
a machine type, a new machine group and toolpath group are created
and the Toolpaths menu changes. It lists only the toolpath functions
you can use with the associated machine definition.
The machine definition used with the machine group also determines
37
which Mastercam product is active in the workspace. For example,
selecting a mill machine definition activates Mastercam Mill and
makes mill toolpaths available under the Toolpaths menu.
38
Note: Each machine group can have only one machine definition.
Mastercam creates a separate machine group and toolpath group
each time you choose a machine type from the Machine Type
menu. 39
310
Figure 3-2: Example: Toolpath Manager
Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager tabs
Toolpath Manager
functions
For each selected machine

definition, a separate
machine group is created.
You can create one or

more toolpath operations
per toolpath group.
Toolpath Manager
list. Right-click in
the list to access
an extensive menu
of functions.
Insert arrow
The machine definition you access from the machine group is a local
copy of the “master” machine definition. The master machine defini-
tion is stored in an external file. The copy is created from this external
file when you select the machine definition and is stored locally
within the part file. There is no associative link between the master
machine definition file and the part file copy. This independent,
portable structure allows you to move the part to another Mastercam
workstation and transfer the required machine and control definition
information. You can also modify aspects of the machine definition in
a machine group without affecting the machine definition and
control definition files stored in Mastercam.
IMPORTANT: A copy of the post processor is not stored with

the part file. If you move the part file to another Mastercam
workstation, you must also transfer the post processor.

Selecting a Machine Definition (page 157)
Editing Machine Definitions (page 159)
3
Working with Control Files and Control Definitions (page 161)
Selecting a Machine Definition 32

Before creating toolpaths, you must first choose a machine definition.
X To select a machine definition and create a new machine group:

1 From the Machine Type drop-down menu, choose Mill,
3
Router, or Lathe to open a submenu of existing machine
definitions for the selected machine type. Then perform one
of the following actions:
If the machine definition you want to use appears in the
34
submenu list, select it.
Otherwise, choose the Select option. From the Open
dialog box, navigate to the location of the machine defini-
tion file you want to use and select it.
35
2 When you choose a machine definition, Mastercam auto-
matically creates a machine group and a toolpath group in
the Toolpath Manager. The machine definition becomes
active and the toolpath group appears selected. 36
37
Use the Toolpath Manager to modify the machining proper-
ties including Files, Tool settings, Stock setup, and Safety
zone parameters.
3 Use Toolpaths functions to create toolpath operations for the
38
active machine group.
Note: You will learn more about Setting Machine Group Proper-
ties on page 192 and Creating Toolpaths on page 202.
39
310
X To change an existing machine group’s machine definition:

1 From the Toolpath Manager pane, open the active machine
group and click Files.
2 In the Machine Group Properties dialog box Files tab, click
Replace in the Machine - Toolpath Copy section.
3 Use options in the Open Machine Definition File dialog box

to select another machine definition.
To accept the selected machine definition and exit the dialog

box, click Open.
4 To copy the selected machine definition to the current part
file and active machine group, click OK. This closes the
Machine Group Properties dialog box .
5 Mastercam interrogates each toolpath operation in the active
machine group for compatibility with the selected machine
definition and, for each, takes one of the following actions:
Not compatible: The machine definition change cannot
be accepted.
Compatible, but requires change: A warning informs you

that the machine and control definition are compatible
but changes must be made to the operation. You can let
Mastercam automatically replace the machine definition
3
with one that is compatible and modify one or more oper-
ations as necessary, or you can choose not to replace the
machine definition.
If you choose to have Mastercam replace the machine
32
definition, you can select the Details button to preview
the changes Mastercam will make to the operations.
After changing the machine definition, you may need
to regenerate operations. 3
Note: To manually override the changes, edit the operations after
changing the machine definition.
If you do not allow Mastercam to make the changes,

34
the operation status remains dirty, and you must
manually correct the problem before regenerating the
toolpath.
Fully compatible: The operation is fully compatible with
35
the selected machine and control definition. The toolpath
status remains clean and no regeneration is necessary.
Editing Machine Definitions

36
You can use different methods to edit a machine definition, including:
Machine Definitions Manager function
Machine Group Properties, Files tab
37
CAUTION: The method you use to edit a machine definition
determines whether you update only the local copy saved with
the part file, or the master version stored in an external file.
38
Before you make any changes, carefully review the information
in this section.
Machine Definition Manager—Choose one of the following methods

39
to edit only the master machine definition. This does not automati-
cally affect any local copies of the machine definition stored in the
part file. However, if you are working with a part file that contains a
machine group, when you save any changes to the master machine
definition, you can also choose to save them to the local copy.
310
Choose Machine Definition Manager from the Machine

Type menu.
Choose Machine Definition Manager from the Machine
Definition toolbar
Both access methods allow you to edit only the master machine defi-
nition file that is stored as an independent file; changes are not made
to the local copy of the machine definition stored in the part files.
Machine Group Properties File tab—Choose one of the following

methods to edit only the local copy of the machine definition in the
part file (this does not affect the master machine definition stored in
the Mastercam database):
From the Toolpath Manager list, open the machine group
and choose Files.
From The Machine Group Properties dialog box, select the

Files tab.
Then click Edit in the Machine - Toolpath Copy section to open the
Machine Definition Manager.
There are some things you cannot change when editing the local copy
of the machine definition and control definition. These include:
Modifying the list of post processor files available from
control definition.
3
Editing the axis combinations.
Removing a rotary axis (typically a C axis) from a lathe.
Modifying the machine definition in a manner that makes it
32
totally incompatible with operations in the machine group.
If the changes you make require operations to be modified, or would
make the machine incompatible with operations in the machine
group, Mastercam performs an integrity check requiring actions 3
similar to those described for changing a machine group's machine
definition on page 158.
Notes: 34
• When you access the Machine Definition Manager from the
Machine Group Properties Files tab, notice that its menu bar
does not include a Save option. This is because any changes
you make to the machine definition apply only to the part file
and are automatically saved when you save the part.
35
• You can use the Files tab in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box to modify the machine definition and control defi-
nition, and even select a different machine and control defini-
tion, provided they support existing toolpaths in the machine
36
group.
Working with Control Files and Control

37
Definitions
The Control Definition Manager is your tool for working with control
definitions. Use it to:
38
Create and edit control definitions that represent the
machine’s control properties
Define default data paths and file locations for operations 39
based on the control
Define default post processing settings and communication
Settings
Write post text and miscellaneous values to the post
310
processor
Create and modify toolpath defaults and save them to

.DEFAULTS files
Store all of these settings in a control file (.CONTROL)
Each Mastercam control file is a library of individual control defini-
tions that you create and save in the file using the Control Definition
Manager. Each control definition consists of two components:
A selected control type. Control types are predefined by
Mastercam and include mill, lathe, router, mill/turn, and
wire (mill/turn represent a lathe machine definition with a
rotary axis).
A selected post processor file (.PST). You determine the post
processors that are available for each control type by making
their location and filenames known to the Control Definition
Manager.
Note: The selected post processor file is not saved in the

.CONTROL file, only its data path and file name are saved as a
reference to the external .PST file. However, in the .PST file, a
unique subrecord is stored for the text you define in the Control
Definition Manager Text properties page.
After choosing the control type and post processor, use the Control
Definition Manager Control properties pages to configure properties
for the control definition such as tolerances, work system preferences,
NC output, text entries, and more. When you save the control defini-
tion, Mastercam stores all of this information in the control file as a
single control definition for this unique control type/post processor
combination.
A single control definition file can store one or more control defini-
tions for each control type. For each control type, you can create as
many control definitions as necessary, provided that they use
different post processors.
If you are a new Mastercam user, you may find it easiest to define only
one control definition per .CONTROL file. Advanced users can
leverage the .CONTROL architecture to store libraries of application-
specific posts for individual controls, configure generic controls for
multiple machines, and support other sophisticated applications.
Accessing the Control Definition Manager

Use one of the following methods to open the Control Definition
Manager dialog box.
3
From the Machine Type menu, choose Control Definition.
From the Machine Definition toolbar, choose Control
Definition. 32
From the Machine Definition Manager dialog box, choose
the Edit Control Definition option from the menu bar. 3
34
Editing Options
When you access the Control Definition Manager with an active
35
machine group in the Toolpath Manager list, your editing and
creation options are limited. This is because you are restricted to
working on the local copy of the machine and control definition,
which is part of the machine group and is stored in your part file. In
36
this case, you can save changes only to the local copy stored in the
machine group; you cannot save any changes to the .CONTROL file,
nor can you create a new control definition, or select a different
.CONTROL file. 37
You can change the control type and define a new control definition if
no toolpaths exist in the current part file when you access the Control
Definition Manager (either from the Machine Type menu or the
Machine Definition toolbar). Otherwise, because you are working
with the local copy of the control definition, the control type is
38
already defined and this field cannot be selected for change, as illus-
trated in the following example. In some situations, the Post proces-
sors button may also be unavailable. 39
310
Figure 3-3: Example: Control Definition Manager dialog box
Create a new control definition by

selecting a control type and post Enter descriptive information
processor from the drop-down lists. about the .CONTROL file.
View a list of all control
definitions that have been
saved in the .CONTROL file.
View and edit the list of

post processors for the Enter descriptive information
selected control type. about the control definition.
View and edit

properties pages for Properties page information displays
the control definition here for the selected control topic.
by choosing a Control
topic from the list.
View interactive tips about the selected

Control Definition Manager properties page.
IMPORTANT: Before editing controls, you need detailed

knowledge of the control and access to the control program-
ming manual from the machine / control manufacturer.
Building the Post Processor List

Use the Post processors button in the Control Definition Manager
dialog box to manage the list of post processors that are compatible
with the selected control. This list displays in the Control Definition
Manager (post processor drop-down list), and in the Machine Defini-
tion Manager when choosing the control definition for a machine
definition. In some situations, for example, when working with a local
control definition stored in a part file, this button is not available.
Note: To learn about posting operations, see Post Processing on

page 255.
X To add post processors to the list for a selected control type:

1 Use one of the methods described in Accessing the Control
Definition Manager (page 163) to open the Control Definition
Manager dialog box.
3
2 In the Control Definition Manager dialog box, click the Post
processors button.
3 In the Control Definition Post List Edit dialog box, choose
32
Add files.
3
34
35
4 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of one or
more post processor files to add to the .CONTROL file. Then
use Windows standard methods to select the files and choose
36
Open.
5 To continue adding post processors, repeat Step 3–Step 4.
Otherwise, click OK to exit the Control Definition Post List
Edit dialog box.
37
38
39
310
X To view a list of all control definitions that have been stored in

the current control file:
1 In the Control Definition Manager dialog box, choose
Existing definitions.
2 To load a control definition, choose one from the Existing

Definitions List dialog box and click OK.
Note: The control definition that is loaded into the machine

group and saved with the part file is only the individual control
definition for a single control type-post combination, not the
entire contents of the .CONTROL file.
Validating the Control File / Post Processor

Before you can create an NC program using a particular post
processor (.PST file), it must be properly configured. A properly
configured post processor file meets the following criteria:
A control definition that associates the post processor with a
specific control type has been created and saved to a
.CONTROL file.
Using the information in the control, Mastercam has verified
the location of the .PST file that is stored on your system and
has verified that it is actually there.
A subrecord header exists in the .PST file with the control
type and name of the .CONTROL file followed by the post text
for the control. This header is automatically created when
you set up the control.
IMPORTANT: When you select a post processor for a control

definition, the icons that display next to each post processor
indicate its status for meeting these criteria.
3
• The post status icons do not indicate that a post has been
properly customized for a particular machine or application.
Creating a control definition and configuring the post as
described here is not a substitute for writing, editing, and
32
properly testing the .PST file to make sure that its output is
compatible with a particular machine. That must be done in
addition to the steps described here, and is outside the
scope of this documentation. For more information, contact
your Mastercam reseller or see the MP Post Processor
3
Reference Guide.
• In previous versions of Mastercam, you could select a post
processor whenever you posted an operation. In Mastercam
X, the machine definition encompasses the control defini-
34
tion and the post processor. This expanded architecture
replaces the post you used in prior versions, allowing you to
target a specific machine for your output. To change post
processors in Mastercam X, simply choose a different
machine definition. Mastercam interrogates the operations
35
against the post and machine dynamics associated with the
selected machine definition, allowing you to make automatic
or manual changes, as necessary. 36
Working with Control Properties
The Control Definitions Manager provides a number of different
properties pages you use to define controls. In this section, you will
37
learn about the settings in each page, including:
Tolerances (page 168)
Communications
Arc (page 178)
Rotary (page 179)

38
(page 169)
Files (page 170)
NC Dialog (page 171)

Feed (page 180)
Cutter Compensation
39
(page 181)
NC Output
(page 172)
Machine Cycles
(page 182) 310
Miscellaneous Subprograms (page 186)

Integer / Real Values
(page 173)
Work System (page Operation Defaults (page

175) 187)
Tool (page 176) Text (page 188)
Linear (page 177)
Tolerances
The properties you define in this page are used to set pre-defined post
processing variables. You can also record the control’s minimum
tolerance requirements for creating surfaces, splines, and other
geometry. The minimum and maximum arc radius values may be
used by the toolpath filtering functions.
Figure 3-4: Tolerances properties page
(Control Definitions Manager)
Note: Only Mastercam CAM functions use the tolerances you

define here. To set tolerances for CAD functions, use the Settings,
System Configuration function and dialog box. For more infor-
3
mation, see Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on
page 60.
Communications
32
Use the Communications page to configure the serial communica-
tions settings between the control and the computer running
Mastercam. 3
Figure 3-5: Communications properties page
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Files
Use this page to specify the location of the files needed by the control
definition and to establish default settings for saving different types of
files. You can change the default operations file (.DEFAULTS), tool
library (.TOOLS), or the operations library (.OPERATIONS) for a
particular machine group, assign a default .SET Setup Sheet template,
and set post and C-Hook / NET-Hook program .DLLS.
Use the other option groups in this page to configure the posting
process, including how to log post processing errors and messages,
setting up Post Processing dialog box defaults, and defining how to
manage NC parameters.
Figure 3-6: Files properties page
Notes:
• When creating a new control definition, the default names and
paths of the toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files are read from
the Settings, Configuration, Files properties page settings. For
more information, see Files on page 64.
• Use the Control Definition Manager, Tool properties page to
edit and create new toolpath defaults (.DEFAULTS) files. For
more information, see page 176.
NC Dialog
Use this page to enable different options in the Toolpath parameters
tab for Mill, Router, and Lathe. Deselect any features that are not
3
supported by the control.
Figure 3-7: NC Dialog properties page
(Control Definitions Manager) 32
3
34
35
36
Notes: 37
• The Rotary axis button is enabled through the Machine Defini-
tion Manager.
• All control types use this page, but not all options appear for
each type. 38
39
310
NC Output
You can set a number of options that affect how the NC code is
formatted and presented, including:
Absolute/incremental, Post file debug, Comments in NC (page
172)
Sequence numbers (page 172)
Spaces and end-of-block characters (page 173)
Figure 3-8: NC Output properties page
All control types use this page.
Absolute/incremental, Post file debug, Comments in NC

The selections you make in these sections are defaults you can
override when using the control. For example, you can modify NC
comments using the Files tab in the Machine Group Properties
dialog box.
Sequence numbers
All of the information in this section is written directly to the
control definition. Mastercam supports both integer and real
values for sequence numbers. To activate this feature, choose Use

decimal sequence numbers. When decimals are enabled, you can
enter real numbers in sequence numbers fields, limited by the
Number of places you specify.
3
You can override the Initial sequence number and Increment
sequence number fields using the Files tab in the Machine Group
Properties dialog box. 32
Note: This section centralizes information that was set in several
locations in previous Mastercam versions.
3
Spaces and end-of-block characters
The values you set in this section are read directly by the post
processor. 34
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values
Miscellaneous values are custom variables that you can define in your
post processor. Use this page in combination with the Text properties
35
page to create sets of custom variables or parameters you can use
within toolpath operations for the selected control. You can enter
more specific values for them when creating a toolpath. You can also
create different default values for specific operation types and store
them in the .DEFAULTS file.
36
TIP: For most toolpaths, you can access an option to Auto-
matically set to post values when posting by choosing the
Misc values button in the Toolpath Parameters tab. When you
37
select this option, the values stored in the post are read auto-
matically. This effectively disables all the other miscellaneous
values controls and prevents you from changing or overriding
them for a single operation.
38
You can create a set of integer variables, and a set of real
(decimal) variables.
Each set can include up to 10 different variables.
39
The variables you define display in the Miscellaneous values
dialog box, where you enter specific values for each opera-
tion.
310
TIP: Use the Control Definition Manager, Text properties page

to customize the descriptions and default values for fields that
display in the Miscellaneous text and values section of the
Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties page. For more
information, see page 188.
Figure 3-9: Miscellaneous Integer / Real Values properties page

The descriptions and defaults you define in the Text properties page
are saved in the text section of the post processor file (.PST). The field
labels are set in the Text properties page, and the values are defined in
the Misc. Int / Real page.
This data structure allows you to quickly customize a set of miscella-
neous values using an existing post processor.
IMPORTANT: If no description is provided for a miscella-

neous integer field in the Text properties page, default text
appears in the corresponding entry field in the Miscellaneous
Integer / Real Values properties page. To disable a field, use
paired double quotes (““).
For mill/turn controls, you can define two sets of miscellaneous vari-
ables, one for milling and one for lathe operations.
Work System
The Work system page lets you select the work coordinate system
used by the control:
3
Setting Typical post interpretation
Home position G90/91 32

Local work offsets G92
Work offsets G54, E1
Other Custom 3
Note: In previous versions of Mastercam, these parameters were
typically set in the Miscellaneous values dialog box (by entering 0,
1, or 2).
34
Figure 3-10: Work System properties page
35
36
37
38
39
Use the Tplane field to assign work offsets to all Tplanes or just those
which are being transformed.
310
Tool
Use the Tool subpages to set the defaults for tool offsets, numbering,
and home positions that apply to mill, lathe, router, and mill/turn
control types (some of the field labels are slightly different for lathe).
For mill/turn machines, you can access separate subpages for mill
and lathe tools.
Figure 3-11: Tool properties page
Linear
This page applies to Mill, Lathe, Router, and Mill/Turn control types.
(Only Lathe machines have corner rounding options.) Use these
3
options to define how the control interpolates 3D linear motion.
Note: For Mill/Turn controls, separate linear subpages for Mill

and Lathe are provided so you can configure these settings sepa-
32
rately.
Figure 3-12: Linear properties page

34
35
36
37
TIP: To link duplicate fields in each plane control section and
38
make them easier to maintain, select the option to Automati-
cally set duplicate dialog items the same. This allows you to
change only one field and update all duplicate fields in this
page. 39
IMPORTANT: Plane definitions apply to the tool direction, not
the linear axis direction.
310
Arc
This page allows you to define how the control supports arcs and
helixes.
Figure 3-13: Arc properties page
Lathe controls share the same page with Mill/Router controls, except
that for Lathe, there is only one plane available and no options for
helix support. For Mill/Turn controls, you will see separate subpages
for Mill and Lathe settings. Mastercam uses this information when
filtering toolpaths.
Rotary
Use the settings in this page to further customize the rotary axis
parameters from the machine definition. You can choose to break
3
rapid rotary moves when they exceed the rotary axis limits set in the
machine definition. You can also allow Mastercam to calculate
bi-stable solutions for rotary axis positions. This allows the post
processor to attempt the second solution in order to stay within limits 32
or reduce machine motion. Depending on conditions and the post
processor, this may cause a tool retract and reposition.
Rotary properties page
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Feed
The options in this page allow you to define how Mastercam inter-
prets the feed rate values that are entered for each toolpath operation
created using the control.
Figure 3-14: Feed properties page
Notes:
• Make sure that the control has the internal logic to support the
options you select.
• To set maximum and minimum feed rates, use the Machine
Definition Manager.
Cutter Compensation
Use this page to define how the control implements cutter compensa-
tion, and to enable the compensation options when the control is
3
used.
Figure 3-15: Cutter Compensation properties page
3
34
35
36
The first check box defines whether the control supports cutter
compensation at all. Select this option to enable and set other options
in this group.
37
38
39
310
Machine Cycles
Use the subpages of machine cycle properties to define how the
control implements different machining cycles.
Figure 3-16: Machine Cycles properties page
For mill/turn machines, an additional option is added to this page:

Use separate mill and lathe drill cycle enable options. When
selected, this option creates separate subpages for mill and lathe drill
cycles, allowing you to independently set and maintain their options.
All control types use the same version of this page. In the following
section, you will learn to use additional detail pages to set more
specific options for drill cycles and lathe canned cycles, including:
Drill cycles
Lathe canned cycles (page 184)
Drill cycles
Select all drill cycles that produce canned cycle output. The drill
cycles that you do not select in this page can still be used in the tool- 3
paths you create with this control. However, using them results in
long-hand NC code.
Figure 3-17: Mill Drill Cycles properties page
3
34
35
36
Note: Custom drill cycles always result in long-hand code. 37
38
39
310
Figure 3-18: Lathe Drill Cycles properties page

For mill/turn machines, you can maintain separate versions of this

page for mill and lathe drilling operations. There is a separate page for
activating and configuring lathe canned cycles.
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath
tabs:
Lathe drill cycle parameters tab
Mill/Router drill cycle parameters tab
Note: To edit the name / label of each cycle, and to specify param-
eters for each cycle, use the Control Definition Manager, Text
page. For more information, see page 188.
Lathe canned cycles

You can also define how the control supports other canned cycles
besides drilling. To enable each toolpath type supported by the
control, select the corresponding check box.
Figure 3-19: Lathe Canned Cycles properties page

(Control Definitions Manager
3
32
3
34
35
Groove and thread toolpaths also have a number of secondary
options for supporting specific features. These correspond directly to
options and fields that appear in the parameters tabs when using the
control with the selected machine type to create toolpaths. Options
36
that are not enabled in this properties page are disabled or hidden.
The options you set in this page affect the following lathe toolpath
tabs: 37
Canned groove shape parameters tab
Canned groove rough parameters tab
Thread cut parameters tab
38
39
310
Subprograms
Mastercam uses subprograms in two ways:
Transform subprograms are created by toolpath transform
operations.
Non-transform subprograms are created by depth cuts and
drilling operations. Non-transform subprograms are avail-
able only with Mastercam Mill and Router.
In the Subprograms properties page, you define how the control
supports both types of subprograms.
Figure 3-20: Subprograms properties page
Operation Defaults
Use this page to create and edit sets of toolpath operation defaults.
These defaults are stored in files with a .DEFAULTS extension. Each
3
file contains default settings for all Mastercam toolpath types. The
number of operation defaults files you can create is virtually unlim-
ited. When creating toolpaths, you can override and further
customize the operation default settings that are loaded from the 32
.DEFAULTS file.
Figure 3-21: Operation Defaults properties page
3
34
35
36
37
TIP: Use the Control Definition Manager, Files page to assign
a .DEFAULTS file to the control definition. This assignment sets 38
the default values for any operations created while the control
is active. For more information, see Files on page 170.
Separate Inch and Metric pages let you create and maintain indi-
vidual default files for inch and metric operations.
39
310
Note: Use the Settings, Configuration function to define whether

inch or metric mode is the preferred Mastercam default. This pref-
erence is not defined in the control definition. For more informa-
tion, see Setting Defaults and Preferences (Configuration) on
page 60.
X To edit and save changes to a .DEFAULTS file:

1 Click the Operation Defaults, Inch or Metric subpage under
the Operation Defaults heading in the Control topics pane.
2 Choose the Open button to select a .DEFAULTS file to edit.
Mastercam looks for .DEFAULTS files in the path that has
been set in the Control Definition Manager, Files page.
3 Select the file to edit. The operations tree displays in the
control definition dialog box where you can edit individual
operation settings.
4 Choose Save to write the changes to the file. If the control
definition is not used in the active machine group, choose
Save As to create a new file.
Text
Use the individual subpages under the Text heading in the Control
topics pane to create, view, and edit post processor text entries in a
number of categories.
Prior to Mastercam X, posts were divided into two files:
A .PST file, which contained post variables, questions, and
other processing logic
A .TXT file, which contained text data used by the post
processor and which was frequently used to customize the
Mastercam interface with machine- or control-specific
parameters.
In Mastercam X, all of the post controlled text in the .TXT file has been
brought into the control definition, and its text strings are now part of
the .PST file. Instead of editing the .TXT file directly, you now use the
Text page in the Control Definition Manager to access the text data in
the .PST file.
Note: Most subpage categories correspond to the standard headers

previously used in the .TXT files before Mastercam X; others are
new categories added by Mastercam X to the .PST file.
Mastercam's control definition architecture means that each .PST file

can have several sections of post text. Every time you configure a post
processor for use with a specific control definition, Mastercam writes
a new post text record and appends it to the .PST file. The records are
3
separated by headers which contain the name of the control and type
of machine.
In addition, there is a section in the .PST file that contains default post
text. Use the right–click menu in any of the Text subpages to import
32
post text sections from other control definitions in the same .PST file
or from completely different .PST files, or to restore values from the
defaults.
Figure 3-22: Text properties page
3
34
35
36
37
38
Choose a topic from the list to view its text entries in a spreadsheet-
like interface. To enter or edit a value, double–click in a field and type
the new value.
39
310
Figure 3-23: Example: Text properties subpage
Note: For misc. ints/reals, the default values are embedded in the
text string. For more information, see Miscellaneous Integer /
Real Values on page 173.
Right–click Menu Options

For more editing options and to import text from other sources, use
the following options that display when you right–click in the Text
properties page:
Import: Import to an entire sheet, a category, a single cell, or
all text pages from another post processor, or import an
entire sheet from a .TXT file created with a prior version of
Mastercam.
Default: Choose the source of the default values for the
current sheet, category, cell, or all text pages, either system-
wide default values, or the post processor default. The post
processor default is the generic text as was originally found in
the post text file.
Restore: Replace the contents of a sheet, category, cell, or all
text pages with the system default values.
Export: Write the current sheet to a delimited text (.TXT) file.
Save as Default: Select this option to save the post text under
the Post text header in the specific control file and under the
default header for post text. The default text is used as the
source of the default text values, as defined above for the
3
right–click menu Default option. It is also used as the source
of default text values when you select the post processor in
the Control Definition Manager.
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Setting Machine Group Properties

Working with the Toolpath Manager (page 192)
Using the Insert Arrow (page 194)
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath Groups (page 195)
Setting Machine Group Properties (page 197)
Working with the Toolpath Manager

The Toolpath Manager is a central location where you manage all the
elements of the current job. You access it from the Toolpaths tab in
the Mastercam window Operations Manager pane.
Figure 3-24: Example: Toolpath Manager
Toolpath Manager / Solids Manager tabs
Toolpath Manager
functions
For each selected machine

definition, a separate
machine group is created.
You can create one or

more toolpath operations
per toolpath group.
Toolpath Manager
list. Right-click in
the list to access
an extensive menu
of functions.
Insert arrow
MACHINING / Setting Machine Group Properties • 193
Note: If your installation includes Mastercam Solids, use the

Solids tab to access the Solids Manager. In addition to listing the
features that define a solid, the Solids Manager tab provides
3
options for managing and editing solids.
Use the Toolpath Manager to generate, sort, edit, regenerate, verify,

backplot, and post selected operations, including associative and 32
non-associative toolpaths.
The Toolpath Manager list is a nested hierarchy of folders that orga-
nize the following types of information:
3
Machine group
Machine (machine group properties) 34

Toolpath group
Toolpath group operations 35

Toolpath subgroup
Toolpath subgroup operations 36

Machine and operations folders have additional levels of properties
and attributes that you can modify. You will learn more about this in
the following sections on Setting Machine Group Properties (page
197) and Editing Operations (page 242). 37
TIP: When you position the cursor in the Toolpath Manager, its
options become active; any keyboard commands you enter
are executed in the Toolpath Manager. This focus is deacti-
vated when you move the cursor outside of the Toolpath
38
Manager pane.
39
310
Using the Insert Arrow

In the Toolpath Manager list, you use the insert arrow to indicate
where to create any operation you define. The machine group in
which the insert arrow is positioned is referred to as the active
machine group. The active machine group defines the options you
can choose from the Toolpath Manager, its right–click menu, and the
Mastercam Toolpaths menu. It also identifies the source and target of
selected options, such as the addition of setup sheets, or the import or
export of operations.
The default position for the insert arrow is at the end of the Toolpath
Manager list. To reposition the arrow, use the left mouse button to
select it and continue to hold down the mouse button as you “drag
and drop” it to a new position in the list. You can also select the insert
arrow, and then use the keyboard up and down arrow keys or the
insert arrow buttons in the Toolpath Manager menu to reposition it.
TIPS:
• Mastercam saves the most recently used plane, view, and
WCS selections for each machine group, and restores them
whenever you activate the machine group. For example, if
one machine group has toolpaths on the front of the part,
and another machine group has toolpaths on the side of the
part, whenever you activate either machine group,
Mastercam will automatically activate whichever views and
planes you were using the last time the group was active.
• To activate a machine group when working in Mastercam
Design (choose Machine Type, Design): select it in the Tool-
path Manager, right–click and choose Make machine group
active. This loads the associated Mastercam application
(Mill, Router, Lathe).
Figure 3-25: Toolpath Manager Insert Arrow

Move up one item.
Move down one item.
Position below last item in the selected operation / group.
Scroll Toolpath Manager view to insert arrow position. 3
Active machine group 32
Drag and drop the insert
arrow to a new position,
or use the arrow buttons
3
to reposition it in the list.
34
Insert arrow indicates the active
machine group and the position of
the next operation you create.
35
36
37
Creating Machine Groups and Toolpath
Groups 38
In the Toolpath Manager, you use machine groups to centralize and
organize machining properties and toolpath information. Each
machine group is associated with a single machine type (Mill, Lathe,
Router, or Wire). The machine group stores important job setup infor-
mation like the stock model, safety zone, material selection, tool
39
offset preferences, and feedrate and spindle speed preferences. All
toolpath operations you create in the machine group are posted to
the same NC file unless you override this setting (for more informa-
tion on changing this setting for one or more selected operations, and
310
on using other functions to modify operations, see Editing Operations
on page 242).
Machine groups allow you to:

Organize your machining operations into logical groups.
Link toolpaths to specific machine and control definitions.
Access and modify the local copy of the machine and control
definition to make part- or job-specific changes.
Link sets of machining operations directly to job informa-
tion.
X To create a machine group for a selected machine definition:

From the Machine Type menu, choose a machine type and
machine definition.
X To create a machine group using a default machine definition:

In the Toolpath Manager, right–click and choose Groups,
New Machine Group, and a machine type (Mill, Lathe,
Router, or Wire).
When you use either method, Mastercam creates a new machine

group for the selected machine definition and a new toolpath group
directly below the new machine group. The new machine group and
toolpath group are inserted at the end of the Toolpath Manager list.
Both groups are assigned a unique default name, such as Machine
Group 1, Machine Group 2, Toolpath Group 1, Toolpath Group2, and
so on.
IMPORTANT: The machine definition in the machine group is

actually a local copy of the machine definition file. For more
information on selecting and editing machine and control defi-
nitions, see Choosing a Machine and Control Definition on page
155.
You can create as many different machine groups as you need in the
same part file. By using machine groups to organize operations, you
can include toolpaths for different machines in the same part file,
even for different machines types. .
3
Setting Machine Group Properties
When you select a machine definition to create a new machine group,
32
default machining properties are automatically assigned, based on
the configuration settings and the machine / control definition
settings. A new toolpath group is automatically created directly below
the new machine group in the Toolpath Manager list. 3
In the Toolpath Manager list, machine group properties are organized
as property types you can display by expanding the Properties folder.
34
35
Each property type corresponds to a tab in the Machine Group Prop-
erties dialog box. To open the Machine Group Properties dialog box,
select a property type from the Toolpath Manager list. Then use the
tabs in the dialog box to view and edit the settings.
36
In this section, you will learn to set parameters in each of the
following Machine Group Properties dialog box tabs:
Files tab Tool settings tab

37
(page 198) (page 199)
Stock setup tab (page Safety zone tab (page

200) 201) 38
39
310
Files tab
Use the Files tab to view and define the file names and data paths
used by operations in the selected machine group. These settings
affect default values, posting, and tool and operation libraries.
Note: Many of the default paths and filenames that display in the
Machine Group Properties, Files tab are values you initially set in
the Control Definition Manager, Files and Operation Defaults
properties pages. For more information, see Files on page 170 and
Operation Defaults on page 187.
Figure 3-26: Files tab (Machine Group Properties dialog box)

Tool settings tab

Use the Tool settings tab to control NC file numbering, tool offsets,
feeds, speeds, coolant, and other toolpath parameters, including
3
material selection. Most of the default values for these settings come
from the control definition.
Figure 3-27: Tool settings tab
(Machine Group Properties dialog box)
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Stock setup tab

Stock models help you visualize toolpaths more realistically. Use the
options in this tab to create a stock model for the machine group or to
select a file containing the stock model. For Mastercam Lathe, you
can also use this tab to define chucks, tailstocks, and steady rests. You
can choose to display the stock model with the part geometry when
viewing the file or toolpaths, during backplot functions, or when veri-
fying toolpaths.
Figure 3-28: Stock setup tab
The options you can set in the Stock setup tab are based on the
Mastercam product associated with the machine definition in the
selected machine group. You can define different stock setup parame-
ters for Mastercam Lathe than for Mastercam Mill and Mastercam
Router.
TIP: Use the Settings, Configuration, Colors properties page

to set stock colors. For more information, see Colors on page
66.
Safety zone tab

In this tab, you define a safety zone around the system origin to allow
the tool to retract to a safe position outside of this area. Safety zones
3
help avoid collisions that could be caused by the machine indexing,
or by contact with part features or fixtures in the path of the tool.
You can select and further define the best fitting type of safety zone
(spherical, cylindrical, or rectangular) for the part you are machining.
32
Figure 3-29: Safety zone tab
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
Note: You must enable retract moves in the toolpath to activate
the safety zone. To do this, access the Toolpath Parameters tab by
choosing Parameters in the Toolpath Manager list and then
select retract options.
310
Creating Toolpaths
Mastercam includes an extensive number of intelligent toolpath
functions you can use to quickly build toolpaths for specific applica-
tions. Your ability to access toolpath types and features depends on
both your license level and the capabilities of the active machine and
control definition. Most of the Mastercam Mill toolpaths described in
this section are also available if your installation includes Mastercam
Router and the appropriate Plus or Pro license, or Mastercam Lathe
for mill/turn applications.
The process of creating a toolpath consists of the following basic
steps:
1 Select the machine definition from the Machine type menu.
2 Choose a toolpath type from the Toolpaths menu.
3 Use the dialog boxes and prompts that display to chain

geometry or select points or other entities, as necessary.
4 In the Toolpath Parameters tab, select the tool and refine the
tool parameters.
5 Use the other tabs in the Toolpath Parameters dialog box to
define and create the toolpath operation for the selected
toolpath type.
TIP: You can also select pre-defined toolpath operations from

a library and apply the operation to selected geometry.
In this section, you will learn about the different toolpath types you
can create in Mastercam and how to work with basic toolpath func-
tions, including:
Mill Toolpath Types Nesting Toolpaths

(page 203) (page 226)
Surface Toolpath Toolpath Chaining

Types (page 215) Techniques (page 229)
Multi-axis Toolpath Selecting Tools (page

Types (page 217) 232)
Lathe Toolpath Types Managing Toolpath

(page 220) Operations (page 236)
MACHINING / Creating Toolpaths • 203
Router Toolpath Editing Operations

Types (page 224) (page 242)
3
Mill Toolpath Types
Mastercam Mill has several types of toolpaths that you can create on
wireframe, surface, and solid geometry. In this section, you will learn
32
more about creating different types of Mastercam Mill toolpaths,
including:
Contour Toolpaths
(page 204)
Pocket Toolpaths (page
212)
3
Circle Toolpaths Wireframe Toolpaths
(page 206)
Drill Toolpaths (page

(page 213)
Specialized Toolpaths
34
207) (page 214)
You can create these toolpath types with 2- or 3-axis mills, including
those with two linear axes plus one rotary axis. When chaining geom-
etry for these toolpaths, you can select either wireframe geometry or
35
the edges/faces of solids.
To drive tools along surface geometry, use surface toolpaths.
You can also use wireframe toolpaths to simulate surface
machining with wireframe geometry, or you can create
36
curves along surfaces or their boundaries and chain those.
Use multi-axis toolpaths when your tool has 4 or 5 program-
mable axes and the operation requires this type of tool
motion.
37
Note: Mills that support multi-axis toolpaths also support the
other types of toolpaths described in this section.
38
TIPS:
• When working with toolpaths, you can use functions to
transform, trim, or wrap the toolpath around a cylinder with
39
axis substitution.
• To wrap the toolpath, choose the Rotary axis check box and
button in the Toolpath Parameters tab for the selected oper-
ation. 310
Contour Toolpaths
Use contour toolpaths to drive the tool along a path. This toolpath
type is appropriate for both roughing and finishing applications.
Contour toolpaths remove material along a path defined by a chain of
curves; they do not clean out an enclosed area. You can also cut the
contour in depth cuts and/or multiple passes in the cutting plane,
and create remachining operations.
When creating contour toolpaths, you can select an unlimited
number of chains for each toolpath, creating either 2D or 3D contour
toolpaths. .
To begin creating a contour toolpath, choose Contour Toolpath from
the Toolpaths menu. After chaining geometry and selecting a tool, use
the Contour parameters tab to choose the Chamfer or Ramp button.
Figure 3-30: Example: Contour Tab
Chamfer contour: Cuts a chamfer around a contour as a

stand-alone operation. This toolpath type
requires a bull-nose or ball (spherical)
cutter, or a chamfer mill.
Ramp contour: Transitions smoothly between depth cuts

by creating a continuous ramp instead of
individual plunge cuts. You can ramp by a
set angle, by a set depth, or plunge directly
3
between depth cuts
Creating Tabs for Contour Toolpaths

32
For some contour toolpaths, you may need to create and use tabs. For
example, when you are cutting out small parts, multiple parts or
nested parts. Tabs are uncut areas of a contour toolpath that assist in
holding down a part. While the tool is cutting the contour, it retracts
3
at the tab location to leave a small amount of stock, then plunges back
to the normal cutting depth.
When you define mill and router contour toolpaths, you can create
tabs by selecting the Tabs check box in the Contour parameters tab,
34
then clicking the Tabs button to access the Tabs dialog box.
Figure 3-31: Tabs dialog box
35
36
37
38
39
Mastercam also provides options for editing and cutting off the tabs.
310
Circle Toolpaths
Circle toolpaths efficiently mill a circle when you select just a single
point, or other circle toolpaths for related applications. After milling
the center of the circle, Mastercam calculates an entry arc before
approaching the perimeter and then a similar exit arc. You can add
enhancements such as multiple passes, multiple depth cuts, and
helical plunge moves, and fine-tune the entry and exit arcs. To begin
creating a circle toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Circle Paths and the
type of toolpath to create. Circle toolpath types include:
Circmill toolpath: Mills circular pockets based on a single

point. You can select either point entities
or the center points of arcs.
Helix bore toolpath: Designed for a non-center cutting insert

cutter that cuts downward in a helical
motion for roughing; steps over to finish at
the bottom; then performs a finish pass in
a helical upward motion. Like a circle mill
toolpath, you can chain only a single point
to create the toolpath; the hole’s outer
diameter is determined by the toolpath
parameters you specify.
Slot mill toolpath: Machines obround slots (two straight lines

with two 180-degree arcs at the ends). Slot
mill toolpaths automatically calculate
plunge, entry, and exit points appropriate
for slots.
Thread mill tool- Creates a series of helixes for machining a

path: thread with a thread mill or other suitable
tool. For inside diameter (ID) threads, you
must drill a hole first. For outside diameter
(OD) threads, you must create a boss first.
You can use point entities or arc center
points for the toolpath.
Drill Toolpaths
Mastercam supports many types of standard drill cycles. Standard
drill toolpaths provide flexible options for selecting drilling points,
3
such as selecting either points or arcs; automatically selecting all the
points from a previous operation; or choosing drilling patterns such
as grids or bolt holes without first creating geometry. The general
process of creating a standard drill toolpath is straight-forward. 32
Note: You can also customize drilling operations and create
entirely new drilling cycles.
3
To begin creating a drill toolpath, choose Toolpaths, Drill toolpath.
Then use the Drill Point Selection dialog box to select one or more
hole locations for the toolpath and choose the sort order.
After selecting a tool, use the drill type parameters tab (such as
34
Simple drill - no peck in the sample below) to choose a drill cycle from
the Cycle drop-down list and set drill cycle parameters. Edit the fields
and settings in other drill toolpath tabs, as necessary.
Figure 3-32: Example: Drill Cycle Parameters tab
35
36
37
38
39
310
Choosing a Drill Cycle

The drill cycle you choose determines the parameters you can set for
the drill toolpath. Mastercam Mill and Mastercam Router include all
of the standard drill toolpaths and features. In addition, Mastercam
Router provides support for block drilling and aggregate heads.
Notes:
• Drill cycle availability is determined by the control definition
and is machine and control dependent. For more information
on using a control definition with a specific machine defini-
tion, see Choosing a Machine and Control Definition on page
155.
• The post must support the selected cycle.
TIP: Multi-axis drill toolpaths (which let you rotate the drill axis
and change it from hole to hole) are an optional feature. For
more information, contact your Mastercam Reseller.
Selecting Drill Points

When you choose Drill Toolpaths or Circle Paths, Circmill Toolpath
from the Toolpaths menu, the Drill Point Selection dialog box
displays. It provides you with many flexible options for selecting drill
holes for the toolpath.
Figure 3-33: Drill Point Selection dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
Sorting Drill Points

39
Once you have selected all the points, in the Drill Point Selection
dialog box, choose Sorting to specify the drill order. The Point Sorting
dialog box makes it easy to choose a sort order for a specific type of
drilling application.
310
Figure 3-34: Point Sorting dialog box
The 2D sort, Rotary sort, and Cross sort tabs provide various
patterns you can choose for specific application types. To choose a
sort pattern, click the button in the selected tab and set additional
options, as necessary.
Notes:
• Only the drill points in the current toolpath are sorted, not all
drill points in the graphics window.
• The start point of the drill toolpath is marked with a red point.
Editing Drill Points

To add canned text, or otherwise customize the toolpath at one or
more specific points, in the Drill Point Selection dialog box, choose
the Edit button. After selecting the point to edit, use the options in the
Drill change at point dialog box to make point-specific changes to a
drill toolpath.
Figure 3-35: Drill Change at Point dialog box
3
32
3
34
35
36
37
The values displayed in the fields are the values currently in effect.
Select the check mark in front of a field to activate it, then type a new
value. You can apply the change to just the selected point, or to every
38
point going forward.
39
310
Feature-based Drilling
Use the feature-based drilling functions described below to automati-
cally create a complete series of drill operations for a set of points or
arcs.
Auto drill After you select a set of holes, this function creates a
toolpath: sequence of operations—for example, spot drilling,
pre-drilling, tapping, and chamfering—and chooses
the appropriate tools, based on the tool type you
select. To begin creating automatic drill toolpaths,
choose Toolpaths, Circle Paths, Auto Drill Toolpath.
Solid drill Searches for all the holes in a solid and then auto-
toolpath: matically creates drill operations for them. To access
the solid drilling function, choose Toolpaths, Solids,
Solid Drill Toolpath.
Start hole Automatically creates drill toolpaths at the plunge

toolpath: points for one or more selected operations.
Mastercam intelligently scans individual depth cuts
and passes for each operation, and creates toolpaths
for multiple plunge points, as necessary. To begin
creating start hole toolpaths, choose Toolpaths,
Circle Paths, Start Hole Toolpath.
Feature-based drilling toolpath functions automate the process of

searching for drill points, selecting the appropriate tools from the tool
library, and creating complete sequences of drilling operations.
Pocket Toolpaths
With Mastercam pocket toolpath functions, you can integrate
roughing and finishing cuts in the same operation, or simultaneously
create separate roughing and finishing operations. You can create
separate entry/exit moves for each type of cut, and choose from many
different roughing patterns, including open pockets and high-speed
pocketing with trochoidal loops to minimize tool burial. Finishing
options include feed rate and spindle speed overrides, thin wall
finishing, spring passes, and remachining.
To begin creating a rough or finish pocket toolpath, Choose Toolpath,
Pocket Toolpath. Then chain the geometry for the pockets.
Wireframe Toolpaths
Use wireframe toolpaths to use surface machining styles without
having to create or select surface entities. Mastercam calculates the
3
surfaces from your wireframe geometry. In this section, you will learn
about the different types of wireframe toolpaths you can create from
the Toolpaths, Wireframe submenu, including:,
Ruled toolpath: Creates a linear blend between chains of

32
curves, simulating a ruled surface over
several chains of geometry.
Lofted toolpath: Creates a smooth, curved blend between

chains of curves or cross-sections, simu-
3
lating a lofted surface over several chains
of geometry.
Revolved toolpath: Creates a surface of revolution from a 34

cross-section. This toolpath type is calcu-
lated in the current construction plane,
then transformed into the current tool
plane. A ball endmill is required for this
toolpath type.
35
Coons patch Simulates patches between chains of
toolpath: across and along contours by using
points, lines, arcs, or splines to construct
four-sided patches. These patches may
36
be machined separately or machined
with additional patches.
Swept 2D toolpath: Creates 2½D toolpaths by sweeping one

boundary (the across contour) along a
37
second contour (the along contour). A
swept 2D toolpath can have only one
along boundary. The across and along
boundaries are blended to generate a
38
2½D toolpath.
39
310
Swept 3D toolpath: Simulates a surface with any of the

following sets of boundaries:
One across boundary and one along
boundary. Unlike 2D swept tool-
paths, the geometry does not have to
be confined to a plane.
One across boundary and two along
boundaries.
Two across boundaries and one
along boundary.
Note: Creating wireframe toolpaths can be faster and easier than

creating and machining surfaces. However, Mastercam offers you
more options and greater flexibility when creating surface tool-
paths. For more information, see Surface Toolpath Types on page
215.
TIP: When you are chaining the geometry for ruled or lofted
toolpaths, select the chains in order and make sure that the
chaining direction is consistent for all the chains so that the
toolpath does not “twist.”
Specialized Toolpaths
In this section, you will learn about the types of specialized toolpaths
you can create, including:
Face toolpath: Quickly cleans the stock from the top of a part,
qualifies the top of the part, and creates an
even surface for future operations. You can
base the toolpath on either chained geometry
or on the current stock model.
Point toolpath: Builds a series of tool movements from indi-

vidual locations you select in the graphics
window, rather than have the tool follow geom-
etry. Use this toolpath type to avoid a fixture or
clamp, to get the tool into or out of a tight area
or an awkward shape, or to position the tool
between cutting operations.
Manual entry: Inserts text, comments, or Gcodes into your

NC programs. You can store text directly with
the operation, or reference an external text file
that Mastercam reads when post processing.
3
You can choose to insert the literal text as
Gcode commands or format them as
comments. 32
Surface Toolpath Types
Use surface toolpaths to drive the tool along drive geometry. At least
one drive surface, solid face, solid body, or CAD file is required for the
3
toolpath to be created. In this section, you will learn about creating
toolpath surface operations using functions in the Toolpaths, Surface
Rough and Surface Finish submenus.
Surface Rough / Finish Removes the bulk of the material

34
Parallel toolpath: quickly, making multiple depth cuts.
Use the Finish parallel toolpath to
machine over all the surfaces in
parallel passes.
35
Surface Rough / Finish Cuts from a center point outward,
Radial toolpath: creating cuts like the spokes of a
wheel. Rough radial toolpaths require
surface or solids, and also need a
36
radial point, either a position or a
point entity.
Surface Rough / Finish

Project toolpath:
Projects curves, points, or another
toolpath (NCI file) onto surfaces or
37
solids. A common application for
finish project toolpaths is engraving

text or other curves onto surfaces.
Follows the shape and direction of the

38
Flowline toolpath: surfaces and creates a smooth and
flowing toolpath motion.

Contour toolpath:
Makes multiple cuts using constant Z
steps. Works well for parts that have
39
steep walls, such as steep-walled
bosses.
Surface Rough restmill Cleans up remaining stock with a 310

toolpath: planar (constant Z) cut motion.
Surface Rough Pocket Removes a lot of stock quickly by

toolpath: creating a series of planar or constant
Z cuts—a preferred cutting method
for many roughing tools.
Surface Rough Plunge Roughs a part quickly using a drilling-

toolpath: type motion, often using special
plunge roughing tools.
Surface Finish Parallel Removes material from surfaces that

Steep toolpath: fall between two slope angles, for
example, to remove material from
surfaces that slope between 50 and 90
degrees.
Surface Finish Shallow Removes material from surfaces that

toolpath: fall between two slope angles.
Surface Finish Pencil Follows the path where two surfaces

toolpath: meet. It cleans out material by driving
the cutter tangent to two surfaces at a
time.
Surface Finish Leftover Removes material left behind by the

toolpath: larger tool of a previous operation. It
calculates how much stock is left over
and uses that information when
creating tool motions.
Surface Finish Scallop Creates a consistent scallop height

toolpath: over the whole part regardless of
whether the surface becomes steep or
shallow.
Surface Finish Blend Creates motion that is defined by

toolpath: curves that you create along the drive
geometry. Offers powerful machining
for surfaces that require cuts to
conform to the part shape.
You can select different geometry to enhance tool control. These

geometry types include:
Drive geometry: The surfaces, solid faces, solid

bodies or CAD files that will be cut.
Check geometry: The surfaces, solid faces, or solid

bodies that you want the tool to avoid.
Tool containment boundary: A closed chain of

curves that limit tool motion.
CAD file: An STL or other graphics data file used for

3
drive geometry.
Other geometry specific to the selected toolpath

type, for example, flowline geometry for a flowline
toolpath, or blend curves for a blend toolpath.
32
Multi-axis Toolpath Types
Multi-axis toolpaths allow freedom of motion in the tool axis rather
3
than restricting tool motion to the Z axis as with other toolpath types.
You can create multi-axis toolpaths when working with 4-axis and 5-
axis machine tools. Based on the selected machine tool, you can
choose a 3-, 4-, or 5-axis toolpath output format, as outlined below.
34
Machine Tool Toolpath Output Format
4-axis
5-axis (except with Swarf,

3- and 4-axis
3-, 4-, and 5-axis

35
Multisurface, Flow, and Port
toolpaths)
5-axis with Swarf, Multisurface, 4- and 5-axis 36

Flow and Port toolpaths
Multi-axis toolpaths require the machine definition to have one

rotary axis for 4-axis output, and two rotary axes for 5-axis output. To
enable the multi-axis toolpath menu selections and toolbar, select a
37
multi-axis machine as the current machine definition.
In this section, you will learn to create multi-axis toolpaths using
functions in the Toolpaths, Multi-axis drop-down menu. These tool-
path functions provide you with enhanced flexibility in the genera-
38
tion of tool axis vectors, the flow of tool movement over surfaces and
solids, and the projection of curves, points, or surfaces onto surfaces
or solids.
5-axis Curve toolpath: Cuts 3D curves or surface edges. You

39
can compensate the tool tip to the
actual curve, or project the curves onto
surfaces. Curve 5-axis supports several
methods for controlling the tool axis
310
through planes, chains, points, or
surfaces
5-axis Drill toolpath: Allows you to control the tool axis at

each drill position in the operation. The
tool tip can be compensated to a
surface, to a projected point along the
tool axis vector, or to the entity selected
for the drill position.
5-axis Swarf toolpath: Cuts along part walls using the side of
the cutter. Tapered tools can be used on
swarf toolpaths when not using surfaces
for the floor.
5-axis Multi-surface Uses a set of pattern surfaces to control

toolpath: the flow of tool motion and can
compensate to a different set of
surfaces. Tool axis vectors can be gener-
ated through points, a plane, surfaces,
or through a chain of curves.
5-axis Flowline Allows precise control of the scallops

toolpath: left on the part or constant distance
stepovers, creating an exact, smooth
finish. The 5-axis output provides two
degrees of freedom for the tool vectors
in any direction.
5-axis Port toolpath: Machines a cylinder port using

compensation from a pattern surface to
the inside of one or more cut surfaces.
This toolpath type requires that the set
of port surfaces form a closed shape,
and supports only ball and lollipop tool
types.
4-axis Rotary toolpath: Works best on closed surface parts. Like

other 4-axis toolpaths, the tool is kept in
a plane that is perpendicular to the
rotary axis. You can select the X, Y, or Z
axis about which the rotary axis rotates.
Note: Generating multi-axis toolpaths for a machine tool usually

requires post processor customization. For more information on
customizing the post processor for a multi-axis machine tool and
control, contact your Mastercam Reseller.
Selecting Geometry for 5-axis Toolpaths

After selecting a 5-axis toolpath type from the Toolpaths, Multi-axis
menu, you use an interactive dialog box to define parameters, and
3
then return to the graphics window to select the geometry for the 5-
axis toolpath. Although each dialog box is different, they share many
of the same parameters, as illustrated in the examples below.
Figure 3-36: Curve 5-axis dialog box
32
3
34
35
36
Figure 3-37: Drill 5-axis dialog box
37
38
39
310
Follow these general guidelines when selecting geometry for a 5-axis

toolpath (not all options may apply, based on the selected toolpath
type):
The Output Format determines which options are available
for geometry selection. Select 3-axis, 4-axis, or 5-axis.
Select the Curve Type or Entity Type and select the geometry
for the tool to follow.
Select the method for Tool Axis Control. Mastercam aligns
the tool axis to the selected geometry or a plane.
Choose a Tip Control method to set tool tip compensation.
Select the Surfaces to be cut, either the cut pattern or the
part surfaces (Comp to surfaces).
Select Check Surfaces (the areas in the part to be aware of
but stay away from).
Note: To edit the geometry selection after creating the toolpath,

double–click the toolpath’s Geometry icon in the Toolpath
Manager.
Lathe Toolpath Types

With Mastercam Lathe, you can create many different toolpaths for
turning machines, from roughing and finishing inside and outside
diameters to C-axis (mill/turn) programming. Mastercam Lathe also
includes grooving, threading, drilling, facing and cutoff toolpaths for
all your lathe machining needs.
When you choose a Lathe machine definition from the Machine Type
menu, the Toolpaths menu displays the lathe toolpath types you can
create. This includes a number of mill toolpaths you choose from the
Toolpaths, Mill submenu.
Note: For more information on using Mill toolpath functions, see

Mill Toolpath Types on page 203.
IMPORTANT: When creating a Mill toolpath with a Lathe

machine definition, you must manually set the tool plane
(Tplane) and construction plane (Cplane). You can use the Tool-
3
paths, Mill, CView utility, or the Plane functions in the Status
Bar. For more information, see Using the CView Utility on page
223 and Setting Planes / Views / WCS on page 118.
32
In this section, you will learn about the different toolpath types you
can create with Mastercam Lathe, including:
General Turning Toolpaths
Mill / Turn Toolpaths (page 222)
3
Miscellaneous Operations (page 224)
General Turning Toolpaths

34
Use the following Lathe toolpath types in applications where the
stock rotates on a spindle and the tooling is fixed. Typically, these are
2D toolpaths in which all tool motion takes place within a single
plane. General turning toolpath types include: 35
Face toolpath: Prepares the face of the part for further
machining. Once the face of the part is
clean, you can use it to set tools or deter-
mine tool offsets. 36
Rough toolpath: Quickly removes large amounts of stock in
preparation for a finish pass.
Finish toolpath: Follows the part geometry, making final cuts

on the part and, if applicable, refining the
37
roughing toolpath. Unlike the quick finish
and canned finish toolpaths, when you
create a “standard” lathe finish toolpath, a
roughing toolpath is not required. 38
Groove toolpath: Allows you to machine indented or recessed
areas that are not otherwise machinable by
roughing toolpaths or tools.
39
310
Drill toolpath: Creates a lathe drill toolpath, usually by

drilling into the face of the part along the
centerline, using a selected drill cycle. Avail-
able drill cycles are based on the active
control definition, and may include Drill/
Counterbore (long), Bore #1 and #2, Peck
Drill (long), Misc #1 and #2, Chip break
(long), Tap, or Custom cycle 9–20.
Thread toolpath: Creates spiral shapes on a part to make a

screw, bolt, or nut, You can program straight
or tapered threads on the outside, inside, or
face of a part.
Cutoff toolpath: Vertically cuts off pieces of the part, such as

sections of bar stock. You do not chain
geometry for a cutoff toolpath. Instead, you
select the point where the part is cut off, and
then select a tool and use the Cutoff Param-
eters tab to define the toolpath.
Lathe Quick Use Lathe Quick toolpath menu functions

toolpaths: to create simple toolpaths with only a few
parameters. Quick toolpath types include
quick rough, finish, and groove toolpaths.
Lathe Canned Use Lathe Canned toolpath menu functions

toolpaths: to create very efficient NC programs using
your CNC machine controller’s canned cycle
programs. Based on the active machine and
control definition, canned toolpath types
may include canned rough, finish, groove,
or pattern repeat toolpaths.
Mill / Turn Toolpaths

Mill / turn toolpaths use “live” tooling in which the tool rotates in its
own spindle. The part can be stationary in the chuck or the part
spindle can be programmed as a rotary axis (C-axis). You use tool
planes (Tplanes) to specify how the tool is oriented with respect to the
part.
Mill / turn machines come in two styles: C-axis and Y-axis.
The C-axis machine, which is more common, provides linear
motion in the X and Z axes and rotary motion around the C
axis.
Y-axis machines support the C-axis motion and have an

additional linear axis that allows the milling tool to move
above and below the spindle's center line. 3
C-axis Contour Toolpath Types
32
C-axis Contour Creates a rotary toolpath that wraps
toolpath: around the spindle axis.
C-axis Cross-contour
toolpath:
Cuts parallel to the spindle axis, for
example, to cut a slot lengthwise on
3
the part.
C-axis Face Contour Machines chained geometry or a

toolpath: contour on the face of a part.
34
C-axis Drill Toolpath Types
C-axis Drill Creates a rotary axis drill toolpath that

35
toolpath: wraps around the spindle axis (axis substi-
tution).
C-axis Cross Drill

toolpath:
Drills from the side towards the centerline
or off-center.
36
CView Utility: Drills on the face of the part parallel to the
centerline, but not necessarily on the
centerline. 37
Using the CView Utility
Many C-axis toolpaths automatically set the Tplane and Cplane for
you. However, mill toolpaths do not. Use the CView Utility function
38
and dialog box to set Tplanes and Cplanes for these toolpath types.
IMPORTANT: The Tplane and Cplane orientation you set with

the CView utility function remains in effect until you change it,
39
either by using the Planes function in the Status bar, or by
choosing a toolpath type from the Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths
menu. These toolpath types have a pre-defined orientation that
is automatically set.
310
Miscellaneous Operations
You use miscellaneous operations to manipulate the stock and
program the movements of peripherals like tailstocks, chucks, and
steady rests. These toolpaths might output M-codes or G-codes. You
can program miscellaneous operations only for peripherals that are
supported by the active machine definition.
Lathe stock transfer Lets you program operations on the oppo-

toolpath: site side or back of a lathe part in the same
Mastercam file.
Lathe stock advance Creates an operation that repositions the

toolpath: stock in the spindle or controls a bar
feeder.
Lathe stock flip Outputs a comment and program stop in

toolpath: the NC code, which lets the operator
manually remove the stock and reposition
(flip) it in the chuck. You can program
stock flip operations on the opposite side
and back of a lathe part in the same
Mastercam file.
Lathe Chuck Creates an operation that will clamp,

toolpath: unclamp, and reposition the chuck.
Lathe Tailstock Creates an operation to reposition the

toolpath: tailstock.
Lathe steady rest Creates an operation that repositions the

toolpath: steady rest.
Router Toolpath Types

In addition to all of the Mastercam Mill toolpath types, Mastercam
Router provides all the controls you need to create block or “gang”
drill toolpaths, including those used with straight and “T” block drills.
Block drill toolpaths optimize the drilling routine by dropping the
correct drills according to the drill pattern you specify.
Mastercam Router supports a wide variety of tool shapes and types,
including Right Angle (RA) and Compound Angle (CA) head control.
This aggregate head programming allows you to apply RA and CA
heads to your traditional toolpaths.
Mastercam Router features include VBScript support and cabinet
design software links. Depending on the Mastercam Router product
you have installed, you may also have Nesting and Engraving toolpath
functions.
Nesting allows you to fit parts onto a sheet of material for
best yield. Nesting operates on geometry or toolpaths.
3
Engraving gives you the effect of classic hand-carved art
using your CNC machine. Sharp inside corners, created by
the Z-axis climbing in the corners, give the finished piece a
crisp edge, which is unattainable with conventional
32
machining.
Block Drilling Toolpaths 3

Mastercam Router shares the Mastercam Mill drill toolpaths and also
allows you to create block drilling operations. Block drill toolpaths
create holes in parts at specified locations using tooling containing
multiple drills. To create these toolpaths, the size and spacing of the
arcs must match the size and spacing of the drills on the block.
34
Working with Aggregate Heads
Mastercam organizes aggregate tooling information in a hierarchy of
35
heads, blocks, and tool stations.
Heads are complete assemblies that respond to axis
commands and move as a unit.
Blocks are mounted on heads and hold the individual tool
36
stations.
Tool stations are mounted on the block and hold individual
tools.
Mastercam supports right-angle, compound-angle, and vertical
37
blocks. The offset is the distance from the center of the block base to a
known position on the machine tool. The offset is represented as a
38
39
310
coordinate position. For example, X100 Y0 Z0 would place the aggre-

gate block 100mm in X from the reference point.
Z
Y
X
Aggregate position offset
shown in side view
Nesting Toolpaths
Nesting is the process of fitting multiple copies of a part within a
boundary (material sheet) for best yield. Parts can be nested next to
each other or even within each other to provide the most efficient use
of the material. Mastercam Nesting is an add-on to other Mastercam
products, such as Mastercam Router, Mill, and Wire.
You can choose to nest geometry or toolpaths. You can bring in geom-
etry from a file or chain it in the graphics window. To use toolpaths for
nesting, they must already be defined in the current part file.
The Nesting add-on to Mastercam provides two modes of operation:
Rectangular and TrueShape.
Rectangular nesting places a bounding box around the part
and uses the box as the part boundary for nesting. Rectan-
gular nesting supports a subset of the TrueShape nesting
functionality and is provided with Mastercam Router Entry

and Router Pro.
3
32
3
34
TrueShape nesting extends nesting functionality beyond
Rectangular nesting by creating interlocking copies of
different parts to provide maximum material usage. The
graphic below shows a part (geometry only) nested with
35
TrueShape nesting. Copies of the part or toolpath are fitted
together using the part shape, a rotation angle, reversing the
copy (mirror), and other parameters. With TrueShape
Nesting, Mastercam nests the parts or toolpaths within the
sheet boundary regardless of its shape, allowing you to use
36
irregular shaped sheets.
37
38
39
310
Note: TrueShape nesting is a separately-purchased option for

Mastercam Design, Router, Mill, and Wire. For more information,
contact your local Mastercam Reseller.
Nesting Tips and Guidelines

Save common sheet sizes to nested sheet libraries (.NSL files)
or in individual MCX files.
To create as many sheets as needed to accommodate the
number of parts, choose Create necessary quantity in the
Sheets tab.
Save common parts to nested part libraries (.NPL files) or in
MCX files.
When you are satisfied with the nesting results, save the
nesting session to create a .NST file you can reuse. The .NST
file contains part information and nesting session parame-
ters.
When you require a controlled number of each part in the
nesting session, create a group.
To read a detailed report about the nesting results, choose
Details in the Nesting Results dialog box.
Engraving Toolpaths
When creating Engraving toolpaths, you can define roughing,
finishing, and remachining operations. Engraving generates a
contour-like finish pass as part of the roughing operation.
TIP: Although engraving toolpaths do not require roughing,

you can use roughing to clean out cavities as an alternative to
pocketing.
Engraving Tips and Guidelines

Engraving requires closed boundaries and a V-groove (or
chamfer) tool.
Inner boundaries are islands you can emboss by selecting
Rough in the Roughing/finishing tab.
To remove material from a cavity, use an engraving roughing
toolpath and a straight (flat) bit. In the Engraving parame-
ters tab, enter an Angle for flat cutter offset that matches
the V-groove tool you selected for engraving. Set the XY
stock to leave value to leave material for the finish pass.
After creating the roughing operation, reselect the geometry
3
and create an engraving toolpath to carve the geometry with
the V-groove tool.
When creating a roughing operation for engraving, set the
Tolerance in the Roughing/Finishing tab to a value smaller
32
than the XY stock to leave value (specified in the Engraving
parameters tab) but larger than the default. A looser toler-
ance will reduce the size of the NC program. After creating
the roughing operation, reselect the geometry and create a
remachining operation to clean up areas of material left by
3
the roughing operation.
An engraving remachining toolpath uses a smaller tool to
remove material that cannot be removed by the roughing
tool, and then makes a finish pass. You can calculate the
34
material to be removed either from the previous operation or
from the dimensions of the roughing tool.
Note: If you use a previous operation to calculate the remaining 35

stock for an engraving remachining operation, you cannot rear-
range the operations later in the Toolpath Manager.
36
Toolpath Chaining Techniques
Chaining is the process you use to select and link pieces of geometry
so that they form the foundation of a toolpath, surface, or solid. This
topic provides general information on chaining geometry to create
37
toolpath operations.
When you chain geometry, you select one or more sets of curves
(lines, arcs, and splines) that have adjoining endpoints. Most tool-
paths require geometry to be chained. Chaining determines the direc-
38
tion of tool travel during machining.
39
310
Working with Open and Closed Chains

Chains are open or closed.
Open chain Closed chain
In an open chain the start and end points are different coordinates.
Examples of open chains are single lines or arcs. An open chain may
consist of a single entity or several contiguous entities. Partial
chaining is a method of selecting entities as open chains.
In a closed chain the start and end points share the same coordinates.
Closed chains typically consist of several entities that have adjacent
end points and that form a closed boundary. Examples of closed
chains are rectangles or circles.
Mastercam determines chaining direction differently for open chains
than closed chains. In an open chain, the start point is placed at the
end of the chain closest to the selection point and the chain direction
points to the opposite end of the chain. In a closed chain, you set
default values in the Chaining Options dialog box that determine
whether the chaining direction for closed chains is clockwise, coun-
terclockwise, or based on the cursor position.
TIP: When creating open and closed chains, use options in the
Chaining dialog box to reverse the chain direction, and move
the start or end position of the chain.
Chaining Direction
All chains have a direction. Direction for closed chains is either clock-
wise or counterclockwise, while the direction for open chains points
toward one of the chain endpoints. The chaining direction deter-
mines the direction of tool movement in a toolpath.
In surface creation, Mastercam uses chaining direction to synchro-
nize the chains to create a smooth, regular surface. Errors in estab-
lishing chaining direction often result in a twisted surface that cannot
be machined. In the example below, the arrow shows the counter-
clockwise chaining direction for a closed chain that consists of several

lines and arcs. The chain starts at the base point of the arrow.
3
32
Chaining arrow
3
Closed chain for pocket toolpath. This chain consists of
several lines and arcs and has a counterclockwise direction. 34
Chaining Contour Toolpaths
You can chain 2D geometry, 3D geometry, or a combination of 2D and
3D geometry for contour toolpaths. Chaining 2D geometry generates
35
a 2D contour toolpath. Mastercam automatically defaults the
Contour type to 2D if you chain only 2D geometry.
If you chain 3D geometry or a combination of 2D and 3D geometry,
you can choose to create either a 2D or 3D contour toolpath.
36
2D chaining contours offset and flatten 3D geometry to an
absolute depth, relative to the construction plane.
3D chaining contours offset 3D geometry with depths 37
matching the chains, then add the incremental depth value.
Synchronizing Chains
Many Mastercam functions, such as surface creation and ruled tool-
38
paths, use chain synchronization. Choose a synchronization mode
(sync mode) if you have attempted to create a toolpath and found that
39
310
it twists as shown below. The twisting could affect the surface of the
part, making it unmachinable or irregular.
Original geometry
Sync mode set to None
Sync mode set to By Branch
When synchronizing chains, Mastercam breaks a chain into a number

of separate chains for the purpose of creating the toolpath or surface.
Use the Sync mode setting in the Chaining Options dialog box to
define how you want to divide the chains. You can also set a default
startup Sync mode on the Settings, Configuration dialog box
Chaining properties page.
Selecting Tools
In this section, you will learn about selecting tools and setting feeds,
speeds, and other general toolpath parameters. For most mill, router,
and lathe toolpath types, the Toolpath Parameters tab displays after
you chain or select geometry, solids, or surfaces for a new toolpath.
You can also access this tab by clicking the Parameters icon in the
Toolpaths Manager list.
Note: Changing parameters after creating a toolpath may require

you to regenerate the toolpath.
TIP: In the Toolpath Manager list, click the Parameters icon to

access all Toolpath Parameters dialog box tabs, such as Tool-
path parameters, Pocket parameters, Roughing / Finishing
3
parameters, and so on.
Selecting a tool 32
The Toolpath parameters tab options vary, based on the selected tool-
path type. However, there are many common fields for all toolpath
types and the method you use to select a tool is basically the same.
Mill and router toolpath parameters are very similar. Lathe toolpaths 3
share some mill and router toolpath parameters but also include
many that are unique to lathe machine tools. To become more
familiar with the differences and similarities between Mill / Router
and Lathe toolpath parameters, compare the following examples.
Figure 3-38: Example: Mill Pocket Toolpath parameters tab
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Figure 3-39: Example: Lathe Rough Toolpath parameters tab
Note: For detailed information on individual fields in the Tool-

path parameters tab for a specific toolpath type, refer to the
online Help.
Use the large area in the left section of the Toolpath parameters tab to
select a tool for the operation. All tools that have been added to or are
used in the current machine group display in this area by default.
To change the tools display, similar to setting Windows file view
options, right–click in this area and choose an option from the View
menu.
If you display tools in a list, you can sort the list by clicking on column
headers. To reorder the columns, click and drag them to new posi-
tions.
Use one of the following methods to select a tool:
3
In the tool display area, click the tool you want to use.
If the tool you want is not displayed, choose Select library
tool. This opens the Tool Selection dialog box where you can
32
select a tool from the current tool library, or from any tool
library you choose.
Use the right–click menu option to Create new tool and
define the tool. 3
IMPORTANT: Any new tool definitions you create are stored
only in the current machine group, unless you save them to a
tool library. 34
When you select a tool, the other fields in the Toolpath parameters
dialog box tabs update with default values that you can override.
Default parameters can come from the tool definition, machine and
control definition, and the operation defaults. The machine group
35
properties define the source of the default values for many of the
parameters.
Using the Toolpath Parameters Right–click Menu

36
When you right–click anywhere in the Toolpath parameters tab—with
the exception of the Comments text box, you can choose the
following options from an extensive right–click menu. 37
Figure 3-40: Toolpath Parameters right–click menu
Mill / Router Lathe

38
39
310
Managing Toolpath Operations

In the Toolpath Manager, each operation has a name that describes
the type of machining action it includes, such as Surface Rough Flow-
line. A single part can have many operations within one or more
machine groups and toolpath groups.
Each operation has at least four parts:
Figure 3-41: Example: Operation details in Toolpath Manager
Toolpath Parameters: Includes all the machining informa-

tion, such as tool selection, number of cutting passes, etc.
Tool definition: Information about the size and shape of

the tool.
Part geometry: Contains the geometry selections for the

part or section you are machining.
Toolpath: A separate intermediate file that contains all of

the toolpath data. The post-processor uses the NCI file to
create an NC file for your specific machine/control.
To view and edit this information, click an icon in the Toolpath

Manager list. Operations that are more detailed and specific to a
selected machine and toolpath type provide additional icons repre-
senting information you can view and edit.
Lathe-specific—For lathe toolpaths, click the Update Stock / Do not
update stock icon to enable or disable this feature. When enabled,
as shown below, Mastercam Lathe provides you with feedback on
the stock shape as it is machined.
Figure 3-42: Example: Lathe Operation details
Surface toolpaths—For surface toolpaths, you can click additional

geometry icons to view and edit information on the Drive surfaces,
Check surfaces, Containment boundaries, Start points menus, and

CAD files used in the operation.
Figure 3-43: Example: Surface Operation details 3
32
3
Flowline toolpaths—For flowline toolpaths, you can also view and
edit flowline information for the toolpath by selecting the Geom-
etry - Flowline Data icon.
Figure 3-44: Example: Flowline Operation details
34
35
Using Toolpath Manager icons 36
Toolpath Manager icons are visual indicators that represent different
types of information about the operations in a machine group and
their status. Each icon you may see in the Toolpath Manager and its
purpose is described below.
37
Operations Folder icons
Operation folder: Contains the operation components
such as toolpath parameters, tool parameters, and
38
geometry or solids.
Selected Operation: When you select an operation, the

folder displays a blue check mark. You select operations
to collectively perform certain functions on the selected
39
group, such as regenerate, backplot or verify.
310
Parameters icons
Toolpath parameters: Opens the Toolpath Parameters
dialog box where you can select a tool, set feeds, speeds,
and other general toolpath parameters.
Subprogram: Indicates that the operation contains one

or more subprograms and opens the related dialog box
for transform or non-transform operations. (A subpro-
gram is an NC program that is called from the main NC
program to repeat code within an operation.)
Tool icon
Tool parameters: Opens the Define Tool dialog box
where you can define the tool and its parameters for the
operation.
Lathe tool parameters: Click to open the Lathe Tools

dialog box where you can define the tool type, insert,
holder, and cutting parameters.
Generic Geometry icon

Geometry: Allows you to edit the geometry by opening
the appropriate editing function, such as the Drill Point
Manager, or Chain Manager.
Solid / Surfaces icons

Solid/Surfaces: Indicates that the operation contains a
solid, a surface, or a combination of solids, surfaces, and
geometry. Use this option to open the associated editing
function, such as the Toolpath / Surface Selection dialog
box.
Geometry Drive surfaces: Provides access to the Drive

surface selection menu for surface toolpaths.
Check surfaces: Opens the Edit Drive Geometry dialog

box where you can make changes to drive surfaces.
Geometry Containment boundaries: Opens the Chain

Manager where you can select containment boundaries
for surface toolpaths.
Start points: Identifies start points of surface geometry

and allows you to reselect a start point.
Flowline: Applies only to surface flowline toolpaths and

allows you to change flowline parameters.
CAD file: Indicates that a CAD file was selected for a

3
surface toolpath. Use this option to select a different
CAD file.
Toolpath Operation icons

32
Toolpath on: Toolpath display is on (icon is blue).
Toolpath off: Toolpath display is off (icon is gray). 3

Toolpath not restored: The file has not been restored (via
a toolpath regeneration) since the file was opened with
the “restore NCI” option deselected (icon is light blue).
34
Toolpath locked: Toolpath has been edited after regener-
ation. Toolpath editor, highfeed machining, and batch
processing all lock the toolpath. Locking prevents unin-
tentional regeneration. To reverse locking, click the Lock
35
button at the top of the Toolpath Manager.
Posting off: Posting is turned off for the toolpath. To

reverse the posting status, click the Post button at the
top of the Toolpath Manager.
36
Dirty toolpath: The toolpath needs to be regenerated.
This happens if you have changed certain parameters of
the underlying geometry. To regenerate toolpaths, use
the Regenerate buttons at the top of the Toolpath
37
Manager. You can choose to regenerate all invalid tool-
paths, or only those you select.
Update stock enabled: Indicates that the Mastercam

Lathe update option is enabled, allowing Mastercam to
38
provide feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
Update stock disabled: Indicates that the Mastercam

Lathe update option is disabled. Mastercam will not
provide feedback on the stock shape as it is machined.
39
Batch: Indicates that in the Tool parameters tab the
operation has been marked “to Batch”. The operation is
set to batch mode and will be processed separately from
other operations. (This parameters is not available in
310
Mastercam Wire.)
TIP: If you choose to backplot, verify or post process a dirty,

unlocked operation, a message informs you that the selected
operations may require regeneration. You can choose whether
to regenerate the operations before continuing with the func-
tion. If you choose not to regenerate, the dirty operations are
processed “as is” by the selected function. This message does
not appear if you choose to backplot, verify or post operations
that are dirty and locked. In this case, the function proceeds
without interruption and the information in the binary NCI file is
used “as is.” For more information on using these functions,
see Backplotting Operations on page 249, Verifying Operations
on page 252, and Post Processing on page 255.
Displaying Toolpaths
When you generate a toolpath, the tool motion is drawn in the
graphics window. Sometimes the display of multiple toolpaths can
obscure the geometry and each other. You may find it simpler to work
with toolpath display turned off.
Showing / Hiding All Toolpaths—To show or hide the display of all
toolpaths in the graphics window, position the cursor in the
graphics window and press the Alt key and the T key [Alt+T] at the
same time. This key sequence toggles the visibility of all toolpaths
on and off in the graphics window.
Showing / Hiding Selected Toolpaths—To change the display state of
one or more toolpaths, in Toolpath Manager select one or more
toolpath operations and press T [Select+T]. Mastercam turns off
the toolpath display for the selected toolpaths. To turn the display
back on, press T again. This is especially helpful if you are working
with a complex part and want to view only specific toolpaths.
When you use this technique to turn off the display of individual
operations, they are not affected by pressing [Alt+T] in the
graphics window. They remain “hidden” until you press T again
when the cursor is positioned in the Toolpath Manager.
Notes:
• You may need to repaint the display after toggling the toolpath
display on and/or off.
• Toolpaths will not be displayed for operations marked dirty
until they are regenerated.
Guidelines for Working with Operations

Single–click on the text or icon of an operation to select it.
The icon of the selected operation appears with a blue check
3
mark.
To select multiple operations, hold down the Ctrl key and
click the text or icon associated with the operations you want
to select.
32
Copy or move operations within the list by dragging and
dropping. Operations that are copied and moved from one
group to another will take on the properties of the new group.
Subgroups can also be moved into positions of parent
3
groups.
Note: If the operation being copied or moved is not compatible

with the machine setup for the machine group, a message
informs you, and asks if you want to cancel the copy/move or
34
accept Mastercam's attempt to modify the operation to fit the
machine definition.
Deleted operations can be restored by using the Undelete

35
command from the right–click menu. You can undelete an
operation up until you load another file or exit Mastercam.
To quickly and easily add a comment to an operation, single
click it, then click it again as if to rename it. When the opera-
36
tion text disappears, type in your comment and either click
somewhere else or press Enter. The comment appears at the
end of the operation text as well as in the Comments field in
the Toolpath parameters tab for the selected operation. 37
IMPORTANT: The text you enter in this manner overwrites
any comment text you have already entered for that operation.
To hide most of the text that appears next to the list icons, use
38
the Display command in the right–click menu.
39
310
Editing Operations
Toolpath Manager icons and right–click menu functions offer many
flexible methods you can use to edit operations. So far in this chapter,
you have learned about using Toolpath Manager icons to:
Edit a machine definition (page 159)
Set machine group properties (page 197)
View and edit toolpath operations (page 236)
This section provides information on how to use the Toolpath
Manager right–click menu and its Edit selected operations submenu
functions. In this section, you will learn about:
Editing Common Changing the NC File

Parameters (page Name (page 245)
243)
Renumbering Tools Renumbering Work

(page 246) Offsets (page 247)
Reversing Toolpaths Recalculating Feeds /

(page 248) Speeds (page 248)
To access these editing functions, select one or more operations in the

Toolpath Manager, right–click and choose an editing function from
the Edit selected operations submenu.
Note: Prior to choosing an editing function from this submenu,

you must first select the operations you want to edit in the Tool-
path Manager list.
Editing Common Parameters

Use the Edit common parameters function and dialog box to effi-
ciently edit parameters shared by a selected group of operations. The
3
operations you can update with this function must be in the same
machine group.
Figure 3-45: Edit Common Parameters dialog box: 32
3
34
35
36
37
38
The large area in the left side of the dialog box lists all selected opera-
tions in ascending order by operation number.
Use the check box next to each field in this dialog box to select the
fields you want to edit. This flexible design lets you implement
39
changes to one field, all fields, or any combination of fields you
choose. When you click OK or Apply, only selected (activated) fields
and their associated values are used to edit the operations in the list.
310
TIPS:
• Use the Select all and Deselect all buttons,
located in the lower left corner, to quickly
select / deselect all fields.
• To deselect (disable) the Clearance or Retract fields for all
edited operations, select the check box next to the field and
choose Disable from the Use drop-down list.
Note: If a change does not fit an operation in the list, it is ignored

during the update process. For example, changes to Feed plane do
not affect a drilling operation. Also, before accepting a change, the
update process verifies that the change can be supported by the
machine group’s Machine Definition and Control Definition. If it
cannot, a message identifies the field and conflict, and no change
occurs.
After selecting a field, use one of the following methods to change it:
Type a value in the field
Click the field button and set parameters in the related dialog
box
Select a value from a drop-down list
To update the operations with your changes, click OK or Apply.
Use the Abs/Inc drop-down list to choose a plane setting for the
selected field and specified value. Most toolpaths provide Clearance,
Retract, Feed plane, Top of stock, and Depth parameters you enter in
either absolute or incremental values. Absolute values are always
measured from the origin. Incremental values are relative to other
parameters or chained geometry. For example, incremental Depth
and Top of Stock parameters are relative to the location of the chained
geometry. The Clearance, Retract, and Feed plane are relative to the
Top of stock.
All tools added to or used in the active machine group appear in the
large area below the Tool field. To choose a tool and apply it to all
selected operations, start by selecting the Tool check box. This acti-
vates the Tool selection option. Then select a tool by clicking it. Use
the Filter check box and button to modify the tool display. To access
the Tool Selection dialog box and its options, click the Select library
tool button. You can also pick additional options from the menu that
displays when you right–click in the Tool area.
Figure 3-46: Edit Common Parameters, Tool right–click menu
3
Use the Propagate button in conjunction with the operations
list to copy one or more selected fields from one operation to
32
all other operations in the list. First, select the operation you
want to copy fields from by clicking it in the list. The opera-
tion is highlighted to indicate its selection. Click Propagate
to update all common parameters fields with values from the 3
selected operation. Then select one or more fields to apply,
edit them as necessary, and click Apply. The selected fields
and values are applied to all operations in the Edit Common
Parameters list. To use another operation to propagate and
update additional fields, repeat this procedure. To accept the
34
changes and exit the function, click OK rather than Apply.
TIP: To update the common parameter values with those used

in a selected operation, rather than select an operation and 35
click the Propagate button, you can simply double–click the
operation.
Changing the NC File Name

36
The Change NC file name function lets you specify the name of the
NC file to use when posting output for one or more operations. The
changed setting is applied to all operations you selected in the Tool-
path Manager list prior to choosing the function.
37
Figure 3-47: Enter toolpath name dialog box
38
39
310
IMPORTANT: This setting overrides the NC output file setting

specified for the machine group in the Machine Group Proper-
ties Files tab, Toolpath name field. However, the file will be
saved to the location specified by the data path entered in the
Files tab, Toolpath name field. This location displays in the
Enter new NC name dialog box, as illustrated above.
Renumbering Tools
The Renumber tools function makes it easy to renumber the tools
used in the selected operations, and optionally, those that have been
saved with the part file but are not used in any of its operations. For
example, you might use this function when reprogramming a job for a
different machine tool.
Note: Tools are renumbered based on the current order of opera-

tions.
Figure 3-48: Renumber Tools dialog box
The Starting tool number and Tool number increment fields

are required fields; others are optional.
To renumber all the tools that have been saved to the part
file, regardless of whether they are used in its operations,
select the Also renumber tools not used in any operation
option. Deselect this option to renumber only the tools that
are included in the selected operations.
When you return to the Toolpath Manager after accepting

work offset changes, Regenerate all selected operations.
Renumbering Work Offsets

3
Use this function to renumber the work offsets for non-transform
operations within the Toolpath Manager.
Figure 3-49: Renumber Work Offsets dialog box
32
3
34
35
Note: Tools are renumbered based on the current order of opera-
tions.
36
The Starting work offset number and Work offset number
increment fields are required fields; others are optional.
When you apply your changes, any work offset information
37
previously defined for the selected operations is updated
with the renumbering information you provided.
38
39
310
Reversing Toolpaths
The Reverse toolpath function allows you to transpose the
machining direction and swap the side where cutter compensation in
control is applied for selected operations. If cutter compensation in
control is off in the toolpath, it remains off; only the machining direc-
tion is reversed.
After reversing a toolpath, the NCI file is automatically locked
to prevent you from regenerating the toolpath.
Recalculating Feeds / Speeds

Use this function to adjust the feed rate, plunge rate, retract rate, and
spindle speed for multiple toolpaths based on a new stock material.
This process requires that the feed calculation be set to Material.
MACHINING / Backplot and Verify • 249
Backplot and Verify

3
In this section, you will learn to use the Toolpath Manager Backplot
and Verify functions as part of the machining process.
32
Backplotting Operations
Backplotting simulates tool motion for selected operations.
This animated display allows you to view the cutting process
in the graphics window in a manner similar to stepping
3
through or running a video file.
Use Backplot to spot errors in a program before machining the part.
To begin backplotting, select one or more operations in the Toolpath
Manager list, then click the Backplot button. To move forward and
34
backward through the backplot simulation, use the Backplot VCR bar,
located above the graphics window.
Figure 3-50: Backplot VCR bar 35
Tra t for ward
Dr e ard
Fa p fo k
c w
e c
36
s r
St p ba
St ind
Set conditional stops

aw
op
w
y
e
Pla
Re
St
Run speed slider Visible motion position slider
You can run Backplot in Draw mode, which displays the toolpath as 37
the tool moves along, or Trace mode, which displays the entire tool-
path as the tool moves over it. The direction of each tool move is high-
lighted as the backplot progresses. The default colors are light blue at
the start and red at the end of each move, but you can set them to any
color you choose.
38
As you step through the toolpath, the Details tab of the Backplot
dialog box displays information on the type of move, and the Info tab
39
310
displays information such as cycle time and path length for the
selected operation.
Backplot dialog box and Backplot dialog box, Info tab

Details tab (default)
Use the Isolate option to select specific tool motion in the

toolpath for closer examination. Only selected tool moves
display. You can also isolate motion by selecting a path in the
Backplot operation list.
3
Use the Options button to customize backplot settings
such as tool display, holder display, and tool motion colors
using fields in the Backplot Options dialog box.
Figure 3-51: Backplot Options dialog box
32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
310
Verifying Operations
Use the Verify function in the Toolpath Manager to create a
3D simulation of machining selected operations. The model
created by this function represents the surface finish. It also
shows collisions, if any exist, and enables you to find and correct
program errors before they reach the shop floor.
Toolpath verification provides two modes of operation: Standard and
TrueSolid.
Standard mode uses pixel-based technology to represent the
machined part. If your installation does not include the True-
Solid verification add-on, you must use Standard mode for
3-, 4- and 5-axis toolpath verification. For information on
purchasing TrueSolid verification, contact your Mastercam
Reseller.
TrueSolid mode uses solid modeling technology for toolpath
simulation. TrueSolid also uses OpenGL graphics for
dynamic 3D solid rendering and animation. After verifying a
part in TrueSolid mode, you can rotate and magnify the part
to more closely check features, surface finish, or scallops.
Because of these enhanced capabilities, TrueSolid verifica-
tion is the best choice for toolpath simulation.
Notes:
• In Mastercam Lathe, use TrueSolid mode for best results.
• The Turbo feature shows the machined part without simu-
lating the tool motion. Selecting Turbo for either Standard or
TrueSolid verification may produce results more quickly. True-
Solid Turbo is available only for 3-axis toolpaths in Top view,
and does not support WCS or simulate part indexing.
Running the Verification

To begin verification, select one or more operations in the Toolpath
Manager list, then click the Verify button. Use the control buttons
3
located at the top of the Verify dialog box to start, pause, rewind, step
through, and fast forward through the verify simulation.
Figure 3-52: Verify dialog box 32
3
34
35
36
37
38
39
Use other options in this dialog box to:
Select the tool display mode: Turbo, Simulate tool, or Simu-
late tool and holder.
310
Set display parameters affecting movement, speed, and
quality of simulation.
Set stop/pause conditions.

Turn Verbose mode on or off.
Select verification speed.
Access Verify configuration settings and features, including
slice (cross section), measure, zoom, and options to save the
stock model.
If you select the Verbose check box on the Verify dialog box, the Verify
ribbon bar displays.
Figure 3-53: Verify ribbon bar
ion
s
te
at
ina
ns
rd
ff
pe
ee
/o
oo
om
on
sp
nc
e
rat
rc
nt
le
de
io
ind
ola
tte
sit
ed
co
Sp
Co
Cu
Po
Fe
G
When you stop the verification process, either by using a selected stop
option or with the VCR controls, this ribbon bar displays read-only
information about the tool move that occurred just prior to the stop
position. The coordinates for the stop position also display. If you
close the Verify controls dialog box , the ribbon bar also closes.
Note: While a verification is in progress, you cannot change the

tool display mode. You must wait for the verification process to
finish, then choose Restart.
MACHINING / Post Processing • 255
Post Processing
3
Post processing refers to the process by which the toolpaths in your
Mastercam part files are converted to a format that can be under-
stood by your machine tool's control (for example, G-codes). A
special program called a post processor reads the Mastercam file and
32
writes the appropriate NC code. Generally, every machine tool or
control will require its own post processor, customized to produce
code formatted to meet its exact requirements and user preferences.
In addition, you can customize a post processor to reflect job or shop
preferences, for example, safety blocks or tolerances.
3
Post processors have two components.
An executable file such as MP.DLL, which is provided with
Mastercam. This is often used “as is.” Custom executables
34
can be developed for advanced applications, as necessary.
A post customization script (.PST) which is used by MP.DLL
to customize the post output for your machine tool. It
includes format statements, processing logic, miscellaneous
35
integers and custom variable definitions, system variables,
etc. Mastercam includes a wide variety of working posts for
common machines and NC controllers, which can be further
customized for specific needs.
A single post executable (such as MP.DLL) produces NC output for a
36
wide variety of machines by reading different .PST files. You can use
one post executable with one or more .PST file.
IMPORTANT: If you are upgrading to Mastercam X from a

37
prior Mastercam version, please note the following informa-
tion:
• You must update post processors used with previous
Mastercam versions before using them with the current
38
version.
• Toolpath operations generated in previous versions of
Mastercam may be marked “dirty”, requiring you to regen-
erate them before post processing.
39
• Mastercam X handles lathe coordinates differently than
previous versions. This requires a modification to the post
processor.
310
Post Processors, and Control / Machine Definitions

Producing the correct NC code for your machine and application
requires properly configured machine definition, control definition,
and .PST files.
The machine definition file (.MMD, .LMD, or .RMD)
describes the physical capabilities of your machine. These
include the linear and rotary axes that are mounted on the
machine; the types of linear, rapid, and rotary motion the
axes are capable of, including limits; coolant options; axis
orientation; tool changers; and spindles, turrets, and chucks.
The selected control definition (.CONTROL) for the machine
definition provides information to the post processor about
the processing capabilities of the control. These include
machining tolerance values; machine cycles and subpro-
grams; feed rate dimensioning, and many other settings. The
control definition also includes defaults for file locations,
operation defaults files, tool settings and offsets, and other
referenced files.
The .PST file reads the information from the machine and
control definition and contains the processing logic and
format statements to generate the proper G-codes, M-codes
and other commands for your machine. It also contains
information that Mastercam reads to customize its interface
to support the post.
WARNING: Customizing the .PST file is an advanced, sophis-

ticated task that should only be attempted by knowledgeable
users, or your local Mastercam reseller. Programs created with
incorrect post processor files can cause your machine tool to
crash or behave in unpredictable ways. If you have any doubts,
please consult your Mastercam reseller for assistance or more
information!
About NCI files

Every toolpath or wirepath operation has an NCI file associated with
it. An NCI file is Mastercam's intermediate NC format. It contains all
the machining instructions and information for the NC file, but in a
generic format common to all machines. The post processor uses the
NCI file to create the final NC program for a specific machine or
control. The NCI file is the primary input for a Mastercam post
processor. In Mastercam X, the NCI file typically contains the tool-
paths for an entire machine group.
MACHINING / Post Processing • 257
Mastercam works with these NCI files in the background. You do not
work with them directly unless you are writing a post processor or
doing other very advanced work. 3
Post Processing Toolpath Operations
All the operations in the Mastercam part file are listed in the Toolpath
Manager. Before posting operations, review the machine settings for
each machine group. These settings include the name of the post
32
processor and the name of the NC file that will be written.
X To create a machine-readable NC program from your

Mastercam part file:
3
1 In the Toolpath Manager, select the operations you want to
post process. You can select operations from more than one
machine group. All selected operations marked with a blue
check mark will be post processed.
34
TIP: To access advanced options for selecting operations,
right–click in the Toolpath Manager and choose Select. For
example, you can select all the operations which use a partic-
ular tool, or which cut specific part geometry.
35
2 Click Post in the Toolpath Manager toolbar.
3 If you have not selected all the operations in a machine

36
group, you are asked if you want to post process all the opera-
tions.
To post all the operations in the selected machine group,
choose Yes.
37
To post only the selected operations, choose No.
4 In the Post processing dialog box, set the types of files to
create and indicate whether you want to view them in a text
editor as they are created. You can also choose to send the NC
38
files directly to the machine tool control.
5 To generate the NC files, click OK.
39
310
chapter 4
Examples
This chapter provides several sample applications that you can
complete step by step at your own pace. They introduce you to
Mastercam’s basic drafting tools, such as Sketcher, AutoCursor, and the
General Selection ribbon bar, and will help you understand how to
create and post several different kinds of toolpaths.
Example 1: 2D Geometry and Toolpaths . . . . . . . . . . page 261
(Mill, Router, or Design)
Example 2: Working in Different Planes . . . . . . . . . . . page 293
(Mill, Router, or Design)
Example 3: Lathe and Mill/Turn Applications . . . . . . page 333
(Lathe)
The part files which accompany the exercises can be found on your
workstation in the \Documentation\ExampleParts folder where
Mastercam was installed. To complete each exercise, you need to
have a license for the proper Mastercam product.
Completing the exercises requires that you successfully perform a
series of precise steps. As you learn to use Mastercam, these steps will
become intuitive, but if you are new to Mastercam, you will want to
take advantage of the following tutorial tips.
Read each step thoroughly before attempting to complete it.
Remember that you can get out of any function in progress
by pressing the [Esc] key one or more times.
Once you have completed a step, you can usually start that
step over by choosing Edit, Undo.
Save your tutorial project as a series of numbered files. For
example, when working through the first tutorial, save the
project as Elbow.mcx. As you work through the tutorial, save
the project often, renaming it each time as Elbow2.mcx,
Elbow3.mcx, and so on. This way, if you get unexpected
results, you can reload a previous version of the project and
so step back to a specific point in the exercise, rather than
having to start the tutorial from scratch.
EXAMPLES / • 261
Example 1: 2D Geometry and Toolpaths

4
The exercises in this section introduce the basic processes of a
complete machining job. First, you will draw the part using
Mastercam’s powerful Sketcher functions. Then you will create a
contour toolpath to machine the part. Finally, you will generate an NC
42
program that can be uploaded to your machine tool to cut it.
The drawing exercises require Mastercam Design, which
means they can be completed by any Mastercam user. Lathe
users who are new to Mastercam will also benefit from these
43
exercises.
The toolpath exercises require any product level of
Mastercam Mill or Mastercam Router.
Figure 4-1 shows the blueprint for the part you will create. It is a
4
simple plate cut out of an aluminum sheet.
Figure 4-1: 2D wireframe part
45
46
47
(metric)
48
49
Notice that this part is dimensioned in millimeters. Later in this section
you will learn how to switch between inch and metric operation.
The file EXAMPLE1.MCX in the \Documentation\ExampleParts

folder contains all the part geometry. The file EXAMPLE1 -
410
COMPLETE.MCX contains the part with the finished toolpaths.
Drawing 2D Wireframe Geometry

This set of exercises introduces you to Mastercam’s Sketcher functions
for creating geometry. At the end of this section, you should be able to
do the following:
Draw points, lines, arcs, and fillets using several different
techniques.
Copy, mirror, and trim geometry.
Show and hide the coordinate axes.
In addition, you will learn some other basic Mastercam skills:
Create and save new Mastercam files.
Switch between inch and metric modes.
Access the online help to answer questions and learn more
about Mastercam.
All the dimensions you need to draw this part are in the blueprint in
Figure 4-1 on page 261. This exercise and the ones that follow assume
that you are familiar with the basics of 2D and 3D coordinate geom-
etry (for example, what the X and Y axes are).
Exercise 1: Getting started

Before you can start drawing, you need to start Mastercam and open a
blank Mastercam file. Also, since this part is dimensioned in millime-
ters, those of you who normally work with inches will need to switch
to metric mode.
X Creating a new file

Follow these steps to start a new Mastercam Design session.
1 From the menu, choose Machine Type, Design.
2 Choose File, New.
3 If you were already working on a part, you will be prompted

to save it. Choose Yes if necessary.
EXAMPLES / • 263
When you choose File, New, The title bar in the Mastercam window should say Mastercam Design
Mastercam automatically and the Toolpath Manager should have no operations or machine
creates a new machine group
with the active machine defini-
groups.
4
tion. Choosing Design before
File, New prevents this.
42
43
X Switching between inch and metric modes
Mastercam is designed to work just as easily whether you are using
4
inch or metric units. Mastercam maintains several sets of configu-
ration settings in your installation directory (*.CONFIG files). To
switch between inch and metric operation, load the proper config-
uration file and Mastercam automatically switches the system
units.
45
If you are already working in metric mode, you do not need to
complete these steps. However, you would follow this procedure
when you need to work in inch mode. 46
If you open a file that was cre- 1 From the menu, choose Settings, Configuration.
ated with different units than
you are currently working in, The System Configuration dialog box opens up. Use it to set
Mastercam automatically
prompts you to switch to the
default values for many screen display and CAD functions.
2 From the list at the bottom of the dialog, select Default
47
correct units.
(Metric)
48
49
Note: To switch from metric to inch mode, select any .CONFIG file
that says English.
Your shop might use other .CONFIG files than those shown
410
here. If so, you can use any .CONFIG file as long as it says
Metric.
3 Click OK. The status indicator in the lower-right corner of

your screen should now display Metric.
Exercise 2: Creating construction guides

Start off by creating some construction guides that will help you
locate the other part geometry.
X Creating a base point

Create a convenient point that you can use as the basis for your
other geometry. In this case, it will be the center point of the arc at
the elbow.
1 From the menu, choose Create, Point, Create Point Posi-
tion. The Point ribbon bar appears.
2 Click on the FastPoint button on the AutoCursor ribbon bar.
3 Type the coordinates x50 y25 in the AutoCursor coordinates

field and press [Enter]:
4 Click OK to close the ribbon bar.
X Locating the first guideline

1 From the menu, choose Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint.
The Line ribbon bar appears on the screen, prompting you to
select the first point.
2 If the point you created does not display in the graphics
window, choose View, Fit to display the point in the center of
the graphics window. Then click the point to select it.
EXAMPLES / • 265
3 To locate the second endpoint, type 90 in the Length field on

the ribbon bar and press [Enter]:
4
4 When you move your cursor back to the graphics window,
Mastercam displays a 90mm line on the screen that is free to
move about the end point. Drag your mouse until the line
snaps into a horizontal position to the right of the point.
42
Click to fix the line in position.
X Drawing the second guideline

According to the blueprint, the second guideline is at an angle of 43
105 degrees to the first. Rather than trying to calculate the
endpoints, the easiest approach is to use polar coordinates to draw
the line.
The Line ribbon bar should still be active and on the screen. Even 4
though you have already created a line, it remains on the screen so
that you can create more lines until you click the OK button on the
ribbon bar, press [Esc], or choose another function.
1 If the Line ribbon bar is no longer on the screen, choose 45
Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint.
Click the Config button on the 2 Move the cursor near the left endpoint of the first line. Click
AutoCursor ribbon bar to control
which types of points Master-
cam will snap to.
to select it when the cursor changes shape as Mastercam
“snaps” to the endpoint. 46
3 Enter the line length and angle to define the other endpoint.
Click in the Length field and type 85.
47
4 Press [Tab] to move to the Angle field and type 105.
48
49
5 Press [Enter]. Mastercam draws the line.
6 From the menu, choose View, Fit to adjust the scale so that
all the geometry fits in the graphics window. 410
TIPS: You will use the View, Fit function often, so Mastercam
includes a number of shortcuts:
• Press [Alt+F1].
• Select the toolbar button:

• Use the right-click menu.
The part should look like the following picture:
X Using online help to learn more

Like most dialog boxes and ribbon bars in Mastercam, the Line
ribbon bar has a number of fields, buttons, and options. Whenever
you have a question, you can use Mastercam’s comprehensive
online help to get more information.
1 If the Line ribbon bar is no longer on the screen, choose
Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint.
EXAMPLES / • 267
Click the Help button. Mastercam displays the Help window.
4
42
43
Click How do I get here? to see the functions that lead to
this dialog box. 4
Scroll down the window to see a list of shortcut keys, or,
where applicable, right-click menu options.
Click on green text to expand subtopics.
Learn more links take you to more in-depth information.
45
Use the Contents tab to browse more help topics.
Use the Search tab to find information about specific
topics.
2 Click on the Button definitions tab. Mastercam shows you all
46
the fields and buttons on the ribbon bar. Click on any of them
to learn what it does.
3 At the bottom of every topic is an e-mail link to CNC Soft-
ware. Click on Let us know to send us any feedback about
47
the online help!
48
4 Close the Help window and close the Line ribbon bar.
X Saving your work

49
1 From the menu, choose File, Save. Name the file
elbow and click Save.
2 Position the cursor over the graphics window and press
[Alt+A]. Mastercam displays the AutoSave dialog box. Use it
410
to tell Mastercam to automatically save your work at regular
intervals.
3 Select Active to turn on AutoSave, and enter 10 to automati-

cally save your work every 10 minutes. Change other settings
so that your AutoSave options look like the following picture:
4 Click OK to save the changes and exit.
Exercise 3: Drawing arcs

In this exercise you will draw the arcs at the ends of the arms and at
the elbow. For the first arc, you’ll create a complete circle. Then for the
other arcs, you’ll learn some other drawing techniques.
X Creating an arc by drawing a circle

The simplest way to draw an arc is by creating a complete circle.
You will do this to create the first arc at the bend of the elbow.
1 From the menu, choose Create, Arc, Create Circle Center
Point. Mastercam displays the Circle Center Point ribbon bar
and prompts you to select the center point of the circle.
2 Click on the point where the two lines intersect.
3 In the Radius field on the ribbon bar, type 16 and press

[Enter].
Mastercam draws the circle.

EXAMPLES / • 269
X Creating arcs by selecting the endpoints

Mastercam gives you many ways for drawing arcs and complete
circles. Choose the method that works best based on the dimen-
sions that are known to you and how the arc is positioned relative
4
to your other geometry. For this example, since you know the
center point and radius and want to create an arc instead of a
complete circle, the Create Arc Polar function will work best.
1 From the menu, choose Create, Arc, Create Arc Polar.
42
Mastercam displays the Arc Polar ribbon bar.
2 In the radius field on the ribbon bar, type 16 and press
[Enter]. Click the Radius button to lock the value. 43
3 Click on the endpoint of the upper line to use it as the center

4
point.
4 Click to the right of the endpoint to locate the starting point
as shown in the following picture. You don’t need to be exact
because Mastercam will snap to the radius that you entered.
45
46
5 Click to the left of the arc to locate the other endpoint.

47
Mastercam draws the arc.
48
49
6 Repeat the previous three steps to draw the last arc around
410
the endpoint of the other line.
TIP: If you click on the arc endpoints in the wrong order,

Mastercam will draw the minor arc segment. If this happens,
click the Flip button on the ribbon bar to draw the other
segment.
7 Click OK to close the ribbon bar. The part should look like the
following picture:
Exercise 4: Drawing the arms

In this exercise you will draw the lines representing the arms of the
part. To draw the outside lines, you will draw lines tangent to the arc
at the elbow; then you will mirror them around the centerline to
create the other lines.
X Creating the lines tangent to the arc

You will draw the left line first.
1 From the menu, choose Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint.
The Line ribbon bar appears.
EXAMPLES / • 271
2 From the blueprint, you can see that the line is offset from
the centerline by 5 degrees. Enter 100 in the Angle field and
click the Angle button to lock in the angle. 4
3 Make sure the Tangent line button on the ribbon bar is
selected. This lets you create lines tangent to another entity
simply by selecting the entity; Mastercam will automatically
42
calculate the tangent point.
43
4 Click on the arc at the elbow near the tangent point.
4
45
5 Drag the line towards the arc at the end of the line, and click
when the line is close to but not touching it. 46
47
48
Note: Do not drag the line so close to the arc that the arc becomes
highlighted and the line “snaps” to it. If this happens, Mastercam 49
will create a line tangent to the second arc, instead of at the 100-
degree angle.
6 Click the Apply button to fix the line. 410

7 To draw the lower line for the horizontal arm, change the
angle to 5 degrees and press [Enter].
8 Repeat steps 4 and 5 and click OK to close the ribbon bar.
Your part should look like this.
X Mirroring the lines

To create the other lines, mirror the lines you just created about
the center line of each arm.
1 From the menu, choose Xform, Xform Mirror.
EXAMPLES / • 273
2 Click on line 1 in the following picture and press [Enter].
4
42
43
4
3 Mastercam displays the
Mirror dialog box. This gives 45
you many ways to specify
how you want to mirror the
selected geometry. In the
Axis section, select the Line
button. The dialog box
46
minimizes
4 Click on line 2.
5 Make sure that Copy is 47

selected, and click the
Apply button.
48
Mastercam draws the
mirrored line. The dialog
box remains on the screen
so you can select more
geometry.
49
6 Click on line 3 and press
[Enter]
7 Click on the Line button
410
again and click on line 4.
8 Click OK to close the dialog box.
9 Whenever you do an Xform operation, Mastercam displays

the original geometry and the new geometry in different
colors so that you can easily see the results of the operation.
Click the Clear Colors button to restore the original colors.
Your part should look similar to the following picture:
Exercise 5: Finishing the drawing

In this exercise you will use Mastercam’s trimming and filleting func-
tions to finish the drawing.
X Trimming the elbow arc

Use the Trim function to trim the arc at the elbow to remove the
segments that you don’t need.
1 From the menu, choose Edit, Trim/Break, Trim/Break. The
Trim/Extend/Break ribbon bar appears.
EXAMPLES / • 275
2 Click on the arc at position 1, then click on line 2. Mastercam

trims the arc and discards the portion that extends past the
line. 4
42
43
3 The Trim function remains active. Click on arc 1 again, and
then line 3. Mastercam trims the remaining arc segment. 4
X Creating the fillets

Next, create 10mm fillets at all the other intersections.
45
1 From the menu, choose Create, Fillet, Fillet Entities. The
Fillet ribbon bar appears.
2 Make sure the Trim button is selected. This means that
Mastercam will automatically trim each entity when it adds
46
the fillet.
47
3 Enter 10 for the fillet radius and press [Enter]:
4 To create each fillet, select the entity at each end of the fillet.
48
Click on each numbered location shown in the following
picture.
49
410
Mastercam creates each fillet automatically as you select the

second entity.
TIP: After selecting the first entity for each fillet, let the mouse
hover over other nearby entities. Mastercam will preview the
fillet arc it would create with the current settings.
5 Click OK to close the Fillet ribbon bar.
6 Finally, delete the original construction guides and your base

point. Click on each entity to select it, then press the [Delete]
key.
EXAMPLES / • 277
Your drawing is complete. It should look like the following

picture:
4
42
43
4
In the next series of exercises, you will create and post a toolpath to
45
machine the part. You will need any level of Mastercam Mill or
Mastercam Router to continue.
46
Creating a Toolpath
In this set of exercises, you will set up your machining job and create a
simple 2D contour toolpath to cut the part. After you complete these
exercises, you should be able to do the following:
47
Select a machine and create a machine group.
Set up a simple machining job.
Create a 2D contour toolpath.
48
Preview toolpaths using Mastercam’s backplot function.
Post a toolpath to generate an NC program for your machine.
All of the screen captures and illustrations in this section were taken
using Mastercam Mill. If you are using Mastercam Router, the steps
49
should be identical; any differences will be noted.
Exercise 6: Setting up a machining job

410
In normal use in your shop, before creating a toolpath, you will select
the machine definition for whatever machine tool you will use to cut
the part. Typically, this will be created for you by either your reseller or
another advanced user, and reused many times. Many specific tool-
path options, as well as the choice of post processor, are determined
by your choice of machine definition.
The following exercises were created with Mastercam’s generic Mill or
Router machine definitions (MILL DEFAULT.MMD or ROUTER
DEFAULT.RMD). However, if you wish to use the machine definitions
and post processors found in your shop, you should be able to
complete this example with most other mills or routers.
X Selecting the machine

1 From the menu, choose Machine Type, Mill and select the
Mastercam-supplied generic machine, MILL DEFAULT.
Note: There are actually two different types of default machine

definitions. MILL DEFAULT.MMD is a generic machine definition
supplied with Mastercam. The definition that appears when you
select Machine Type, Mill, Default
is typically a specific machine in your shop—for example,

TORQ-CUT 760.MMD. Choose Settings, Configuration, Start/
Exit, Default machine to set this. Your selection will be saved in
your .CONFIG file.
Notice that when you select a As soon as you select a machine, Mastercam creates a
mill machine definition, the title machine group in the Toolpath Manager where you will store
bar of the Mastercam window
changes from Mastercam
Design to Mastercam Mill.
EXAMPLES / • 279
the job setup, toolpaths, and other operations for the

machine.
4
42
X Changing your view
1 It will be easier to create the stock model and toolpath if you
43
are looking at your work in 3D and can see depths. In the
Status bar at the bottom of the screen, click Gview and select
Isometric (WCS).
2 Set the zoom scale so you can see the whole part with plenty
4
of space around it to include the tool and stock. Fit the geom-
etry in the screen and use either of the following techniques
to zoom out:
Press [Page Up] or [Page Down].
45
Use your mouse wheel.
3 Press [F9] to display the coordinate axes on the screen.
X Setting your file options

46
Set the name of the NC file you want to create, and review other
file options.
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the + sign next to Properties
to expand it.
47
2 Click Files. The Machine Group Properties dialog box opens,
displaying the Files tab. These tabs are where you will record
most of your job setup information. 48
3 Change the Group name to Tutorial project. Mastercam will
display this in the Toolpath Manager so you can organize
your toolpaths in a meaningful way.
4 Change the Toolpath name to Elbow.nc, keeping the path as
49
shown in the next image. This is the name of the file where
410
Mastercam will write the NC code, and that you will upload
to your machine tool.
5 Review the other settings on this tab. It shows the name of the
machine definition, control definition, and post processor
that you are using. It also tells you the name of the file where
the default toolpath parameters will be read from, and the
name of the tool library where you will select your tools. In
your actual machining jobs, machine groups might contain
many, many operations, so selecting the proper default
sources here can save you a great deal of time later.
X Defining your stock model

Assume that you will cut the part from an 8mm sheet of
aluminum.
1 Click the Stock setup tab.
2 Tell Mastercam which corner of the stock model represents

the origin, or zero point, of the model. Click the left corner as
shown here:
You can select either the upper corner or the lower corner,
depending on whether you want your stock origin at the
bottom or the top of your stock. For this example, select the
upper corner. The top of your stock will be Z=0, and your cut
depth will be a negative Z value.
3 Enter the dimensions of your stock. Type in the following
dimensions:
Y: 150
X: 200
Z: 8
EXAMPLES / • 281
4 Leave the stock origin at 0,0,0. This tells Mastercam the coor-
dinates of the corner that you selected in Step 2. Use these
coordinates to move the stock model to the part.
5 Select Display to show the stock boundaries in the graphics
4
window along with the part geometry.
Your stock settings should match the following picture:
42
43
4
45
46
47
48
6 Next, select the stock material. Go to the Tool Settings tab,
and, in the Material section, click the Select button.
Mastercam maintains separate

Mastercam displays the Material list dialog box.
7 From the Source list, select Mill-Library.
49
libraries for inch and metric
material definitions because it 8 Choose Aluminum-mm 5050 and click OK.
uses this information to calcu-
late feed rates.
9 In the Feed Calculation options, select From material. This
means that Mastercam will intelligently calculate default
410
feed rates and spindle speeds based on the hardness and
other characteristics of the selected stock material.
10 Click OK to close the Machine Group Properties dialog box.

You should see the stock model displayed on your screen like
in the following picture. If necessary zoom in or out to adjust
the scale.
Exercise 7: Creating the toolpath
X Selecting the geometry and tool

1 From the menu, select Toolpaths, Contour toolpath.
Mastercam displays the Chaining dialog box, which you use
to select the geometry for the toolpath.
2 Click on the geometry at the location shown in the following
picture, approximately where you want to start the tool to
start cutting the part.
Mastercam automatically selects all the geometry connected

to the line that you clicked on, and assigns a direction to it.
EXAMPLES / • 283
This is called chaining. The chain direction will be the direc-

tion the tool follows as it cuts the part. Your arrow should
point in the direction as shown in the following picture. This
ensures that you will climb-mill the part with a clockwise
4
spindle rotation.
42
43
TIP: When you click near one endpoint of an entity,
Mastercam automatically sets the chaining direction towards
the other endpoint.
4
3 Click OK to close the Chaining dialog box. Mastercam
displays the Contour toolpath dialog box, where you enter
the toolpath and cutting parameters.
45
4 On the Toolpath parameters tab, click on Select library tool,
select the 12mm flat endmill, and click OK. (Router users
should select a 12mm straight bit.) Mastercam automatically
updates the feeds and speeds based on the stock material,
46
toolpath type, and characteristics of the tool that you just
selected.
Note: You can always override the default values by simply typing 47
in a different value.
5 Click Coolant. The Coolant dialog box opens. It lists all the
coolant options that have been defined for the current
machine definition.
48
Note: For Router users, this button will labeled Options.
49
6 Turn on Flood coolant and click OK. Mastercam adds an
asterisk to the Coolant button to let you know that at least
one coolant option has been turned on.
410
7 Verify that your Toolpath parameters tab looks like the

following picture. Your feeds and speeds might not match
exactly depending on the tool and operation defaults on your
specific workstation.
Note: You can view the tool list as text details or as large or small
icons. To control the tool list display, right-click in the list area
and choose View.
X Entering cutting parameters

Most of the default values that you see when an operation parame-
ters tab is first displayed are read from the operation defaults file
(*.DEFAULTS) listed in the Files tab of the Machine Group Proper-
ties dialog box. When you create a new toolpath you will often use
many of the defaults and just change a couple of values.
1 Click the Contour parameters tab.
2 Mastercam automatically reads the Top of Stock from the
stock definition you created earlier. Enter a Depth of –8.0 to
cut all the way through the stock.
3 Adjust the Feed plane to 2.0.
4 Select the Break thru check box and click on the button to
enter a break through amount. This means that the tool will
cut into a spoil board and ensures a clean cut.
EXAMPLES / • 285
5 Enter 0.5 as the Break through amount and click OK.
6 If necessary, select Computer as the Compensation Type.

This means that Mastercam will adjust the tool positions that
it calculates to adjust for the width of the tool, instead of
4
outputting the G41/G42 codes which would tell the control to
calculate them.
7 If necessary, select a Compensation direction of Left. The
compensation direction and the chaining direction together
42
determine whether the tool cuts inside the contour or
outside it.
Your values should match the following picture. 43
4
45
46
47
X Creating entry and exit arcs
Mastercam gives you many options for how the tool approaches
48
and retracts from the part. You can create complex moves which
combine arcs, lines, helixes, and many other options, without
having to add extra geometry to your part.
1 Click Lead in/out.
49
2 Select Enter/exit at midpoint in closed contours. This
ensures that Mastercam will approach the part in the middle
of the line that you selected when chaining the geometry. If
this option is not selected, Mastercam starts the toolpath at
410
the endpoint of the first chained entity.
TIP: Use the Chain Manager to view more options for control-
ling the starting point of the toolpath. To open the Chain
Manager, click the Geometry icon in the Toolpath Manager for
any toolpath that contains chains for its underlying geometry.
3 The default option is to create an entry move which contains

both a line and an arc. Disable the entry line by entering a
Length of 0.0 in the Entry–Line section.
4 In the Entry–Arc section, enter a Sweep angle of 45.0.
5 Click the Copy button to automatically copy the Entry

dimensions for the Exit move.
6 Enter an Overlap distance of 5.0. This means that the Entry
and Exit arcs will overlap each other by this distance instead
of being on the same point, which could leave a burr or cusp.
7 Verify that your values match the following picture and click
OK.
EXAMPLES / • 287
8 Verify that your other values match the following picture and
click OK.
4
42
43
4
45
Mastercam draws the toolpath on the screen. It should look
like the next picture. When you see it on the screen, the rapid
moves are displayed in yellow and the feed rate moves are
displayed in blue. 46
47
48
49
410
Exercise 8: Previewing the toolpath

Mastercam includes two functions that let you preview toolpaths and
tool motion:
Use the Backplot function to analyze tool movements and
positions.
Use the Verify function to preview stock removal.
In this exercise, you will backplot the toolpath. In Verifying the opera-
tions on page 381 you will learn how to use the Verify function.
X Choosing Backplot options

You can select more than one 1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the folder icon next to the
operation for backplotting, or toolpath name to select it. It is selected when a green check
you can select all the operations mark appears on its folder:
in a machine group.
2 Click the Backplot button. Mastercam displays the Backplot

dialog box and display controls.
3 Mastercam lets you precisely control which toolpath
elements to display while backplotting. On the Backplot
dialog box, select the three buttons shown in the following
picture. These tell Mastercam to display the tool, tool holder,
and rapid moves.
4 Click the Options button. Use it to control how the tool, tool
holder, and toolpath movements will be displayed.
5 Change the tool and holder colors to match the following
picture, and click OK.
EXAMPLES / • 289
X Running the simulation

1 Click the Play button above the graphics window. The tool
and holder will appear and simulate cutting the part. 4
Mastercam reads the shape and
dimensions of the tool and
holder from information stored in
42
the tool library. You can change
or customize this if you wish.
43
4
2 Click the Expand button in the Backplot dialog box. The
dialog box expands to show two additional tabs of informa-
tion. 45
3 Click the Info tab. Mastercam displays the total run time and
length of the toolpath.
4 Click the Details tab. Mastercam will display detailed infor-
mation about each move in the toolpath as it occurs.
46
Note: This feature only works if you are previewing the toolpath
step by step. It will not update in continuous run mode.
47
Resize the window if necessary to see more of the tab.
48
5 Click the Slider bar above the graphics window to activate it.
49
Drag it back and forth to position the tool at different points
in the toolpath. Mastercam updates the Details tab with posi-
tion and feed rate information for each tool position.
410
TIPS: While the slider bar is active, you can also use mouse
and keyboard shortcuts to step through the toolpath:
• Press [S] to advance a single move and [B] to move back.
• Use the [Up] and [Down] arrow keys.
• Use the wheel on your mouse.
6 Select different views to look at the toolpath from other

angles using any of these techniques.
right-click menu
Gview button on the Status bar
the View menu
7 Click OK on the Backplot dialog box to return to the regular
Mastercam graphics window.
Exercise 9: Posting the toolpath

The post processor that will be used to post your toolpaths is speci-
fied in the machine definition. It is listed in the Files tab of the
Machine Group Properties dialog box:
Mastercam automatically sets the path for the post to a directory on

your workstation. Use the control definition to change it.
The only way to select a different post is to click the Edit button above
the machine definition file name , or click the Replace button to select
a different machine
X Posting the toolpath

1 Select the operation in Toolpath Manager.
EXAMPLES / • 291
2 Select the Post button. Mastercam displays the Post

processing dialog box.
3 If necessary, select Edit. This means that after Mastercam has
written the NC file, it will automatically open it so that you
4
You can select any number of
operations for posting, even if can review it. The file will open in the text editor that is speci-
they are in different machine fied in your System Configuration dialog box.
groups. Mastercam will auto-
matically write operations from 4 If necessary, select Ask. This means that Mastercam will
prompt you before overwriting a file that already exists with
42
different groups to different NC
files. the same name.
5 Verify that your other options match the following picture
and click OK. 43
4
45
46
Typically, the values in this dialog will be defaults that are set
You can specify default NC file

in the control definition.
6 Mastercam displays the Save As dialog box where you can
47
names for individual toolpaths if specify the name and destination folder. The default file
you do not want to use the name comes from the Machine Group Properties dialog box,
name in the machine group
properties. Select one or more
operations in the Toolpath Man-
and the folder from the control definition. Click Save to
accept the default. Mastercam writes the file and opens the
48
default editor.
ager, right-click and choose Edit
selected operations, Change
toolpath file name.
49
410
Your program should similar to the following picture.
The exact code that you see might be different depending on

the specific post assigned to your generic machine definition,
your generic machine and control definition settings, and
whether the post has been modified.
EXAMPLES / • 293
Example 2: Working in Different Planes

4
This section introduces you to drawing geometry and creating tool-
paths in different planes. You will use different construction planes to
create geometry on different faces of the part. You will use different
tool planes to create toolpaths on different faces of the part.
42
The part you will create is a right-hand door:
43
4
45
This job will require you to mortise the hinge and striker plate
46
pockets, drill screw holes, and mill the openings for the striker and
doorknob. Typically, this job would be performed on a gantry-style
router, using a right-angle head to cut the details on the sides of the
door, but Mastercam Mill users can easily create all the toolpath oper-
ations with any standard 5-axis mill or VMC.
47
The drawing exercises require Mastercam Design, which
means they can be completed by any Mastercam user.
The toolpath exercises require any product level of
48
Mastercam Mill or Mastercam Router. The generic mill and
router machine definitions supplied with Mastercam (MILL
DEFAULT.MMD and ROUTER DEFAULT.MMD) contain all
the necessary components to create the toolpaths.
The exercises in this section are dimensioned in inches. If you need to
49
learn how to switch between inch and metric modes, see Switching
between inch and metric modes on page 263.
410
Drawing the Door in 3D

Mastercam uses construction planes (Cplanes) to orient two-dimen-
sional entities, such as lines and arcs, in 3D space. Each Cplane is
aligned with a view. A view in Mastercam combines a planar orienta-
tion with an origin, and assigns a name to it so you can select it later.
Mastercam includes a number of standard views that correspond to
the faces of a cube, plus an isometric view. You can also define your
own views to align with part faces or features, or with fixtures on your
machine.
All of your work in the previous section was done in the Top view, as if
you were looking down on the top of the part. Whenever you switch
the Cplane to a different view or face, Mastercam rotates the XY plane
to align with the selected view. The Z axis typically corresponds to
moving toward or away from the part, normal to the Cplane.
In this section you will learn the following skills:
Using Cplanes and Z-depth to create a 3D drawing and to
locate geometry in 3D space.
Using the Translate function to copy geometry.
Using levels to organize your work.
Exercise 1: Drawing the outline of the door

In this exercise you will draw the outline and panels of the door as a
3D block.
Refer to the blueprint below for the dimensions of the door outline
and panels. The panels are not actually used in any of the toolpaths
for this job; they are there just to help you visualize the finished
product. Assume that the door will be 1.75 inches thick.
Figure 4-2: Door (overall dimensions)
EXAMPLES / • 295
X Drawing the outline

Typically router parts are dimensioned with the zero point at the
bottom of the part, on the spoil board, so we want to draw the top
geometry at a height of 1.75 inches. You can automatically “lock”
4
new entities at a certain height by selecting 2D mode and entering
a specific Z depth.
1 If necessary, create a new, blank Mastercam file and switch to
inch mode.
42
2 On the Status bar, click the 2D / 3D toggle switch to change
from 3D (default) to 2D.
3 In the Z field on the Status bar, type 1.75 and press [Enter]. 43
4 From the menu, choose Create, Create Rectangle. The Rect-
angle ribbon bar appears.
5 Enter 80.0 for the Length, 36.0 for the Height, and press
[Enter]:
4
6 Use the AutoCursor ribbon bar to place the corner point at
the origin. Click the down arrow in the AutoCursor ribbon bar
45
and choose Origin to quickly select the origin.
46
Mastercam places the rectangle with the corner point at 0,0. 47
Note: Even though the origin is at Z=0, because you are working in
2D mode, Mastercam automatically projects the selected point to
your specified Z depth, which is 1.75. 48
8 Fit the geometry on the screen.

49
X Creating guidelines for the panels
1 From the menu, choose Create, Line, Create Line Parallel.
The Line Parallel ribbon bar opens.
2 Click on the top edge of the door.
410
3 On the ribbon bar, enter 5.5 in the Distance field.
4 Click on the button next to the field. The field will turn red.
This means that the value in the field is locked and will not
change as you move the cursor in the graphics window. This
is useful when you want to repeat a Create function several
times with the same value.
5 Mastercam prompts you to select an offset direction. This
tells Mastercam on which side of the selected line you want
to create the copy. Click anywhere below the line.
Mastercam creates a new line 5.5 inches below the first line.
6 Next, click on the line on the left edge of the door to select it,
and then click to the right to create the line. Mastercam
reuses the current settings on the ribbon bar.
7 Click the bottom edge of the door, and click above it to create
the third guide.
8 Click Apply (not OK) twice to fix the line. The first click
returns focus to the ribbon bar. The second click fixes the
line.
Note: When Mastercam first creates an entity, it is “live.” This

means that if you make any changes to the ribbon bar settings,
they will be applied to live entities. When you click Apply,
Mastercam fixes the line so it is no longer live. If you do not do
this, when you change the offset distance for the next guide,
Mastercam would change this line.
9 Click the right edge of the door.

10 This time, change the Distance to 9.5 and press [Enter].
11 Click to the left of the line.

EXAMPLES / • 297
12 Click OK twice to close the ribbon bar. Your part should look
like the following picture.
4
42
43
X Adding the panels
1 From the menu, choose Create, Create Rectangular Shapes.
The Rectangular Shapes Options dialog box appears. This lets
4
you create rectangles with more options then the Rectangle
ribbon bar.
2 Click the Expand button to
display all the options.
45
3 Enter 34.25 in the Length field
and 9.75 in the Height field.
4 Click the buttons next to the
fields to lock them.
46
5 The Anchor grid lets you select
which corner of the rectangle to
use as the anchor point when
placing it. Select the upper-left
47
point.
6 Click on the upper-left corner
of the door guidelines in the
graphics window. When the
48
cursor is in the correct position,
a visual cue indicates an inter-
section.
7 Click the Apply button in the
49
dialog box to create the rect-
angle.
8 In the Anchor grid, select the
lower-left point.
410
9 Click on the lower-left corner of the guidelines to locate the

rectangle, and click Apply to create it.
10 Change the Length to 25.25
11 Using the rectangle drawing techniques you just learned,

place the other two panels at the other two corners of the
guidelines.
13 Click on each guideline to select it and press [Delete]. Click

between the panels so you do not accidentally select a panel
edge instead of a guideline.
14 If some of your lines disappear when you delete the guide-
lines, choose View, Repaint and they should appear when the
graphics window is refreshed.
Your part should look like the following picture.
X Drawing the bottom edges

To create the bottom of the door, use the Translate function to
copy the top outline.
1 It will be easier to see the new geometry if you are looking at
your work in 3D and can see depths. In the Status bar, click
Gview and select Isometric (WCS). If necessary, fit the
geometry to the screen.
2 From the menu, choose Xform, Xform Translate.
EXAMPLES / • 299
3 To easily select the entire outline of the door, set the General
Selection ribbon bar to Chain mode:
4
42
4 Click anywhere on the outside outline of the door and press
[Enter]. The entire boundary highlights and the Translate
dialog box appears.
43
5 Select Join. This creates a copy of the selected geometry and
automatically includes connecting lines to the original.
6 Different option groups give you different tools for selecting
4
the location of the copied geometry. Since you want to copy
the geometry a known distance in a known direction, enter
the coordinate vectors in the Delta fields. Enter –1.75 in the
Delta-Z field and press [Enter]. 45
Mastercam previews the new geometry on the screen. 46
47
48
7 Click OK.
49
8 Click the Clear Colors button to restore the proper colors.
410
Exercise 2: Drawing the striker plate and doorknob

openings
In this exercise, you will start creating the door details. One important
new skill you will learn is how to use levels to organize your work. You
can choose to group different sets of entities on different levels. This
makes it easy to selectively show or hide sections of your part. The
basic door outline that you just drew will be on one level, the hinge
details on another level, and the striker plate details on a third level.
You will also use a different color for each feature, so that all the
pockets are one color, screw holes a different color, and so on. This
will make it easier for you to select different features for toolpaths.
Use the following blueprints as a guide throughout this exercise. The
left print shows the doorknob opening on the front of the door, and
the right shows the striker plate pocket on the side.
Figure 4-3: Doorknob and striker plate dimensions
X Selecting a new level and drawing the doorknob opening

In this procedure, you will select a new level on which to place all of
the geometry for the doorknob and striker plate detail.
1 Click Level on the Status bar. The Level Manager dialog box
opens.
EXAMPLES / • 301
2 In the Level Manager dialog box, Level 1 should be high-

lighted in yellow, identifying it as the active level. Type the
name Door outline in the Main Level–Name field.
3 Type 2 in the Number field, and name it Doorknob detail.
4
Mastercam should highlight it as the active level.
42
43
4
45
4 Choose OK. The Status bar should display 2 as the active level
in the Status bar Level field.
5 Choose the Color button on the Status bar and change the
46
Current color to Light blue (color 11). Just type 11 in the field
to set the color and choose OK.
47
7 Enter 2.125 for the diameter on the ribbon bar and press
[Enter]. 48
8 Mastercam prompts you for the center point of the circle.
The doorknob opening should be located along the top edge
of the drawing, between the two panels. You will use the
blueprint dimensions to set its coordinates relative to a 49
410
known point. Select Relative from the AutoCursor ribbon

bar.
The Relative Point ribbon bar opens.

9 Click on corner of the door identified in the next image.
10 Type the coordinates x–37.5 y–2.1875 in the ∆ field and press

[Enter]. This tells Mastercam the distance from the selected
point.
11 Mastercam returns you to the Circle Center Point ribbon bar.

Click OK to fix the circle and close the ribbon bar.
X Setting the Z depth and construction plane

To draw the striker plate geometry, you need to set the construction
plane to the back face of your part. First select the Back Cplane to
properly orient the geometry, and then set the Z depth to the face of
the door.
EXAMPLES / • 303
1 Click Planes on the Status bar and choose Back (WCS). The
Cplane indicator at the bottom of the graphics window
changes to reflect your plane selection.
2 To set the Z depth, click Z on the Status bar. (Click the Z itself,
4
not the number field which displays its value.) Instead of
entering a value, you will select geometry and have
Mastercam automatically set the Z depth to it.
3 Mastercam prompts you to select a point. To set the proper Z
42
depth, you need to click on a point on the top edge of the
door. Choose Midpoint from the AutoCursor ribbon bar and
click on the door as shown in the following picture. 43
4
45
The Z depth should now be set to 36.
4 Click Gview on the Status bar and select =Cplane. This
46
aligns your view of the part with the construction plane, so
you are looking straight at the part.
5 Click the Screen-Fit button to center the part on the screen. 47
You should now be looking straight at the edge of the door.
X Drawing the striker opening

1 Before creating the circle for the striker opening, create a
guideline to locate it. From the menu, choose Create, Line,
48
Create Line Parallel. The Line Parallel ribbon bar opens.
2 Click on the left edge of the door.
3 On the ribbon bar, enter 37.5 in the Distance field and press
49
[Enter].
4 Click near the center of the door. Mastercam places the line.
5 Click OK twice to close the ribbon bar. 410

6 Next, zoom in on the line you just created so you can better
create the detail geometry. Press [F1] and drag a rectangle
around the line. Click to complete the rectangle, and

Mastercam zooms in to that area.
8 Enter 1.0 for the diameter and press [Enter].
9 Choose Midpoint from the AutoCursor ribbon bar and click

on the construction guide you just created. Mastercam
places the circle.
X Drawing the striker plate pocket

1 Change the color to Magenta (color 13). After using blue for
the circles to be milled/bored, you will use magenta for the
pockets that need to be mortised.
EXAMPLES / • 305
2 From the menu, choose

Create, Create Rectangular
Shapes. The Rectangular
Shapes Options dialog box
4
appears.
3 If necessary, click the
Expand button to display all
the options.
42
4 Enter 2.25 in the Length
field and 1.25 in the Height
field.
5 Enter 0.25 in the Fillet
43
radius field. Mastercam will
automatically place fillets on
the corners of the rectangle.
6 In the Anchor section, select
4
the center point option. Your
settings should look like the
picture at right.
7 Move the cursor near the
45
middle of the construction
guide and click when you see
the centerpoint visual cue
near the cursor. Mastercam
46
places the rectangle.
8 Click OK to close the dialog box. Your part should look like
the following picture. 47
48
X Drawing the screw holes
1 Change the color to Yellow (color 14).
49
Point.
3 Enter 3/32 in the Diameter field. Click the Diameter button
to lock the field. Notice that when you enter a fraction,
410
Mastercam automatically calculates the proper decimal

equivalent.
4 Next you will create one hole 0.75 inch on each side of the
construction guide. Choose Relative from the AutoCursor
ribbon bar.
5 Enter x0.75 in the ∆ field on the ribbon bar and press [Enter].
6 Choose Midpoint from the AutoCursor ribbon bar and click

on the construction line.
7 Repeat Step 4 through Step 6, using an offset distance of
x–0.75.
9 Delete the construction line. Your part should look like the
following picture.
10 Switch to Gview-Isometric to see the proper 3D orientation.
Exercise 3: Drawing the hinge pockets

You will create the hinges by drawing one complete hinge and
copying it to create the others. Like the doorknob details, you will
create the hinge geometry on its own level.
The following blueprints show the hinge location and dimensions of
an individual hinge. Refer to them throughout this exercise.
EXAMPLES / • 307
Figure 4-4: Hinge detail and placement dimensions
4
42
43
4
X Preparing to draw the geometry for the hinges 45
1 Click Planes on the Status bar and choose Front (WCS).
2 Since this edge of the door runs along the coordinate axis, the
Z depth will be 0. Enter 0 in the Z field on the Status bar.
3 Click Gview on the Status bar and select =Cplane so you can
46
look straight at the part.
4 Click the Screen-Fit button to center the part on the screen.
Notice that you can see the striker plate detail from the other
47
edge of the door. Unfortunately, it displays about where you
will need to draw one of the hinges. You can use the Level
Manager to hide it.
5 Choose Level from the Status bar.
48
6 Type 3 in the Number field, and type the name Hinge detail
in the Name field. You will store the hinge geometry on this
level. Mastercam automatically makes this the active level.
7 Click on the red check mark in the Visible column for Level 2.
49
As long as Level 2 is not marked as visible, none of the geom-
410
etry on that level will be visible in the graphics window. The

Level Manager should look like the following picture.
8 Choose OK to return to your drawing. Notice that the striker

plate geometry no longer appears.
X Outlining the first hinge

First you will draw the left hinge, and then you will copy it to the other
hinge locations.
1 Change the color to Magenta (color 13).
2 Choose Create, Line, Create Line Endpoint. The Line ribbon

bar opens.
3 Click the Vertical button. This sets the ribbon bar in a mode
to easily draw vertical lines.
4 Drag a line through the door and click to place it.
5 Type 10 in the position field next to the Vertical button and

press [Enter]. Mastercam moves the line to the X=10 position.
6 Drag another line through the door and click.
7 Type 14 in the position field and press [Enter].
8 Press [F1] and drag a zoom window around the two lines. You
can do this while the ribbon bar is still active.
9 Click the Horizontal button.
10 Drag a line through the two vertical lines and click.
11 Type 0.25 in the position field and click OK.

EXAMPLES / • 309
Your part should look like the following picture:.
4
42
43
X Finishing the first hinge
1 Choose Create, Fillet, Fillet Entities.
2 Enter a radius of 0.25 in the ribbon bar. 4

Click on the lines in the following places:.
45
46

47
4 Trim the lines that remain. Choose Edit, Trim/Break, Trim/
Break.
5 Click on the lines in the following order:
48
49
410
Click OK to close the ribbon bar. Your part should look like
the following picture.
X Marking the locations of the drill holes

Use the parallel lines function to draw guidelines inside the hinge.
Their intersection will mark the drill locations.
1 Create some guidelines to mark the drill locations. From the
menu, choose Create, Line, Create Line Parallel. The Line
Parallel ribbon bar opens.
2 On the ribbon bar, enter 0.5 in the Distance field and press
[Enter]. Click the Distance button to lock the field.
3 Click the left edge of the hinge and then inside the hinge.
Mastercam creates a copy of the vertical line.
4 Repeat Step 3 for the bottom and right edges of the hinge.
5 Click Apply twice to fix the third guide.
6 Change the Distance to 1.
7 Click the bottom edge of the hinge, and then click inside the
hinge. Mastercam creates the top guideline.
8 Click Apply twice.
9 Change the Distance to 1.25.
10 Create two more vertical guides. Repeat Step 3 for the left and
right edges of the hinge.
EXAMPLES / • 311
11 Click OK twice to close the ribbon bar. Your part should look
like the following picture.
4
42
X Drawing the drill holes

43
1 Change the color to Yellow (color 14).

Point. 4
3 Enter 3/32 in the Diameter field. Click the Diameter button
to lock the field.
TIPS: Most ribbon bar data entry fields store a list of recently
45
used values. If you wish, you can select the diameter from this
list.
46
47
4 Click at the following locations to place the drill holes.
48
49
410
6 Select each of the guidelines and press [Delete].
X Copying the finished hinge to the other locations

Use Mastercam's Translate-Copy function to copy the hinge to the
other locations. You need to make two copies at 30-inch intervals.
1 From the menu, choose Xform, Xform Translate.
2 Press and hold [Ctrl], drag a

window around all the enti-
ties in the hinge and click to
complete the window defini-
tion, and then press [Enter].
Mastercam displays the
Translate dialog box.
3 Click the Screen-Fit button
to fit the entire door on the
screen, so you can better
see the new hinges.
4 If necessary, select the Copy
option in the Translate
dialog box.
5 Enter 2 in the # of copies
field.
6 Enter 30 in the ∆X field and

press [Tab] to leave the field.
Mastercam displays a
preview of the new hinges.
Your dialog box settings
should look like the picture
at right.
7 Click OK to close the dialog
box.
8 Click the Clear Colors button to restore the proper colors.
Your part should look like the following picture:
You have finished drawing the door. In the next set of exercises, you
will create the toolpaths to cut all the features you have just drawn.
Machining the Door

In the previous set of exercises, you created the geometry for routing
all the features of a full-size passage door, such as hinge and striker
EXAMPLES / • 313
plate pockets and the doorknob opening. In this section, you will
create the toolpaths for them. You will create the following opera-
tions:
Use pocket toolpaths to mortise the slots for the striker plate
4
and hinges.
Drill the screw holes on each edge of the door for the striker
plate and hinges.
Circle mill the striker hole through the side.
42
Circle mill the doorknob opening.
You will use a right-angle block to rout the hinge and striker plate
pockets on the sides of the door and to drill the holes. You will use a 43
conventional tool to mill the doorknob opening on the front of the
door.
Mastercam organizes aggregate tooling information in a hierarchy of
heads, blocks, and tool stations. 4
A head is a complete assembly that responds to axis
commands and moves as a unit.
Blocks are mounted on heads and hold the individual tool
stations.
45
Tool stations are mounted on the block and hold individual
tools.
Large or complicated routers might have several heads, each of which
can contain several blocks. Each block, in turn, can have multiple
46
tools. In some instances, you will find that what is commonly referred
to as an “aggregate head” outside Mastercam is defined as a block
inside Mastercam.
To create the toolpaths described here, you will need to use a machine
47
definition that includes a right-angle block.
The generic router machine definition that ships with
Mastercam Router, ROUTER DEFAULT.RMD, includes the
proper components.
48
Mastercam Mill users can complete these exercises using any
machine definition that includes a rotary A-axis with at least
90 degrees of travel in each direction. The generic mill
machine definition, MILL DEFAULT.MMD, includes the
49
proper rotary axes.
Note: Aggregate tooling and right-angle blocks are also supported

in Mastercam Mill, but the generic mill machine definition does
not include any aggregate components.
410
The steps and screen captures that follow are taken from Mastercam
Router, but significant differences for Mill users will be noted.
Exercise 4: Setting up the job
X Selecting the machine and setting the tools

1 From the menu, choose Machine Type, Router, ROUTER
DEFAULT.RMD. Mastercam creates a router machine group
in the Toolpath Manager.
Mill users should select MILL DEFAULT.MMD and skip ahead
to Select file and material options on page 315.
2 In the Toolpath Manager, expand the Properties and click the
Files icon. Mastercam displays the Files tab of the Machine
Group Properties dialog box.
3 Click the Edit button in the Machine - Toolpath Copy section:
4 The Machine Definition Manager opens. In the Machine

Configuration list, expand the Router Head Group.
5 Expand the Router Spindle group, right-click the 4 Outlet 90

degree Aggregate, and choose Properties.
EXAMPLES / • 315
6 Mastercam lists all of the tool stations in a window. The four

stations are labeled according to their orientation: 0, 90, 180,
270. Each has a default tool. You will replace the default tool
with one from the tool library. To start, click on each of the
4
default tools and press [Delete].
7 Right-click on station 0 and choose Get tool from Tool
Manager.
8 In the Select tool dialog box, double-click the 0.25 inch flat
42
bottom or straight bit. Mastercam adds it to the tool station.
9 Repeat Step 7 and Step 8 for station 90. Choose a 3/32 inch
drill. 43
10 Repeat Step 7 and Step 8 for station 180. Choose a 0.75 inch
straight bit or flat endmill.
11 Change the Orientation from Fixed to Rotary. This will let the
head swivel so that each tool station can access each part
4
face.
12 Click OK twice to close the Machine Components dialog box
and the Machine Definition Manager. 45
X Select file and material options
1 While you are still in the Files tab, enter Right-hand door for
the Group name.
2 Change the Toolpath name to Right-hand door.nc. (Leave
46
the path unchanged.)
3 Select the Tool Settings tab.
4 In the Feed Calculation section, select From material. 47

5 Choose Select. Mastercam displays the Material List dialog
box so you can select the stock material.
6 Select Router-library from the Source list. Mastercam popu-
lates the window with all the material types that have been
48
defined in the router materials library.
7 Select Wood-Inch and click OK.
X Defining the stock model

49
1 Select the Stock Setup tab.
410
2 Select the lower-left corner for the stock origin. Router parts
are more often dimensioned with zero at the bottom of the
part.
3 To define the stock extents, click Select corners.
4 To make it easier to select all the geometry, click on Gview in

the Status bar and select Isometric (WCS), then click Planes
and select =Gview.
5 Drag a selection rectangle from the lower corner to the upper
corner of the door to capture the depth of the stock. To do
this:
a Select the lower corner of the left-most edge of the door.
b Drag the selection window up and to the right and select

the upper corner of the right-most edge of the door.
6 Select the Display option.
EXAMPLES / • 317
7 Make sure the coordinates of the origin are x0, y0, and z0.
Your stock settings should look like this:
4
42
43
4
45
8 Click OK to close the Machine Group Properties dialog box.
The red stock model boundaries should be the same as the
outside boundaries of the door.
46
X Displaying all the geometry
In the previous exercises, you organized the geometry for each
feature on its own level , so you could easily hide or display them.
Use the Level Manager to display all the geometry now.
47
1 Click Level on the Status bar.
2 Click All on. A red check mark should appear next to all the
levels.
48
3 Click OK. All the door geometry should now be displayed.
Exercise 5: Creating the pocket toolpaths 49

The first machining operations will be cutting the pockets for the
hinges and striker plate. Since the pockets are on the edges of the
door, you will use a tool plane (Tplane) to orient the toolpath prop-
erly. Selecting the proper tool plane tells Mastercam to output the
correct rotary codes to position the tool. In this case, it will rotate the
410
horizontal block 180 degrees when it switches from the front edge of
the door to the back edge. To generate the proper NC code, your post
processor must be configured for rotary output.
Since the hinge pockets and striker plate are on different edges, you
need to select a different Tplane for each. Each operation can have
only a single Tplane, so you need to create two operations, even
though you will use the same tool for all the pockets.
Note: Use Mastercam’s multi-axis toolpaths to rotate or change

the tool axis dynamically during an operation. These require Mill
Level 1 or greater, depending on which toolpath you are interested
in. Consult your reseller for more information.
In this exercise, you will learn the following new skills:

Using Tplanes to machine different sides of a part
Using incremental toolpath parameters
X Selecting the Tplane and geometry

The first pocket will be for the striker plate. Looking at the door in
isometric view, you can see that it is on the back of the part.
1 Click Planes on the Status bar, and choose Back (WCS).
2 Change the Gview to make it easier to select and work on the

geometry. From the menu, choose View, Orient, Flip X for Y.
3 If necessary, fit the geometry on the screen. You should now
be looking at the part from the back in an isometric perspec-
tive.
Notice that the status indicators in the lower-left corner of
the graphics window update so you are always oriented. The
The WCS is the World Coordi- set of axes shows you the orientation of the current Gview,
nate System. This is the “mas- and other indicators display the name of the views used for
ter” coordinate system. The other functions.
Gview, Cplane, and Tplane are
measured relative to it. All of the
exercises are done with the
WCS in the standard Top view.
To learn more about the WCS,
see Setting Planes /
Views / WCS on page 118. 4 Zoom in on the striker plate detail. Press [F1] and drag a rect-
angle around the geometry.
5 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Pocket toolpath. The
Chaining dialog box appears.
6 Click on the outline of the striker plate. Mastercam selects
the entire boundary.
EXAMPLES / • 319
7 Click OK to close the dialog box. Mastercam displays the

Pocket dialog box, where you can select the tool and enter
your cutting parameters. 4
X Selecting the tool
Router users will use an aggregate tooling block to cut the pocket.
Mastercam lets you define several different types of blocks:
Right-angle versus compound angle. This refers to the angle
42
of the tool axis. Right-angle blocks are fixed at a 90-degree
angle, while compound angle blocks let you fix the tool axis
at different angles.
Fixed position versus rotary. A rotary block can swivel so that
43
a single station can access several different faces of your part.
A fixed position block will have several stations, with each
one locked to a specific orientation.
In this exercise you will use a rotary, right-angle block with 4 tool
4
stations. One station will have the 3/32-inch drill, another will
have a 0.25-inch straight bit or flat endmill, and a third will have a
0.75-inch straight bit or flat endmill. (The fourth station will not be
used.) 45
Mill users should click Get library 1 Right-click in the tool display window and choose Get aggre-
tool and select a 0.25-inch flat gate. The Aggregate Selection dialog box appears.
endmill from the default tool
library and continue with Step 5. 2 The large window displays all of the aggregate blocks that are
included in the machine definition. You can expand each
46
definition to see the tool stations and individual tools
mounted in each. Select the 4-station rotary block and
expand it to see its tool stations.
3 Click on the 0/90 tool station to select it and use its 0.25-inch
47
tool.
48
4 Click OK to close the Aggregate Selection dialog.

49
5 Enter a Feed rate of 300.0
6 Enter a Spindle speed of 18000.0
7 Enter 150.0 for the Plunge rate and Retract Rate.

410
X Entering the cutting parameters

1 Select the Pocketing parameters tab.
2 Select the Retract option to activate it. Enter a distance of 0.5

and choose Incremental. Mastercam automatically orients
the cutting planes to the tool plane that you selected.
Selecting Incremental tells Mastercam to measure the
distance from the top of stock, instead of using an absolute
coordinate.
IMPORTANT: Selecting Incremental here doesn’t mean that

your NC program will be written in incremental coordinates, it is
just an option used internally by Mastercam to help you select
the desired positions. Use the Control Definition to tell
Mastercam whether you want to output incremental or absolute
coordinates (in other words, G90 or G91) when you post the
operations.
3 Enter a Feed plane value of 0.1, Incremental.
4 Set the Top of Stock to 0.0 and change to Incremental. When

you first entered this dialog, Mastercam automatically read
the Top of Stock position from the stock model and set the
coordinate to 36.0. Mastercam measures incremental top of
stock relative to the selected geometry.
EXAMPLES / • 321
5 Enter a Depth of –0.1, Incremental. An incremental depth is

measured relative to the selected geometry. Your values
should look like the following picture: 4
42
43
4
45
6 Select the Roughing/Finishing parameters tab.
7 Select the Parallel Spiral cutting method.
8 Select the Spiral inside to outside option.

46
47
48
49
410
9 Since there is no need to have a finish pass for this pocket.

deselect the Finish option. Your values should look like the
following picture:
10 Click OK to close all the toolpath tabs. Mastercam draws the

toolpath on the screen. It should look like the following
picture:
X Routing the hinge pockets

You will use the same tool to rout the hinge pockets on the other
side of the door. When you select the different Tplane, Mastercam
will automatically swivel the head to the proper orientation.
1 From the Status bar, select Gview, Isometric (WCS).
EXAMPLES / • 323
2 Click the Screen-Fit button to fit the entire door on the

screen.
3 From the Status bar, select Planes, Front (WCS). 4
4 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Pocket toolpath. The
Chaining dialog box appears.
5 Click on the outline of each hinge as shown in the following
picture. Make sure you don’t select the outline of the door
42
instead. You can zoom in and out while selecting so that you
can easily focus on the proper geometry.
43
4
45
6 Click OK to close the Chaining dialog box. Mastercam
displays the Pocket dialog box again, where you can select
46
the tool and enter your cutting parameters.
Mill users can simply click on X Selecting the tool
the 0.25-inch endmill already
displayed in the window.
1 Right-click in the tool display window and choose Get aggre-
gate. The Aggregate selection dialog box appears.
47
2 Select the same 0/90 tool station you used in the previous
operation:
48
49
4 Enter a Feed rate of 300.0 410


1 Select the Pocketing parameters tab. You can see that
Mastercam has retained the values from the previous pocket
operation. Because you used incremental instead of absolute
values, most of them can be reused for this operation.
2 Change the Pocket type to Open, and click the Open pockets
button.
3 Select Use open pocket cutting method. Selecting this
option means that Mastercam replaces the Cutting method
selection in the Roughing/Finishing parameters tab.
4 Choose OK twice to generate the toolpath.
5 Zoom in on a hinge to see the toolpath detail. You can see

how the open pocket cutting method automatically starts
cutting inwards from the open edge.
Exercise 6: Drilling the screw holes

You will create two separate operations to drill the holes on either side
of the door. Even though your block can swivel so that it is capable of
drilling all the holes, since you need to use different Tplanes for each
face, you need to create separate operations. Since the block is
already on the side of the door with the hinges, you will drill those
first.
Note: Mastercam’s multi-axis toolpaths, such as Drill 5-axis,

would be able to drill or cut on different faces in the same opera-
tions.
EXAMPLES / • 325
X Hiding the toolpath display

Before creating the drill toolpaths, clear the graphics window of
the toolpath display. This will make it easier to see and select the
drill holes.
4
1 Fit the whole part on the screen.
2 In the Toolpath Manager, click the Select All button on the

toolbar. 42
3 Click the Toggle Toolpath Display button. (Do not click the
Backplot button, which looks similar.) The selected toolpaths
no longer display on the screen. To redisplay the toolpaths,
click the button again while the toolpaths are selected. 43
X Selecting the holes and drill
1 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Drill toolpath. The Drill
Point Selection dialog box appears. 4
To identify drill points, you can 2 Select Entities.
use either point entities or arcs
3 Zoom in on the first hinge so you can see the holes clearly.
(Mastercam automatically drills
their center points). You can also
select lines or splines to have
4 Select each hole, going from left to right. You can click
anywhere on the arc; because you selected the Entities
45
Mastercam automatically drill at
option, all you need to do is select the arc and Mastercam
their endpoints.
automatically locates the drill point at its center.
5 Zoom in on each of the other hinges and select the holes for
each hinge.
46
6 Click OK in the Drill Point Selection dialog box. Mastercam
displays the Simple drill dialog box where you can select the
drill and enter the drilling parameters. 47
tool and select a 3/32-inch drill gate. The Aggregate selection dialog box appears.
from the default tool library.
8 Click on the 90/90 tool station to select it and use the 3/32
drill you mounted earlier.
48
X Entering the drilling parameters

1 Select the Simple drill - no peck tab.
49
2 Select the Clearance option to activate it and enter a clear-
ance height of 2.0 and choose Incremental.
3 Enter a Retract distance of 0.1 and choose Incremental. 410
4 Set the Top of Stock to –0.1 and select Incremental. This sets
the top of stock 0.1 inch below the chained geometry, which
adjusts it to the floor of the pocket that you routed in the
previous exercise.
5 Enter a Depth of –0.625, Incremental.
6 Turn off the Tip comp option.
7 Verify that your values match the following picture and

choose OK:
Mastercam generates the drill toolpath.
X Drilling the holes for the striker plate

1 Zoom in on the striker plate geometry.
2 From the Status bar, choose Planes, Back (WCS).
3 From the menu, select Toolpaths, Drill Toolpath.
4 In the Drill Point Selection dialog box, choose Entities.
5 Select the two drill holes in the striker plate and choose OK to
close the Drill Point Manager.
EXAMPLES / • 327
6 All of the other toolpath parameters are the same as the

previous operation, so just click OK. Mastercam creates the
new drill toolpath. 4
42
43
Exercise 7: Milling the holes
Mastercam includes dedicated circle milling toolpaths to efficiently
4
mill or bore large holes or openings. In addition to circle milling,
Mastercam includes similar toolpaths for slot milling and helical
boring. You will use these toolpaths to create the openings for the
striker and doorknob.
45
X Selecting the striker hole and tool
You will mill the striker opening first, since the block is already
positioned at this face. You need to make sure that the tool cuts
46
deep enough so that the striker hole penetrates the doorknob
opening. You will mill the hole using several depth cuts.
1 Choose Toolpaths, Circle Paths, Circmill Toolpath. The Drill
Point Selection dialog box opens.
47
2 Choose Entities and click anywhere on the arc for the striker
hole.
48
49
3 Click OK to close the dialog box. The Circle Mill Parameters
dialog box open.
410
tool and select a 0.75-inch flat gate. The Aggregate selection dialog box appears.
endmill from the default tool
library. 5 Click on the 180/90 tool station to select it and use its 0.75-
inch tool.
7 Enter a Feed rate of 300.0


1 Choose the Circmill parameters tab.
2 Select the Clearance check box and enter 2.0 for the clear-
ance height. Select Incremental.
3 Select the Retract check box and enter 0.25. Select Incre-
mental. Because you selected Incremental, Mastercam will
adjust the retract position for each cut depth.
4 Set the Feed plane to 0.1 and select Incremental.
5 Set the Top of stock to –0.1 and select Incremental.
6 Change the Depth to –1.25 and select Incremental.
X Creating depth cuts and finish passes

1 Choose the Depth cuts check box and button.
2 Enter a Max. rough step of 0.1.
3 Select the option to Keep tool down and choose OK.

EXAMPLES / • 329
4 To create a finish pass, select the Multi passes check box and
button.
5 Enter 1 for the Number of finish passes. 4
6 Enter 0.05 as the Spacing.
7 Select the option to machine the finish pass at Final depth.

This means that Mastercam will create one finish pass after
the final depth cut, instead of an individual finish pass at
42
each depth.
8 Verify that your parameters match the following picture and
choose OK. 43
4
45
46
47
48
49
410

choose OK.
10 Mastercam draws the toolpath on the screen. It should look

like the following picture:
X Selecting the doorknob hole

Use another circle milling toolpath to mill the doorknob hole.
1 From the Status bar, choose Planes, Top (WCS).
2 Choose Toolpaths, Circle Paths, Circmill Toolpath. The Drill

Point Selection dialog box opens.
EXAMPLES / • 331
3 Choose Entities and click anywhere on the arc for the door-
knob opening.
4
42
43
4 Click OK to close the Drill Point Selection dialog box. The
Mill users can just click on the

Circle Mill Parameters dialog box opens.
5 Right-click in the tool display window and choose Get aggre-
4
0.75-inch flat endmill already gate.
displayed in the tool window.
6 Click on the same 180/90 tool station you used for the
previous toolpath.
45
8 Enter a Feed rate of 300.0.
9 Enter a Spindle speed of 18000.0.

46
1 Choose the Circmill parameters tab.
2 Set the Top of stock to 0.0 and select Incremental.

47
3 Change the Depth to 0 and select Absolute, since you know
that the spoilboard is the part zero.
4 Choose the Break thru check box and button.
48
5 Enter a Break through amount of 0.02 and choose OK.
49
410

choose OK.
Mastercam draws the toolpath on the screen. Your two circle

mill toolpaths should look like the following picture:
EXAMPLES / • 333
Example 3: Lathe and Mill/Turn

Applications 4
In this section you will create turning toolpaths with Mastercam
Lathe. Later, you will also learn how to create C-axis toolpaths with
42
Mastercam Lathe for mill/turn applications.
The part you will machine is shown in the following picture:
43
4
45
46
The geometry has already been created for you. You need to set up the
47
machining job and create the toolpaths.
The basic turning toolpaths can be completed with any
version of Mastercam Lathe. These include the roughing,
finishing, grooving, and threading toolpaths on the OD.
48
The C-axis and mill/turn toolpaths require Lathe Level 1 or
greater. These include milling the hexagon and drilling the
holes in the flats.
49
410
2D Turning Toolpaths
Exercise 1: Setting up the job
X Organizing your geometry

1 If you are currently working in another Mastercam product
(Mill, Router, or Lathe), select Machine type, Design. When
you open a part with the Design machine type, Mastercam
does not automatically create a machine group if the part
does not contain a machine definition. The part you will use
in this exercise does not contain a machine definition.
2 Open the file EXAMPLE3.mcx from the \Documenta-
tion\ExampleParts folder.
3 The part geometry includes a 2D contour in the lathe Cplane
that you will use for the turning toolpaths, and 3D wireframe
geometry that you will use for the mill/turn toolpaths later.
Use the Level Manager to hide the 3D wireframe geometry
that you don’t need yet. Open the Level Manager by clicking
Level on the Status bar.
4 Click in the Number column for Level 2 to make Level 2 the
active level.
5 Click in the Visible column for Level 1 to toggle it off. Your
levels display should look like the following picture:
6 Click OK to close the Level Manager.
7 Mastercam includes special construction planes for working

with lathe geometry. These let you isolate specific quadrants
of the lathe plane and work in either radius or diameter coor-
EXAMPLES / • 335
dinates. From the Status bar, choose Planes, Lathe Diameter,

+D+Z to work in diameter coordinates:
4
42
Note: You can also create lathe toolpaths in the normal system top
plane. You do not need to use the diameter or radius Cplanes.
43
8 From the Status bar, choose Gview, Top (WCS). Your part
should look like the following picture. 4
45
46
X Selecting the machine and material
These exercises were created with Mastercam’s generic lathe
machine definition. If you wish, you can use the machine in your
47
shop.
The turning exercises in this section can be completed
with almost any conventional lathe.
To complete the mill/turn exercises, you will need a
48
machine definition with programmable spindle and live
tooling capability.
1 Select Machine Type, Lathe, LATHE DEFAULT.LMD.
Mastercam creates a lathe machine group in the Toolpath
49
Manager.
2 In the Toolpath Manager, expand Properties and select Files.
3 Change the Group name to Hex head.

410
4 Change the Toolpath name to Hex head.nc. Leave the path

unchanged.
5 Select the Tool Settings tab.
6 Select From material as the Feed calculation method.
7 Choose Select. Mastercam displays the material list.
8 Select Lathe - library from the Source list.
9 Select Steel inch - 440 Stainless-400 BHN as the stock mate-

rial and click OK.
TIP: Notice that Mastercam gives you both mill and lathe
material options. Use the mill options when creating mill tool-
paths on your lathe.
X Defining the stock boundaries

The stock definition functions in Lathe are significantly different
from the Mill and Router functions that you’ve seen in the previous
exercises. Mastercam Lathe integrates stock, chuck, tailstock, and
steady rest boundaries in a single display. If you are working with a
multi-spindle lathe, you can use this same dialog box tab to create
separate sets of boundaries for each spindle.
In this example, you will only work with stock and chuck bound-
aries for the left spindle.
1 Select the Stock Setup tab.
You could also choose Chain to 2 In the Stock section, make sure Left spindle is selected. Click
define the stock by chaining Parameters to define the stock by entering its dimensions.
geometry in your part file
3 Assume that you will use a piece of 5-inch bar stock, 11
inches long. Enter 5.0 for the OD.
TIP: To machine hollow stock, select ID and enter the diameter

of the hollow portion. Mastercam automatically uses the differ-
ence between the OD and ID as the stock thickness.
4 Enter 11.0 for the Length.
5 Use the Base Z section to tell Mastercam where the face of

your stock is located. Enter 0.1 for the position. This will let
you remove a small amount of stock with a face toolpath and
start your part at Z=0.
6 Select On right face. This tells Mastercam that the stock is
oriented in the left spindle for cutting in the –Z direction.
EXAMPLES / • 337
7 Verify that your stock dimensions look like the following

picture and click OK.
4
42
43
X Defining the chuck boundaries

4
1 In the Chuck section, make sure Left spindle is selected, and
click Parameters. The Chuck Jaw dialog box opens. You will
use it to define the size and shape of the chuck and how
much stock is gripped.
45
2 Use the default shape and clamping method. In the Position
section, select From stock to have Mastercam automatically
position the jaws at the stock diameter. 46
3 Enter a Grip length of 3.0.
4 Verify that your chuck settings look like the following picture
and click OK.
47
48
49
410
5 Mastercam returns to the Stock Setup tab. In the Display

options, select the options to display the Left stock and Left
chuck. (Deselect Right stock.) Mastercam will show the
boundaries in dashed lines along with your part geometry.
6 Verify that your Stock Setup tab looks like the following
7 In the Toolpath Manager, click the name Toolpath Group 1

twice slowly and rename it to Turning ops. Because this part
will have many operations, you will create separate toolpath
groups inside the machine group to keep them organized.
EXAMPLES / • 339
Exercise 2: Roughing the Outer Diameter
X Creating a face toolpath 4

Before roughing the stock, use a face toolpath to remove some
stock from the face down to Z=0.
1 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Face Toolpath.
2 From the tool display window, choose a Rough Face Right

42
tool.
43
4
3 Click Coolant and turn on Flood coolant. Click OK.
4 Select the Face parameters tab.

45
5 First, tell Mastercam how much stock to remove. Select the
Use stock option to have Mastercam automatically read the
stock model that you defined in the machine group proper-
ties. 46
6 Enter 0.003 in the Finish Z field. This tells Mastercam the
desired Z coordinate of the finished face.
7 Type 0.2 as the Entry amount. 47
8 Select the Rough stepover option and enter a value of 0.05 to
remove the stock in two passes.
9 Deselect the Finish stepover field because a finish pass isn’t
required here. 48
10 Enter an Overcut amount of 0.035. Mastercam will cut past
the centerline by this amount to remove any burr that might
be left over.
11 Enter a Stock to leave amount of 0.003.
49
410

choose OK.
Mastercam creates the following toolpath.
X Select the geometry for roughing the OD

1 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Rough Toolpath.
2 The Chaining dialog box opens so that you can choose the
geometry. Click the button for Partial chaining mode,
because you do not want to machine all of the geometry
(such as the front and back face):
EXAMPLES / • 341
Partial chaining lets you manually select the first and last
entity in the chain.
3 Click on the beginning of the first entity in the chain. (See the
next image.) You will probably need to zoom in on that
4
section of the part to select it.
42
43
4
Click this entity near the bottom, and the chaining arrows
should point up: 45
46
47
48
49
410
TIP: To zoom in, move the mouse over the graphics window
(you do not need to click in it), and then use the mouse wheel
or [PageUp] keys to zoom in. Use the arrow keys to pan.
4 Pan over to the other end of the part and click on the outside
diameter:
Mastercam selects all the entities on the chain between the

two entities that you clicked on.
5 Choose OK in the Chaining dialog box to close it. The Lathe
Rough Properties dialog box appears.
X Selecting the tool and roughing parameters

1 In the tool display window, choose an OD Rough Right tool
like the one in the following picture.
2 Click Coolant and turn on Flood coolant.
3 Click the Rough parameters tab.
4 Enter 0.015 for the Stock to leave in X.
5 Enter 0.005 for the Stock to leave in Z.

EXAMPLES / • 343
X Creating lead in/out moves

1 Select Use stock for outer boundary in the Stock Recogni-
tion section. 4
42
This means that Mastercam will intelligently calculate the
approach, retract, and clearance moves based on the actual
stock boundaries for each cut. 43
Note: Mastercam starts with the stock boundaries from the
machine group properties and adjusts them for all the toolpaths
preceding the current one. In this example, the stock boundary for
the roughing toolpath has been adjusted for the stock removed
4
with the facing toolpath.
Because the end of the chained geometry is in the middle of

the stock model, you need to tell Mastercam what to do
45
between the end of the chained geometry and the outside of
the stock model. You can either adjust the stock model (with
the Adjust stock button) or add an extra move to the end of
the toolpath. For this example, you will add an extra move to 46
the end of the contour. This gives you the most flexibility for
direction and length.
2 Click the Lead In/Out button. Mastercam displays the Lead
In/Out dialog box. 47
48
49
410
3 Your entry vector should have the following dimensions:
4 Select the Lead out tab.
5 Select the Add Line check box and button.
6 Enter a Length of 0.2 and an Angle of 135. This length should

be long enough to cover the distance between the end of the
chained contour and the stock boundary, at an appropriate
angle. Click OK.
EXAMPLES / • 345
7 Verify that your other lead out settings match the following
4
42
43
4
8 Verify that your other roughing parameters match the
following picture and click OK.
45
46
47
48
49
410
Your toolpath should look like the following picture.
Notice how Mastercam adjusts the stock boundary after each

operation to show how much stock is left.
Exercise 3: Cleaning out the remaining stock

If you zoom in on the narrow portion of the shaft, you can see that
the shallow groove was not machined because the roughing tool
was too large.
Create another roughing toolpath to clean out this area. This time,
you will select a finish tool, which is able to reach all sections of the
groove.
EXAMPLES / • 347
X Selecting the tool and geometry

1 Zoom in on the front section of the part.
2 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Rough Toolpath. 4

3 The Chaining dialog box opens. You should still be in partial
chaining mode. If not, click the Partial Chaining button:
42
4 Click on the front of the groove. The chaining arrow should
point down. 43
4
TIP: If your chaining arrow points in the wrong direction, click

45
the Flip button in the Chaining dialog box to reverse it.
46
5 Click where shown in the following picture to complete the
chain, and click OK to close the Chaining dialog box.
47
48
49
The Lathe Rough Properties dialog box opens.
410
6 Select an OD Finish Right tool.
X Entering the roughing parameters

1 Select the Rough parameters tab.
The default values for most of the cutting parameters should
work well. Mastercam should have retained the stock to leave
amounts from the previous rough toolpath.
2 Click Plunge Parameters. You need to tell Mastercam that
you want the tool to plunge into the groove.
3 Select the Allow plunging in relief option and click OK.
4 Click Lead In/Out. You will edit the approach and retract
moves to fit the groove geometry.
5 For the lead in move, select the Extend/shorten start of
contour option, and select Extend.
6 Enter 0.1 for the Amount. This creates a lead in move by
extending the wall of the groove.
EXAMPLES / • 349
7 Deselect the Entry Vector option. Your lead in settings

should look like the following picture.
4
42
43
4
8 Select the Lead out tab. You will create a lead out move that
follows the back wall of the groove, and then pulls off the part
at an angle. 45
9 Choose the Add line check box and button.
10 Enter a Length of 0.08 and Angle of 90 and click OK.

46
47
48
49
410
11 Make sure your Exit vector is set to 45 degrees with a Length

of 0.1, and choose OK.
12 Verify that your other parameters match the following picture

and choose OK.
EXAMPLES / • 351
Mastercam creates the toolpath. It should look like the

following picture.
4
42
43
4
Note: The other toolpaths aren’t shown here for sake for clarity.
Exercise 4: Finishing the OD 45

X Selecting the tool and roughing parameters
1 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, Lathe Finish Toolpath.
The Chaining dialog box opens. 46
2 Chain the first and last entities of the contour as shown in the
following picture.
47
48
49
3 The chaining arrow should point to the back of the part. Click
OK to close the Chaining dialog box. The Lathe Finish Prop-
erties dialog box opens.
4 In the tool display window, choose the same OD finish tool
410
you used for the previous toolpath.
6 Click the Finish parameters tab.
7 Click the Plunge Parameters button.
8 Select the Allow plunging in relief option and choose OK.

This will let you finish the groove that you roughed out in the
previous procedure.
9 For most of the other cutting parameters, the default values

should be adequate. Verify that your other settings match the
following picture and choose OK.
EXAMPLES / • 353
Mastercam creates the toolpath. It should look like the

following picture.
4
42
43
Note: The other toolpaths aren’t shown here for sake for clarity.
4
X Selecting the thread locations and tool
The final turning operation you will perform will create threads on
45
the shaft. The diameter of the shaft is 1 inch, so you will be cutting
a 1–12 UNF–2A thread.
1 Zoom in on the shaft at the front of the part.
2 From the menu, select Toolpaths, Lathe Thread Toolpath.

46
The Lathe Thread Properties dialog box opens.
Note: You do not need to chain any geometry for a thread tool-
path. All the thread dimensions are contained in the toolpath
47
parameters.
3 Select an OD Thread Right tool. 48

49
4 Select the Thread shape parameters tab. 410
You can also select Compute 5 Next, enter the start and end position of the thread. Click the
from formula to calculate the Start position button. Mastercam returns to the graphics
proper values, or simply type window to select the starting point.
dimensions directly in the field.
6 Click the point on the 1-inch diameter shown here:
7 Click the End position button and select the end point as
shown here:
X Selecting the thread form and allowances

Mastercam lets you specify the thread dimensions in several
different ways. Mastercam includes thread form tables for most
common thread forms, including Unified, Acme, and metric. In
this procedure you will enter the thread dimensions by selecting
forms from tables.
1 In the Thread Form section, choose Select from table.
Mastercam displays the Thread Table dialog box.
2 From the Thread form list, choose Unified - UNC, UNF.
3 Scroll through the list until you find the 1,12, UNF entry.
Select it and choose OK.
Mastercam automatically copies the proper dimensions to

the proper fields.
4 Follow the same process to get the allowance values. Select
the Allowances check box, and choose Select from table.
5 Scroll through the list until you find the 1,12, UNF entry.
Select it and choose OK.
EXAMPLES / • 355
TIP: Mastercam lets you edit the thread form and allowance
tables. You can edit the values or add new sets of values to fit
your own application needs. See the online help to learn more.
4
Your thread dimensions should look like the following
picture.
42
43
4
45
46
1 Select the Thread cut parameters tab.
2 From the NC code format list, select Canned. This tells
47
Mastercam to use your machine tool control’s canned cycles
when generating the NC code.
Note: To take advantage of the options in this list, you must

48
enable them in the active control definition. A number of other
fields on this tab are also enabled or disabled by the control defi-
nition for each different output type.
49
3 Enter 0.015 for the Amount of first cut.
4 Enter 0.0005 for the Finish pass allowance.
5 For Acceleration clearance, deselect the Compute option

and enter a value of 0.1.
410
6 Choose the Thread cut parameters tab. You can use the
default values for the other parameters. Verify that your
settings match the following picture and choose OK.
7 Mastercam generates the following toolpath.
X Previewing the part

In previous exercises, you have used Mastercam’s Backplot feature
to preview and analyze your toolpaths. Mastercam Lathe includes
an additional feature built around its stock recognition capabili-
ties that lets you preview your part as a solid model.
EXAMPLES / • 357
1 Right-click in the Toolpath Manager and choose Lathe stock

preview.
4
2 Mastercam opens the Lathe Stock Preview dialog box and

42
displays the remaining stock as a solid model. Deselect 3/4
view.
43
4
45
46
Note: Mastercam only displays the first and last threads to speed
processing time.
47
48
49
410
3 Use the view and zoom controls to zoom in or out and look at
the part from different angles. From the Status bar, select
Gview, Isometric (WCS) and zoom out to see the entire part.
4 Use the Original, Previous, and Next buttons on the Lathe

Stock Preview dialog box to see how the part looks after
different stages of machining.
5 Expand the dialog box to see options for showing/hiding the
stock, chuck, and other boundaries.
You’ve completed the turning toolpaths exercises. The next set of
examples will introduce you to mill/turn and C-axis applications.
C-Axis and Mill/Turn Toolpaths

Mastercam Lathe includes two main techniques for creating milling
toolpaths on your lathe:
Use the Lathe C-axis toolpaths that are included with
Mastercam Lathe for the most common contour and drill
applications. When you select one of these toolpaths,
Mastercam automatically sets the Tplane and Cplane to the
appropriate settings for the desired application. These tool-
paths also support Y-axis cutting and axis substitution.
EXAMPLES / • 359
Choose C-axis toolpaths from the Toolpaths menu and

select the desired toolpath. The active machine definition
must be a lathe or mill/turn machine that supports the
appropriate axes.
4
If your workstation is licensed for both Mastercam Mill and
Mastercam Lathe, you can also access any mill toolpath while
a lathe or mill/turn machine is active. Use mill toolpaths to
machine in planes or orientations not available with the
42
standard Lathe C-axis toolpaths, or to create toolpaths other
than contour or drill toolpaths — for example, pocket tool-
paths. You can set the Tplane to any view available in your
part, or use the Cview utility as a guide. Choose Mill from the
Toolpaths menu and select the desired toolpath.
43
To use either type of toolpath, your lathe must be equipped for live
tooling, your Mastercam machine definition configured with the
necessary rotary axis capabilities, and your post configured to
produce the proper rotary output.
4
The exercises here use the Lathe C-axis toolpaths, which require
Mastercam Lathe Level 1 or higher. The license requirements for mill
toolpaths vary with the specific toolpath desired; consult your
Mastercam reseller for more specific information.
45
Exercise 5: Machining the hexagon
You will create a cross-contour toolpath to machine the flats of the
hexagon. This will index the spindle to each location while an endmill
46
in a live-tooling turret cuts across the spindle axis.
X Preparing to create the C-axis toolpaths

1 The geometry that you need for the C-axis toolpaths is orga-
47
nized on a different level from the geometry you used for the
turning toolpaths. Click Level on the Status bar to open the
Level Manager.
2 Click in the Number column for Level 1 (3D wireframe
48
geometry) to make it the active level.
3 Click the red check mark for Level 2 to toggle it off. This will
hide the geometry you used to create the turning toolpaths. 49
410
4 Verify that your Level Manager display looks like the

following picture and choose OK.
5 Next, turn off the toolpath display for the turning toolpaths
so you can focus more easily on the other geometry. Click the
Select all operations button in the Toolpath Manager to
select all the toolpaths.
6 Click the Toggle toolpath display button to turn off toolpath
display for the selected operations.
7 Create a new toolpath group for the C-axis toolpaths. Right-
click the Hex head machine group in the Toolpath Manager
and choose Groups, New Toolpath Group. Mastercam adds
an empty toolpath group to the operations list and places the
insertion arrow in it.
8 Type the name C-axis ops and press [Enter]. Your Toolpath
Manager should look like the following picture.
EXAMPLES / • 361
9 If necessary, change the Gview to isometric and fit the part in

the screen. It should look like the following picture:
4
42
43
4
45
Instead of selecting the entire hexagon as one chain, you will select
each side individually as a separate chain. Mastercam will auto-
matically set the tool plane (Tplane) at the proper angle for each
face. When you post the toolpath, the proper rotary positioning
code will be output for each face.
46
1 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, C-axis Toolpaths, Cross-
Contour Toolpath. The Chaining dialog box opens.
2 Select single-chaining mode. When in this mode, each entity
47
that you select will be considered its own chain.
3 Click on each of the lines along the back edge of the hexagon,
48
starting with the top line, and click OK to close the Chaining
49
410
dialog box . Make sure each chaining arrow points counter-

clockwise. Click OK when you have selected all six lines.
The C-Axis Cross-Contour dialog box opens.

Notice that the Toolpath param- 4 Choose Select library tool.
eters tab is slightly different than
in the previous exercises. C-axis 5 Scroll through the tool list and find a 1-inch flat endmill.
toolpaths use the Mill/Router Double-click it to select it and close the dialog box.
version of the toolpath dialog 6 Click Coolant and turn on Flood coolant.
boxes.
7 Select the Rotary axis check box and button. The Rotary axis
dialog box opens.
8 Select Y-axis and click OK. Use this rotation type to have the
spindle rotate to a fixed position so that the tool can then
make linear moves across the spindle axis.
X Enter the cutting parameters

1 Select the Contour parameters tab.
2 Select the Clearance option and enter a clearance height of

1.0, Incremental.
3 Make sure the option to Use clearance only at the start and
end of operation is not selected. This ensures that the tool
retracts to the clearance plane after each cut, not just the last
cut.
4 Deselect the Retract option.
EXAMPLES / • 363
5 Set the Feed plane and Top of Stock to 0.0, Incremental.

Because the tool will be plunging off the part, in air, and
feeding in from the side in a straight line, you can rapid right
to the cut depth.
4
6 Set the Depth to 0.0, Incremental, to set the cut depth at the
height of the chained geometry.
7 Select Computer for Compensation type, and set the
Compensation direction to Left.
42
X Setting the lead in/out moves
The best lead in and out moves for this toolpath are to simply
extend the chained line in each direction so that tool makes just
43
one straight cut across the stock.
1 Select the Lead in/out check box and button.
2 Deselect the Entry and Exit check boxes. 4

3 Select the Adjust start of contour option.
4 Enter a distance of 150%.
5 Select the Extend option. 45

46
6 Click the Copy button to reuse these settings as the lead out
move. 47
48
49
410
7 Verify that your settings match the following picture and

choose OK.
X Creating multiple passes

One problem with this toolpath is that the flats are exactly 1 inch
wide. If you cut them with a 1-inch tool, there is a good chance
that the edge of the flat will have a burr or will not be smooth. To
ensure that the edge is smooth, cut each flat in two passes, with
the second pass offset from the first by a very small amount—just
enough to overlap the edge.
1 Select the Multi passes check box and button.
2 In the Roughing passes section, enter 2 for the Number of

passes.
3 Enter 0.01 for the Spacing.
4 Deselect the option to Keep tool down. You want it to retract

between each pass so it clears the part on its way back to the
beginning of the next pass.
EXAMPLES / • 365
5 Verify that your settings look like the following picture and
choose OK.
4
42
43
4
45
6 Verify that your contour parameters match the following
picture and choose OK.
46
47
48
49
410
Mastercam generates the toolpath. It should look like the

following picture.
Because the side of the tool will be in full contact with the
face of the part while you machine each flat, the turning tool-
paths in the previous section left a small amount of stock on
the face. This stock is removed by the endmill in this opera-
tion, resulting in a cleaner finish. If you zoom in closely, you
can see the gap between the part geometry for the back of the
flat and the face machined by the earlier operations.
EXAMPLES / • 367
Notice also that the stock model does not update for C-axis or
mill toolpaths as it did for the turning toolpaths because the
lathe stock boundaries are only a 2D simulation. Mastercam’s
Verify function has much more sophisticated tools for stock
4
preview, which you will use later to view the stock removal for
these toolpaths.
Exercise 6: Drilling the bolt holes 42

There are two sets of holes on the flats of the hexagons.
Three faces have a single hole that will be drilled and tapped.
The other three faces have two holes that will be milled and
43
counterbored to produce a flat bottom.
In this exercise, you will drill and tap the bolt holes with a 5/16-24
thread. You will create one operation for the first drill operation, and
then copy and edit it to create the other drill operations for the same
holes.
4
1 Turn off the toolpath display for the cross-contour operation.
Select it and click the Toggle toolpath display button.
45
2 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, C-Axis Toolpaths, Cross
Drill Toolpath. The Drill Point Selection dialog box opens.
3 Because you want to select center points of the arcs, choose
46
Entities.
47
48
49
410
4 Click on the three arcs as shown in the following picture.
5 Click OK to close the Drill Point Selection dialog box.

Mastercam automatically locates the drill points at the center
points of the arcs. The C-axis Cross Drill dialog box opens.
6 Choose Select Library Tool.
X Filtering the tool list

Tool libraries frequently contain hundreds of tools. Mastercam lets
you filter the tool list to save time when searching for a tool. You
can filter the tool list by tool type, material, or other criteria.
1 The first tool you need is a center drill to drill a start hole. To
help you find a center drill quickly, click Filter. The Tool List
Filter dialog box opens.
2 Click None to clear any previous selections, and then select
the Center Drill icon:
3 Because all the holes in the part are at least 0.25 inch in diam-
eter, apply an additional filter for tool diameter. Select
EXAMPLES / • 369
Greater Than from the Tool diameter list, and enter a diam-
eter of 0.2.
4 Click OK to display the filtered tool list. 4
5 Now only center drills larger than 0.2 inch are displayed.
Double-click the 0.500-inch center drill to select it.
X Entering the other toolpath parameters 42

1 Click the Rotary axis button.
2 Choose C-axis rotation and click OK.
3 Select the Simple drill - no peck tab. 43

4 Select the Clearance option and enter a height of 2.5, Abso-
lute. This sets the clearance plane outside the diameter of the
original stock model regardless of the geometry being
machined. You can be certain that the tool will clear the
entire part while it rotates into position for each hole.
4
5 Enter a Retract height of 0.1, Incremental.

45
choose OK.
46
47
48
49
410
Mastercam generates the following drill toolpath.
X Copying the operation

Follow these steps to make a copy of the drill operation. You will
repeat this procedure several times in future exercises to copy
other operations as well.
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click on the operation to select it. It
is selected when a green check mark appears in the folder:
2 Right-click and choose Copy.

3 Make sure the red insertion arrow is located at the end of the
operations list.
EXAMPLES / • 371
Mastercam will create the new operation wherever the inser-

tion arrow is pointing. If necessary, use the insertion arrow
controls to move it to the end of the operations list. 4
4 Right-click again and choose Paste.
The operations list in the Toolpath Manager should look like the
following picture:
42
43
4
45
X Selecting the tool for the pre-drill operation
Use a letter I drill (0.272-inch) to pre-drill the holes for the 5/16-24
tap. Drill the holes 0.75-inch deep.
1 Click the Parameters icon for the second drill operation. It
46
should be operation number 8.
2 Select the Toolpath parameters tab.
3 Click Select Library Tool.

47
4 Use the Filter controls to display drills instead of center drills.
(See “Filtering the tool list” on page 368.)
5 Double-click the LTR.I DRILL to select it. 48
49
X Changing the drill parameters and regenerating the operation 410

2 Change the Depth to –0.75.
3 Select the Tip Comp check box and button. Enter a Break
through amount of 0.1 and choose OK.
choose OK.
Mastercam marks the operation with a red X in the Toolpath

Manager:
This indicates that changes have been made to the toolpath

parameters or geometry, and that it needs to be regenerated
before it can be posted or previewed.
5 Choose the Regenerate all dirty operations button on the
Toolpath Manager toolbar.
Mastercam regenerates the toolpath.
X Creating the tap operation.

1 Make a copy of the drill operation you just created. Make sure
it is at the end of the operations list. (See “Copying the opera-
tion” on page 370.)
EXAMPLES / • 373
2 Click the Parameters icon for the new operation. It should be

operation number 9.
3 Select the Toolpath parameters tab. 4
5 Use the Filter controls to display right-hand taps instead of

drills. (See “Filtering the tool list” on page 368.)
6 Double-click the 5/16-24 tap to select it.
42
43
The list of drill cycles that are
8 From the Cycle list, select Tap.
4
available to you is determined by
the active control definition. The
actual list that you see displayed
for your machine tool might be
quite different from this, and
45
could even include custom or
job-specific cycles.
9 All the other settings should stay the same. Choose OK. 46
10 Regenerate the operation. Your operation in the Toolpath
Manager should look like the following picture:
47
48
Exercise 7: Milling the flat holes
The final task is to mill and counterbore the flat-bottomed holes on
49
the other three sides of the hexagon. Pre-drill the holes first to ensure
accuracy.
X Selecting the geometry 410

1 If necessary, turn off the toolpath display for the drill tool-
paths you just created. (See Step 5 on page 360).
2 Make sure the insertion arrow is at the bottom of the opera-

tions list.
3 From the menu, choose Toolpaths, C-Axis Toolpaths, Cross
Drill Toolpath. The Drill Point Selection dialog box opens.
4 Choose Entities.
5 Click on the six arcs as shown in the following picture.
6 Click Sorting to set the point sorting pattern. This ensures

that Mastercam will drill the holes in an efficient order.
EXAMPLES / • 375
7 On the Cross sort tab, select the pattern shown here. This
tells Mastercam to drill the points in order as it moves contin-
uously counterclockwise around the part. 4
42
43
4
45
46
8 Click OK. Mastercam prompts you to select the first point in
the pattern.
9 Select the arc center point option in the AutoCursor ribbon
bar.
47
48
49
410
10 Click on the arc shown here. Mastercam automatically picks

its center point as the start point for the toolpath.
EXAMPLES / • 377
Mastercam previews the drill point order as shown in the

following picture.
4
42
43
4
11 Click OK to close the Drill Point Selection dialog box.

45
Mastercam automatically locates the drill points at the center
points of the arcs. The Tapping dialog box opens.
Note: Because the drill holes will be off center, Mastercam auto-
46
matically sets the tool plane for each hole to be the same plane as
its arc. Because of this, you cannot use individual points for a
cross-drill toolpath, only arcs. To use point entities for the drill
location, use a C-axis drill toolpath. This will drill the holes on 47
center.
X Selecting the tool and entering the pre-drilling parameters

1 Choose Select Library Tool.
48
2 Double-click a 13/64-inch drill to select it. Use the Filter
controls to help you find it quickly. (See “Filtering the tool
list” on page 368.) 49
4 Click Rotary axis. Then choose Y-axis rotation and choose

OK. Since the holes are off center, once the part has been
rotated into position, the tool will need to move in the Y-axis
410
to be properly positioned for each hole.
5 Select the Tapping tab.
Note: The title of the tab and the dialog box changes with the
selected drill cycle. When you are creating a new toolpath, it will
show the last cycle used.
6 From the Cycle list, select Drill/counterbore.
7 Select the Clearance option and enter a height of 2.5, Abso-

lute.
8 Enter a Retract height of 0.1, Incremental.
10 Turn off Tip comp.

choose OK.
EXAMPLES / • 379
Mastercam generates the following drill toolpath:
4
42
43
4
45
X Milling the holes
Use a 0.25-inch flat endmill to finish the sides and bottom of each
hole.
46
1 Make a copy of the drill operation you just created at the end
of the operations list. (See “Copying the operation” on
page 370.)
2 Click the Parameters icon for the new operation.
47

5 Double-click a 0.25-inch flat endmill to select it. Use the
48
Filter controls to help find it quickly. (See “Filtering the tool
list” on page 368.)
6 Select the Simple drill - no peck tab. 49
7 Change the Depth to –1.0, Incremental.
410

choose OK.
X Creating the counterbore operation.

Use a 0.375-inch flat endmill to counterbore each hole to a depth
of 3/16 (0.1875) inch.
1 Make a copy of the drill operation you just created at the end
of the operations list. (See “Copying the operation” on
page 370.)
2 Click the Parameters icon for the new operation.

4 Click Select library tool.
If you wish, you can just change 5 Double-click a 0.375-inch flat endmill to select it.
the Diameter to 0.375 instead of
selecting a new tool. However, if 6 Select the Simple drill - no peck tab.
you do this, Mastercam will not 7 Change the Depth to –0.1875.
update the feeds and speeds
properly.
EXAMPLES / • 381
TIP: You can also type the fraction “–3/16” directly in the
Depth field. Mastercam will automatically calculate the frac-
tion.
4
choose OK.
42
43
4
45
46
9 Regenerate the two new operations. Your operations list in
the Toolpath Manager should look like the following picture.
47
48
49
X Verifying the operations
Use the Verify feature to preview the part and stock removal. You
can see the effects of both the turning and C-axis toolpaths.
410
1 In the Toolpath Manager, click the Select all operations

button.
2 Click the Verify button. Mastercam displays the Verify
preview screen with the unmachined bar stock. It is
surrounded by the Verify dialog box and the Verify ribbon
bar.
Use the Verify dialog box to control the display settings
and options.
The Verify ribbon bar is used to display detailed informa-
tion about tool movements and positions.
3 In the Verify dialog box, select the option to Stop after each
operation. Since you are verifying many operations, this will
help you focus on each operation individually.
4 Select the Verbose option. The Verify ribbon bar is populated
with numerous data fields. Whenever the playback is paused,
they will tell you about the current command and tool posi-
tion.
5 Click the Play button. You will see your part machined as a
3D solid. Mastercam will automatically pause after each tool-
path so you can review the results.
6 Click the Play button again to resume playback after each

pause, or click the Step button to advance one move at a
time.
EXAMPLES / • 383
Use Mastercam’s view and zoom controls during the play-

back to focus on specific features or details. As soon as you
right-click in the playback window or select a menu, the play-
back pauses so you can adjust the view.
4
7 Click it again to resume playback after each pause.
8 Click the OK button on the Verify dialog box to close it.

Congratulations! You’ve completed the Getting Started tutorial
42
exercises. Now that you have been introduced to Mastercam’s
capabilities, explore these other resources to learn even more:
Talk to your reseller about taking an in-depth Mastercam
training class. Your reseller is in the best position to support
43
you with training tailored to your specific needs.
Review the Mastercam Reference Guide to learn more about
specific Mastercam features, or consult the online help that is
built into the software. (The Reference Guide is installed in
4
PDF format on your workstation when you install
Mastercam.)
Open some of the many other sample parts installed with
Mastercam. These provide more examples of specific tool-
paths and applications.
45
46
47
48
49
410
• 385
Index
For more information on terminology and functions used in previous versions of Mastercam,
please refer to the Mastercam X Quick Reference Card included with your installation, and the
Mastercam Version 9 to X Function Map, located in the Mastercam \Documentation directory.
Numerics C
2D CAD
geometry example............................. 261 defaults ............................................... 70
toolpaths example ............................ 261 editing ............................................... 132
turning toolpaths example ............... 334 in Mastercam ...................................... 92
wireframe geometry example ........... 262 canned cycles
2D / 3D control definition defaults ................ 184
working in ......................................... 114 C-axis
3D contour toolpaths (mill / turn ) ........ 223
door drawing example ...................... 294 drilling toolpaths (mill / turn) .......... 223
5-axis toolpath example (mill / turn).......... 358
selecting geometry for toolpaths ...... 219 chaining
contour toolpaths ............................. 231
A defaults ............................................... 67
open and closed................................ 230
analyze
overview .............................................. 23
entities............................................... 148
setting chain direction...................... 230
arc entities
creating ............................................. 137
arcs
solids ......................................... 102, 105
synchronizing ................................... 231
56
techniques ........................................ 229
control definition defaults ................ 178
wireframe geometry.......................... 102
drawing example............................... 268
wireframe tips ................................... 105
attributes
chamfers
about ................................................. 106
creating ............................................. 140
assigning to transformed entities ..... 148
C-hooks
changing....................................110, 112
running user applications .................. 38
setting........................................106, 108
circle entities
AutoCursor
creating ............................................. 137
about ................................................... 92
circle toolpaths
customizing......................................... 95
Mill / Router...................................... 206
using FastPoint mode ......................... 94
color
using Override..................................... 96
defaults ............................................... 66
using visual cues ................................. 20
setting attributes............................... 106
setting, changing............................... 112
B communication
backplot defaults ............................................. 169
defaults................................................ 79 configuration
operations ......................................... 249 about ................................................... 60
backplot defaults ................................ 79
CAD defaults ....................................... 70
chaining defaults................................. 67 rotary defaults ................................... 179

color defaults....................................... 66 subprogram defaults......................... 186
converter defaults ............................... 64 text defaults....................................... 188
dimension attribute defaults .............. 72 tolerance defaults ............................. 168
dimension text defaults ...................... 72 tool defaults ...................................... 176
file type defaults .................................. 64 work system defaults ........................ 175
leaders / witness defaults.................... 74 control definitions
note text defaults................................. 73 about ................................................... 83
post processing defaults ..................... 78 adding post processors ..................... 165
print defaults....................................... 70 choosing............................................ 155
screen defaults .................................... 65 creating ............................................. 163
shading defaults .................................. 68 editing ............................................... 163
Solid defaults....................................... 69 listing all ............................................ 166
start and exit defaults.......................... 76 properties of...................................... 167
tolerance defaults................................ 63 toolpath defaults ................................. 85
toolpath defaults ................................. 77 validating .......................................... 166
configuration files (.CONFIG) working with ..................................... 161
about ................................................... 60 control files (.CONTROL)
managing ............................................ 61 working with ..................................... 161
merging ............................................... 81 converters
construction guides converting files.................................... 29
creating.............................................. 264 defaults................................................ 64
construction planes coordinate systems
about ................................................. 119 about (Lathe)..................................... 128
contour toolpaths about (Mill / Router) ......................... 119
about ................................................. 204 views and planes ............................... 119
chaining............................................. 231 coordinates
creating tabs...................................... 205 entering in FastPoint mode ................ 94
example .....................................277, 282 Cplanes
Control Definition Manager about ................................................. 119
about ................................................... 25 setting................................................ 121
accessing ........................................... 163 setting in Lathe ................................. 130
arc defaults ........................................ 178 cross-contour toolpaths
building a post processor list ............ 164 example............................................. 359
canned cycle defaults........................ 184 customizing
communication defaults................... 169 AutoCursor.......................................... 95
cutter comp defaults ......................... 181 Mastercam workspace ........................ 40
drill cycle defaults ............................. 183 right-mouse button menu .................. 49
editing ............................................... 163 shortcut keys ....................................... 56
feed defaults ...................................... 180 toolbars ............................................... 45
file type defaults ................................ 170 cutter compensation
helix defaults ..................................... 178 control definition defaults ................ 181
linear motion defaults....................... 177 Cview
machine cycle defaults...................... 182 utility ................................................. 223
misc integer / reals defaults .............. 173
NC dialog box defaults ...................... 171 D
NC output defaults............................ 172
Design
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS) ...... 187
about ................................................... 92
• 387
editing ............................................... 132 undeleting......................................... 133

dialog boxes events
working with ....................................... 16 undo and redo .................................. 132
dimension attributes examples ............................................... 290
defaults................................................ 72 2D contour toolpath ................. 277, 282
dimension text 2D geometry and toolpaths .............. 261
defaults................................................ 72 2D turning toolpaths ........................ 334
documentation 2D wireframe geometry .................... 262
resources ............................................... 6 about ................................................. 259
door C-axis mill / turn toolpath ................ 358
machining example .......................... 312 construction guides .......................... 264
drafting create new file ................................... 262
default properties................................ 71 cross-contour toolpath ..................... 359
dimension attribute defaults .............. 72 drawing a door .................................. 294
dimension defaults ............................. 75 drawing arcs...................................... 268
dimension text defaults ...................... 72 hinge pockets .................................... 306
leaders / witness defaults ................... 74 job setup ...........................277, 314, 334
note text defaults ................................ 73 lathe finish toolpath.......................... 351
drafting dimensions lathe toolpaths .................................. 333
configuration defaults......................... 75 line entities tangent and mirrored ... 270
drill cycles machining a door.............................. 312
choosing............................................ 208 mill / turn toolpaths ......................... 333
control definition defaults ................ 183 milling holes ............................. 327, 373
drill points pocket toolpaths ............................... 317
editing ............................................... 210 preview toolpath............................... 288
selecting ............................................ 208
sorting ............................................... 209
drill toolpaths
removing stock ................................. 346
roughing toolpath ............................. 339
trimming, filleting............................. 274
56
creating ............................................. 207 working in different planes............... 293
feature-based drilling ....................... 212
F
E FastPoint mode
editors using.................................................... 94
selecting .............................................. 90 feed rate values
engraving control definition defaults ................ 180
toolpaths ........................................... 228 feeds / speeds
entities recalculating ..................................... 248
“live” editing ..................................... 135 fields
analyzing ........................................... 148 entering values.................................... 18
changing attributes ........................... 110 locking and unlocking ........................ 18
creating ............................................. 134 files
deleting ............................................. 133 assigning defaults by type................... 64
editing ............................................... 144 control definition defaults ................ 170
live, fixed, phantom ............................ 22 conversion defaults............................. 64
selecting .............................................. 98 creating example .............................. 262
setting color ...................................... 112 merging ............................................... 29
shading................................................ 68 opening and translating ..................... 86
transforming (Xform).......................... 35 opening with other applications ........ 89
saving .................................................. 87 J
fillets job setup
creating.............................................. 140 example.............................277, 314, 334
example ............................................. 274
functions
adding to toolbars ............................... 48 K
key mapping (.KMP)
about ................................................... 57
G
General Selection
about ................................................... 20 L
using the ribbon bar............................ 97 lathe
geometry construction planes (Cplanes).......... 130
creating.............................................. 134 finish toolpath example .................... 351
modifying .......................................... 144 roughing toolpath example .............. 339
graphics view tool and machine definitions............ 129
about ................................................. 119 toolpath types ................................... 220
graphics window turning toolpath example ................. 333
about ................................................... 12 leaders / witness lines
changing the appearance of.............. 115 defaults................................................ 74
groups learning mode
activating from Toolpath Manager... 194 about ................................................... 20
creating.............................................. 195 Level Manager
machine............................................. 196 setting the main ................................ 150
managing ............................................ 12 using the right–click menu ............... 152
Gview levels
about ................................................. 119 about ................................................. 150
setting attributes ............................... 106
setting the main ........................113, 150
H libraries
HASP (operations, tools, materials).............. 27
about ..................................................... 3 operations ........................................... 27
helixes (entry) line entities
control definition defaults ................ 178 creating ............................................. 137
Help setting attributes ............................... 106
about ..................................................... 4 tangent and mirror example............. 270
using ...................................................... 4 linear motion (interpolating)
hinge pocket control definition defaults ................ 177
example ............................................. 306
horizontal machining center
tombstoning...................................... 127 M
machine cycles
I Machine Definition Manager
insert arrow (Toolpath Manager) about ................................................... 25
using .................................................. 194 machine definitions
interactive prompts about ................................................... 83
using .................................................... 15 changing............................................ 159
choosing............................................ 155
editing ............................................... 159
• 389
selecting ............................................ 157 NetHASP

machine group properties about ..................................................... 3
about .........................................192, 197 note text
changing a machine definition......... 158 defaults ............................................... 73
file options ........................................ 198
stock .................................................. 200 O
tool settings....................................... 199
operation defaults (.DEFAULTS)
machine groups
editing ............................................... 188
creating .............................157, 195, 196
setting ............................................... 187
machine types..................................... 35
operations
machining
editing ............................................... 242
job setup example .............277, 314, 334
folder icons ....................................... 237
overview ............................................ 154
libraries ............................................... 27
machining (CAM)
post processing ................................. 257
about ................................................. 153
using the insert arrow ....................... 194
main level
verifying ............................................ 252
setting........................................113, 150
Operations Manager
masking
about ................................................... 13
about ................................................. 100
material libraries
about ................................................... 27 P
menus pattern
adding functions to............................. 48 files ...................................................... 29
See also drop-down menus PDF
merge viewing .................................................. 7
pattern files ......................................... 29
Mill
specialized toolpaths ........................ 214
planes
example............................................. 293
Status bar options ............................. 122
56
toolpath types ................................... 203 views and coordinate systems .......... 119
mill / turn toolpaths.............................. 222 planes / views / WCS
C-axis example.................................. 358 setting ............................................... 118
Lathe examples ................................. 333 Status bar options ............................. 122
miscellaneous integer / real values pocket
control definition defaults ................ 173 toolpath example .............................. 317
miscellaneous shapes toolpaths ........................................... 212
creating ............................................. 138 point entities
creating ............................................. 136
setting attributes............................... 106
N position coordinates
NC
entering............................................... 94
changing the file name ..................... 245
post processing ..................................... 290
creating a program from a part file... 257
about ................................................. 255
dialog box defaults ............................ 171
control and machine definitions ...... 256
output defaults.................................. 172
defaults ............................................... 78
NCI files
posting example................................ 290
about ................................................. 256
post processors
nesting
about ................................................... 85
tips and guidelines ............................ 228
running the post ............................... 257
toolpaths ........................................... 226
text defaults in controls..................... 188 customizing......................................... 56

validating control definitions ........... 166 modifying ............................................ 58
primitive entities removing assignments........................ 59
creating surfaces and solids .............. 142 SIM licensing
printing about ..................................................... 3
defaults................................................ 70 Sketcher
about ................................................... 21
R using the toolbar ............................... 134
Solids
ribbon bars
about ................................................... 34
docking and undocking ...................... 19
defaults................................................ 69
navigating............................................ 17
primitives .......................................... 142
working with ....................................... 17
Solids Manager
right–click menus
about ................................................... 13
using .................................................... 23
spline entities
right-mouse button menu
creating ............................................. 141
customizing......................................... 49
start / exit
rotary motion
defaults................................................ 76
Status bar
Router
2D / 3D mode.................................... 114
block drilling ..................................... 225
about ................................................... 12
machining a door example ............... 312
planes / views / WCS ........................ 122
specialized toolpaths ........................ 214
stock setup
toolpath types ................................... 224
machine group properties ................ 200
running Mastercam................................... 2
subprograms
S support and services ................................. 8
safety zones surfaces
machine group properties ................ 201 toolpath types ................................... 215
screen display
changing............................................ 117
defaults................................................ 65
T
terms and concepts................................. 11
shading ................................................ 68
text (post processor)
selection
settings ................................................ 99
tolerances
using General Selection ...................... 20
separators
setting system defaults........................ 63
adding to menus ................................. 50
tool axes (Lathe)
adding to toolbars ............................... 50
rotating.............................................. 129
removing from menus ........................ 51
tool planes
removing from toolbars ...................... 51
about ................................................. 119
sequence numbers
tool settings
defaults.............................................. 172
machine group properties ................ 199
shading
tool tips
defaults................................................ 68
using.................................................... 15
shortcut keys
toolbar states (.MTB)
about ................................................... 25
about ................................................... 51
adding ................................................. 58
creating ............................................... 53
• 391
deleting ............................................... 54 nesting .............................................. 226

loading ................................................ 54 pocket (Mill / Router) ............... 212, 317
toolbars roughing example (Lathe) ................ 339
about ................................................... 14 Router ............................................... 224
adding ................................................. 48 specialized (Mill / Router) ................ 214
adding functions ................................. 48 surface............................................... 215
adding separators ............................... 50 wireframe.......................................... 213
customizing......................................... 45 toolpaths
customizing settings ........................... 41 about ................................................... 26
hiding / showing ................................. 52 associativity ........................................ 26
opening, saving, and resetting............ 45 chaining ............................................ 229
states ................................................... 53 common parameters ........................ 243
using the right–click menu ................. 55 creating ............................................. 202
toolpath groups defaults ............................................... 85
creating ............................................. 195 displaying.......................................... 240
Toolpath Manager editing ....................................... 242, 243
about ...........................................13, 192 parameters ........................................ 235
backplotting operations.................... 249 pocket example................................. 317
file options ........................................ 198 previewing example.......................... 288
icons .................................................. 237 reversing ........................................... 248
machine group icons ........................ 238 setting system defaults ....................... 77
machine group properties ........192, 197 synchronizing chains........................ 231
safety zone options ........................... 201 WCS and tool planes......................... 126
solid / surfaces icons......................... 238 tools
tool icons........................................... 238 control definition defaults ................ 176
using the insert arrow ....................... 194
toolpath operations
guidelines.......................................... 241
renumbering ..................................... 246
selecting .................................... 232, 233
Tplanes
56
icons .................................................. 239 about ................................................. 119
managing .......................................... 236 and WCS............................................ 126
safety zones ....................................... 201 transform
using the insert arrow ....................... 194 assigning entity attributes ................ 148
toolpath types using (Xform) .................................... 146
C-axis contour (mill / turn)............... 223 translators
C-axis drill (mill / turn) ..................... 223 converter defaults ............................... 64
C-axis example (mill / turn).............. 358 file types .............................................. 86
circle (Mill / Router).......................... 206 trim / break / extend
contour (Mill / Router) ..................... 204 example............................................. 274
contour example ............................... 277 using.................................................. 144
cross-contour example ..................... 359 turning toolpaths
engraving .......................................... 228 example............................................. 334
finish (Lathe) ..................................... 351 Lathe ................................................. 221
general turning (Lathe) ..................... 221 removing stock example................... 346
Lathe ................................................. 220
Mill .................................................... 203 U
mill / turn .......................................... 222
Undo
miscellaneous operations (Lathe) .... 224
using.................................................... 30
multi-axis .......................................... 217
units of measure (metric / inch)
changing.............................................. 82
user applications
running................................................ 38
V
verify
about ................................................... 80
operations ......................................... 252
running.............................................. 253
vertical turret lathes
setting views for ................................ 131
viewports
setting................................................ 117
views
changing in a viewport...................... 118
planes and coordinate systems......... 119
setting for vertical turret lathes......... 131
standard ............................................ 120
Tplane / Cplane (example) ............... 125
visual cues
dragging and dropping toolbars ......... 47
using AutoCursor ................................ 93
W
WCS
example .....................................127, 128
Tplanes .............................................. 126
views, planes, coordinate systems .... 119
work offsets
renumbering ..................................... 247
work system
workspace orientation ............................ 10
X
Xform
assigning entity attributes................. 148
transforming entities .......................... 35
using .................................................. 146
Z
Z depth
setting................................................ 114
Zoom
using .................................................. 116
671 Old Post Road
Tolland, Connecticut 06084 USA
www.mastercam.com
Printed in the USA on recycled paper.
Mastercam X Getting Started Guide 1-883310-41-5

MastercamX GettingStartedGuide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MastercamX GettingStartedGuide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Getting Started Guide

Mastercam® Getting Started Guide

U.S. Government Restricted

Trademarks Mastercam™ is a registered trademark of CNC.

Printed in the United States of America.

1. Introduction to Mastercam X ..........................................1

X Mastercam Menus ..............................................................28

Views, Planes, and Coordinate Systems .......................119

Communications ........................................................... 169

Miscellaneous Operations .............................................224

Finishing the drawing .................................................... 274

Note: For information on installing Mastercam, see the

In this section, you will learn about:

Note: Mastercam Wire will be available with a future release.

Or select Mastercam from the Windows Program menu. By

Note: You can also switch between Mastercam products by

Learning about HASP and NetHASP

Refer to the Mastercam X Installation Guide or contact your local

Using Online Help

The Field definitions tab provides pop-up topics of dialog box

complete list of all the post parameters available in

X To view a PDF document:

TIP: To display the PDF document in its own window, rather

2 To navigate through the document, use the bookmark list in

 Select a link to “jump to” the link destination, which displays

Note: For more information on working with PDFs, refer to the

Mastercam Support and Services

www.emastercam.com Mastercam global user forum

www.mastercam.com CNC Software, Inc. corporate Web

www.mastercamedu.com CNC Software, Inc. Educational Divi-

For assistance with installing Mastercam, its SIM or NetHASP, or to

 Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

TIP: Use Mastercam’s Zip2Go utility to gather Mastercam part

Important Contact Information

Phone (860) 875-5006

Fax (860) 872-1565

FTP Address ftp://ftp.mastercam.com

Internet Address http://www.mastercam.com

The Mastercam Workspace

Figure 1-1: Mastercam interface element overview

AutoCursor General Selection Function Interactive

Mastercam Terms and Concepts

 Graphics window  General Selection ribbon bar

 Status bar  Sketcher

 Toolpath and Solids  Live, fixed and phantom entities

 Interactive prompts  Right–click menus

 Tool tips  Shortcut keys

 Dialog boxes  Machine Definition / Control

 Ribbon bars  Toolpaths

 Learning Mode  Libraries (operations, tools,

 AutoCursor and Visual

Note: Mastercam is configured to display numeric data using a

Toolpath and Solids Manager tabs

TIP: Use standard Windows methods to resize the Operations

 The Toolpath Manager tab is where you define setup param-

Choose a function in the toolbar by clicking it. Mastercam provides a

In this example, as you create additional lines, the prompts continue

Button Ribbon bar icon

To expand or contract the dialog box,

In the Mastercam workspace, a blank Ribbon Bar displays just above

Navigating ribbon bars

TIP: Use tool tips to identify shortcut keys.

Note: Some ribbon bar buttons and fields may be unavailable

Select a link to “jump to” the link destination, which displays

Be ready to describe the problem in detail. Write down what

Graphics window General Selection ribbon bar

Status bar Sketcher

Toolpath and Solids Live, fixed and phantom entities

Interactive prompts Right–click menus

Tool tips Shortcut keys

Dialog boxes Machine Definition / Control

Ribbon bars Toolpaths

Learning Mode Libraries (operations, tools,

AutoCursor and Visual

The Toolpath Manager tab is where you define setup param-

Levels Manager View Manager

Toolpath Manager tab Solids Manager tab

Tool parameters tab Machine Definition Manager

Tool Manager Materials List

Drill Point Manager Toolpath parameters tab

Post Text page Tool parameters tab

File (page 29) Xform (page 35)

Edit (page 30) Machine Type (page 35)

View (page 31) Toolpaths (page 36)

Analyze (page 32) Screen (page 37)

Create (page 33) Settings (page 38)

Solids (page 34) Help (page 39)